Home

NCDware System Administrator`s Guide for UNIX Systems

1. Translations List all translations in the file or window Function keys for adding replacing and deleting in the Translations List Modifiers Keyboard Layout Figure 11 5 Keymap Editor Advanced Mode Display To enter advanced mode 1 Start the Keymap Editor using a method described in Starting the Keymap Editor on page 11 2 11 10 Reassigning Keyboard Functions Using the Keymap Editor Mapping the Keyboard Advanced Mode 2 Select View Advanced Mode The Advanced Mode window appears Advanced Mode Menus Tip All of the basic mode menus described on page 11 4 are available a ela oa blest in advanced mode Additional functions in advanced mode change Information selec ow help Text ro he Help men translations in the Translations List These functions are explained in Figure 11 6 which shows an enlarged view of the modifiers section in the advanced mode window and explains the modifiers Specifies that the modifiers in the Translations List and no others must Adds modifier key s to Specifies that the selected be present T
2. Option Tag Description bf X server filename ds DNS Domain Name System server host addresses gw Gateway ha Terminal Ethernet address hd X server directory hn Terminal hostname Boolean value specifies that the hostname be sent in the packet the hostname is taken from the name field which is the first field in the entry up to the first colon Preparing Terminals for Booting 3 7 Optional Preparations Before Booting Table 3 1 BOOTP DHCP Option Tags Continued Option Tag Description ip Terminal IP address ns IEN 116 name server host addresses sm Subnet mask to Time offset from Coordinated Universal Time ts Time server host IP address vm Vendor magic specifies the method of interpreting tags should always be set to rfc1048 t15 Domain name suffix t28 IP broadcast address t31 ICMP router discovery enabled t49 XDM X Display Manager host addresses listed in order of preference t144 Configuration file pathname the filename must be enclosed in quotes for example t144 usr lib X11 ncd configs erwhmx Dynamic IP Address Allocation using BOOTP To make sure that terminals power on immediately to a usable state after hardware and software installation NCDware provides automatic IP allocation through BOOTP This section describes how to use this feature The bootptab cfg File To enable automatic IP address allocat
3. Figure 2 1 A Network Computing System The X Window System The distributed networking environment described in the previous section is made possible by the X Window System X which is a client server system 1 The clients are the application programs Applications receive their input from devices attached to the terminal and display their output in windows on the screen The customary input devices are a keyboard and mouse but applications can also use a light pen trackball or touch sensitive screen for user input _ The X server is software that runs on the terminal and manages the terminal s hardware and its communications with the network 2 2 Introduction to Thin Client Devices and NCDware NCDware Software Figure 2 2 shows the core of the X client server environment X Application Client X Library X Protocol Host Computer Figure 2 2 X Client Server Model NCD Terminal NCDware Software NCDwa re consists of X servers the Boot Monitor and host resident software needed to support terminals Boot Monitor The Boot Monitor is firmware residing in PROMs programmable read only memory in a terminal s base The Boot Monitor 1 Assists in booting 1 Provides commands for running diagnostic tests and for accessing a terminal s configuration data Introduction to Thin Client Devices and NCDware 2 3 NCDware Software 1 Provides direct menu ba
4. Figure 14 1 Printing from a Java Application 14 10 Configuring and Using Java Setup Menu Equivalents for Java Configuration Parameters Setup Menu Equivalents for Java Configuration Parameters Table 14 3 lists the remote configuration parameters discussed in this chapter and the corresponding Setup menu field for each This information is provided for system administrators who use Setup menus to configuration terminals Table 14 3 Setup Menu Fields for Configuring Java When Changes Saved in Parameter Setup Menu Field Take Effect NVRAM java appletviewer command Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters gt Java gt AppletViewer Command java cache class file Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters Java Cache Class File java directory Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters gt Java gt Java Directory pref environment Setup Change User Immediately No Preferences gt Environment Variables time offset from gmt Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters gt Time gt Offset from GMT time server Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters gt Time gt Time Server time server retries Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters gt Time gt Time Server Retries Configuring and Using Java 14 11 Setup Menu Equivalents for Java Configuration Parameters Table 14 3 Setup Menu Fields for Configuring Java
5. Glossary 2 Boot Monitor Setup BOOTP bootptab file broadcast broadcast address CD ROM color depth color map color mode color support Configuration daemon configuration language A menu driven utility for simplified first time terminal booting accessed through the Boot Monitor Available only on terminals with Boot Monitor 2 6 or later TCP IP Bootstrap Protocol Provides information for downloading a server image to a terminal The configuration file used by BOOTP software A technique in which copies of a single packet are passed to all possible destinations An IP address that refers to all hosts on a network Compact disk read only memory The degree of richness or intensity of color In monitors the number of colors a video adapter can display at one time Also known as visual depth The X server structure that controls and allocates the colors available to client programs In monitors the available settings that can be changed at boot time 8 bit 16 bit and 24 bit In monitors a device that can display images in multiple colors as well as shades of gray Daemon that runs in the terminal and provides network and local access to a terminal s configuration data A set of commands used in remote configuration files and when accessing the Configuration daemon through TELNET configuration passwords DECnet DHCP Diagnostic daemon display DISPLAY DNS do
6. The type of network on The login hostname To configure a terminal to display a Login Chooser offering a specific set of hosts for login services 1 In the exec startup commands parameter include login For example exec startup commands login 2 In the login default hosts parameter specify the hosts to be offered in the Login Chooser Figure 5 3 A string describing the host which the host resides Figure 5 1 Listing Hosts in the Login Chooser 5 4 Login and X Session Management Specifying the Hosts Offered for Login Set the login xdm broadcasts parameter If other hosts might respond to broadcasts and you do not want them listed in the Login Chooser set the parameter as follows login xdm broadcasts ignore Ifother hosts might respond to broadcasts and you do want them listed in the Login Chooser set the parameter as follows login xdm broadcasts prompt If you want to restrict host choices to the hosts listed in the login default hosts table set the login restrict host choices parameter to true Otherwise the user can enter a hostname in the Host field of the Login Chooser and log in to that host After the user logs out the terminal displays a Login Chooser with a list of default hosts Listing All Available Hosts in the Login Chooser To configure the Login Chooser to offer login through all the available hosts Tip You can set the login xdm broad
7. h host1 hostn c ica host n network persist Function Displays the Login Chooser lists hosts to log into through XDM or DECwindows or a login banner if h is used Uses the ICA Client c ica option or WinCenter to connect to a Windows NT host The d option specifies the X server by default hostname 0 0 The h option specifies the host s The n option specifies the type of network protocol to use either tcp or ncdnet default is tcp The persist option causes the X server to continue to attempt to log in to a specified host s indefinitely See the ncdlogin 1 man page h hostname p portnumber Login gt Logout logout Logs the user out of the X session after displaying a warning dialog box See the ncdlogout 1 man page Terminals gt New Terminal term Displays the Terminal Host Choosers ctype type which list hosts to log into through terminal help emulation The ctype option specifies the connection type telnet lat cterm or serial and help lists the available options See the ncdterm 1 man page Terminals New 3270 tn3270 Displays the NCD 3270 terminal emulator which is compatible with IBM 3287 terminals requires a license The h option specifies the host to connect to the p option specifies the port number See the ncd3270 1 man page Starting and Configuring Local Clients 7 3
8. The NCD font server reads both bitmap and outline font formats The outline fonts included with NCDware are IBM Type 1 Adobe and Bitstream Speedo The font server can read any of the following bitmap font formats in either compressed or uncompressed form 1 SNF Server Normal Format from NCD Hewlett Packard IBM Digital Equipment Corp Santa Cruz Operations and Sun Microsystems not including Sun OpenWindows FB fonts 1 BDF Bitmap Distribution Format Using the NCD Font Server 1 PCF Portable Compiled Format 1 Scaled bitmap fonts Configuring Font Server Operation You may need to edit the font server configuration file usr lib X11 fs config to suit your site The config file is an ASCII file consisting of parameter names also called keywords each associated with a value or values in the syntax parameter value Configuration file conventions are LJ Entries are case sensitive 1 Commas separate values if the parameter accepts more than one value 1 A pound sign precedes each comment line Table 6 1 lists font server parameters permitted values default values and descriptions Table 6 1 Font Server Configuration Parameters Parameter alternate servers Value Type and Default List of strings nil Description Alternate font servers to be tried if the connection to the current font server is lost For example alternate servers tcp green 7001 tcp green 7002
9. color depth 16 bit and 24 bit support A 1 applications A 6 changing through remote configuration A 3 changing through Setup menus A 4 changing through the Boot Monitor 9 14 to 9 15 A 2 colormap flash A 1 effect of video memory on A 1 effects on visual and WinCenter colors A 2 in Windows Access 12 10 local clients A 6 WinCenter 12 26 X server extensions A 5 X server modules A 1 colormap flash 8 bit mode A 1 troubleshooting 18 27 WinCenter 12 24 12 26 with ImageTool 18 40 with PageView 18 41 compare command Local File Manager 9 5 config auto saved info extent of data to write to a file 4 18 Setup menu field for 4 30 config auto save file saving changes to a file 4 18 Setup menu field for 4 30 config auto save nvram saving data to NVRAM 4 17 Setup menu field for 4 30 Configuration daemon access from the Terminal Host Chooser 5 14 defined 4 20 messages in Console 8 3 password 4 21 4 29 configuration file directory 3 8 4 6 Index 4 configuration file see remote configuration configuration file font server configuration file Connect to New Unit Show Statistics 8 13 Connection to X server lost XRemote error message 18 33 Console access 4 14 8 1 command for 7 2 disabling 7 16 messages format 8 4 logging toa file 8 5 viewing 8 4 console local client command 7 2 Could not read symlink pathname in directory Boot Monitor message 18 8 crashes diagnosing 18 41 to 18 43 CRC error Boot Monitor mess
10. 1 Click on Apply at the bottom of the configuration window 2 The Messages field at the bottom of the window tells you when the changes take effect Applying changes means the changes occur immediately parameter will change at next boot after Apply is clicked on means the parameter changes after you reboot the terminal These parameters must be saved as described in the next section Saving Changes Tip The Remote Configuration Parameter Quick Reference provides a complete list of remote configuration parameters including whether a parameter is stored in NVRAM Some parameters can be saved in NVRAM all parameters can be saved in a configuration file Saving Changes in NVRAM A number of important parameters are stored in a terminal s NVRAM These parameters are set to default values at the factory If you change any of these parameters and select Save to NVRAM from the File menu or click on Apply the new values are saved in NVRAM If you don t want changes saved in NVRAM when you click on Apply set the config auto save nvram parameter to false Terminal Configuration Methods 4 17 Configuring Terminals Using Setup Menus Saving Changes in the User s Configuration File Tip To save changes into the user s configuration file you or the To a Pip a fain user can change the Setup parameters and save the changes to parameters Auto saved Into In the Configuration hide box m
11. 1 Change Quick Setup Contains the most common configuration parameters booting network file transfers session type XDM XRemote or terminal emulation and fonts Change Setup Parameters Contains all of the terminal s configuration parameters 1 Change User Preferences Contains parameters for customizing user preferences Selecting a menu item displays a configuration window that lists configuration parameter hide boxes The Boot ing hide box for example contains parameters for loading and executing an X server To reveal parameters click on a hide box You can also display parameters by selecting a group from the Sections menu at the top of the configuration window Write only parameters passwords and encryption keys are blank if not set and displayed as a series of asterisks if set Terminal Configuration Methods 4 15 Configuring Terminals Using Setup Menus Changing Parameters in Setup Menus Parameters are represented by several different kinds of fields Table 4 3 lists instructions for changing each type of parameter field Table 4 3 Setup Field Types or off Field Type To Change the Value Example slider Drag the slider to the right or left Change User Preferences gt Bell toggle button Click on the button to turn the parameter on Change User Preferences gt Keyboard Enable Keyboard Autorepeat radio button Click on one of the buttons offered to select a
12. Change the order of translations ps Select a translation from the Translations List Select Edit Cut or Edit gt Copy Select another translation and select Edit Paste Before or Edit gt Paste After 11 12 Reassigning Keyboard Functions Using the Keymap Editor 12 Accessing Windows NT Servers Tip Procedures in this chapter provide directions for configuring terminals through remote configuration files For system administrators who use the Console for terminal configuration information about Setup menu fields is provided at the end of the chapter This chapter describes d How to configure NCD terminals so users can connect to multi user Microsoft Windows NT servers The major topics are Overview and requirements including a description of the NCD ICA Independent Computing Architecture Client Using the Console s Windows Access chooser to configure and start connections via ICA or WinCenter Other methods of starting connections Using international keyboards with the ICA Client Configuring the ICA Client for master browser queries Using the wincenter parameters to specify colormap usage window size number of colors and audio for WinCenter sessions _ How to mount shared directories from Windows NT 3 51 or 4 0 servers so that NCD local clients can access the files Accessing Windows NT Servers 12 1 Overview and Requirements Overview and Requi
13. Sud login c ica ti Pubs h verdi c 256 g 1024x768 If you are starting an application on the specified host the last argument on the command line must be application For example if you are starting Microsoft Word you might use the following argument Word Configuring an Automatic WinCenter Connection For an automatic WinCenter connection use the login command in the exec startup commands parameter and specify a Windows NT host For example exec startup commands login pubs_nt Accessing Windows NT Servers 12 17 Other Methods of Starting Windows NT Connections Starting a Session with a Remote Shell Command See Chapter 7 for more You can start an ICA or WinCenter connection with the icaclnt arate on running local command or the wincen command and a remote shell command commands Starting an ICA Session To start an ICA Client session use the following command rsh ncdname icaclnt server arguments initial_program where ncdname is the terminal s hostname or IP address and server is the hostname or IP address of the Windows NT server Starting a WinCenter Session To start a WinCenter session use the following command rsh ncdname wincen server arguments initial_program where ncdname is the terminal s hostname or IP address and server is the hostname or IP address of the Windows NT server Starting a Session from Start Local Command in the Console
14. 1 Set old format to true if host side PPP is an older version RFC 1171 1172 The current version is RFC 1331 Figure 16 4 shows the default ppp interfaces table parameter for a terminal with three serial ports Control character Compression in Old formatting PPP frame format Port ppp interfaces table number 1000 true false false 1000 true false false 1000 true false false Maximum bytes in Passive a PPP frame mode Figure 16 4 The ppp interfaces table Parameter The ppp interfaces table parameter is not saved in NVRAM Setting Up XRemote 16 13 Setting Up XRemote Hosts Setting Up XRemote Hosts To set up a host for XRemote 1 Make sure the XRemote host resident software is installed on the host s where the user types the xinitremote command to start XRemote This command is installed on the boot host when you install NCDware 1 Make sure PPP or SLIP is installed and properly configured on the host if the user is running XRemote with either of these protocols If PPP does not start automatically provide the user with the command for starting PPP Preparing the User s Environment The tasks involved in preparing a user s environment for XRemote use are 1 Providing the user with the following information Method for starting XRemote XRemote protocol PPP SLIP or over the LAN Phone number of the host if using a modem Address or hostname of host where the helper i
15. Console Warning Messages low on memory licensing and logout Login Chooser NCD Terminal Emulator 3270 Terminal Emulator local Motif Window Manager Lock Screen Start Java Applet Change Quick Setup Change Setup Parameters Change User Preferences Show Version Show Memory Show X Connections Show Statistics Color Support for Third Party Applications This section provides information about applications running at 16 bit and 24 bit color depths 8 bit Applications in 8 bit Mode There are no functional changes in 8 bit color mode Applications should look and perform the same as in the previous releases of NCDware 8 bit Applications in 16 bit and 24 bit Modes Most 8 bit applications should work without changes in 16 bit and 24 bit color modes Applications that rely on an 8 bit pseudo color visual however may have problems Problems may also occur if applications assume that 8 bit pixmaps or A 6 Color Support for Third Party Applications images are supported One bit pixmaps bitmaps are supported at all color depths 16 bit and 24 bit Applications in 16 bit and 24 bit Modes Applications that display high quality graphics or images are usually careful about checking visuals pixmap depth and image depth For example a browser may check for a visual that it supports and chose the highest quality available Even these applications however may fail if they cannot find a visual they support Some optimiz
16. NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems Part Number 9300672 Revision A November 1998 Network Computing Devices Inc 350 North Bernardo Avenue Mountain View California 94043 Telephone 650 694 0650 FAX 650 961 7711 Copyright Copyright 1998 by Network Computing Devices Inc The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Network Computing Devices Inc shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material This document contains information which is protected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Network Computing Devices Inc Trademarks Network Computing Devices PC Xware and XRemote are registered trademarks of Network Computing Devices Inc Explora HMX Marathon NCDware ThinSTAR and WinCenter are trademarks of Network Computing Devices Inc PostScript Display PostScript FrameMaker and Adobe are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated MetaFrame and WinFrame are trademarks of Citrix Systems Inc UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Limited X Window System is a trademark of X Consortium Inc Windows 95 Windows NT and Windows Terminal Server are
17. Network Buffers net Status of the terminal s network buffers Network net Overall characteristics and operational status of the Interfaces terminal s network interfaces NFS nfs Statistics about NFS usage an alternative protocol for downloading an X server and reading and writing other files Parallel Daemons parallel Status of the Parallel daemon s terminal resident daemons that control the terminal s parallel ports Serial serial Status of the terminal s serial port s Serial Daemons serial Status of the Serial daemon s terminal resident daemons that control the terminal s serial ports SNMP snmp Statistics about SNMP TCP tcp Statistics about the TCP protocol 8 12 Getting Information About Terminal Operations The Console Statistics Menus Table 8 4 Show Statistics Window Continued 3 Parameter ion Displ Hide Box Group Informatio splayed TCP IP Name tcpip Statistics about the TCP IP name service which Service translates from IP addresses to domain names TFTP tftp Statistics about TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol usage the protocol used by NCD terminals to download a server and read and write other files Token Ring tokring Characteristics and operational status of the terminal s Token Ring interface UDP udp Statistics about the UDP protocol Unit unit Miscellaneous terminal attributes Wireless LAN pwireless Statistics about wireless terminals XRemote xremote S
18. Number of colors in the 16 16 colors WinCenter window 256 256 colors truecolor Available only on HMXpro24 terminals wincenter audio Whether WinCenter true WinCenter audio is enabled audio is enabled false WinCenter audio is disabled 12 26 Accessing Windows NT Servers About the WinCenter Configuration Parameters When you set the parameters listed in Table 12 5 their values are assigned to resources for WinCenter Table 12 6 lists the resources and their values The default value is shown in bold font Table 12 6 WinCenter Resources Set in NCDware Resource Values WinCenter resolution FullScreen 640x480 800x600 1024x768 1152x900 1280x1024 1600x1200 WinCenter colors 16 256 TrueColor WinCenter audio Enabled Disabled These resources can also be set through the wincenter resources parameter For example wincenter resources WinCenter colors 16 Wincenter audio Enabled Wincenter resolution Default Accessing Windows NT Servers 12 27 Accessing NT Files from NCD Terminals Accessing NT Files from NCD Terminals By mounting shared directories from Windows NT 3 51 and NT 4 0 servers you can make files in those directories available to local clients such as the NCD Mosaic Browser and Java applets The SMB Server Message Block protocol is used for accessing Windows NT files and the user must have permission to access the files Adding Directori
19. Summary of Local Clients Table 7 1 Local Client Menu Choices Commands and Functions Continued Console Name amp Location Terminals gt New 3179G Command and Options tn3270 gddm h hostname p portnumber Function Starts a 3270 emulation window for running mainframe graphics GDDM applications requires a license The loadps option enables programmed symbols support the S3 option specifies model type 3 the E option sets the terminal ID string to extended See the ncd3270 1 man page Terminals gt Keymap Editor keymap_editor Displays keyboard layouts and the actions associated with each key permitting a user to remap the keyboard for the 3270 Terminal Emulator ncd3270 or the NCD Terminal Emulator ncdterm See the keymap_editor 1 man page Terminals New Telnet term ctype telnet help Displays the Terminal Host Chooser that lists TELNET login hosts The ctype telnet option specifies a TELNET connection and help lists the available options See the ncdterm 1 man page Terminals gt New LAT term ctype lat help Displays the Terminal Host Chooser that lists LAT login hosts The ctype lat option specifies a LAT connection and help lists the available options See the ncdterm 1 man page Terminals gt New CTerm term ctype cterm help Displays the Terminal Host Chooser that lists CTERM login hosts requir
20. This utility reads the contents of the fonts scale file and any bitmap font files and adds them to the fonts dir file 5 Add the font directory to the terminal s font path To change the terminal s current font path use the pref font path parameter To change the terminal s default font path use the xserver default font path parameter If you change the default font path only you must reset the terminal before the change takes effect Freeing the DPS Cache By default the DPS module caches the contents of the color rendering file and the context initialization file when it is invoked for the first application It also caches fonts as it uses them Caching this information speeds processing for subsequent contexts To free the font memory in the cache select Utilities Free DPS Memory from the Console 17 12 Configuring Display PostScript Setup Menu Equivalents for Remote Configuration Parameters Setup Menu Equivalents for Remote Configuration Parameters Table 17 5 lists the remote configuration parameters discussed in this chapter and the corresponding Setup menu field for each This information is provided for system administrators who use Setup menus to configure terminals Table 17 5 Setup Menu Fields for Configuring XRemote When Changes Saved in Parameter Setup Menu Field Take Effect NVRAM dps resource path Setup Change Setup At boot No Parameters Display PostScript DPS
21. To start an ICA or WinCenter session from the Console s Utilities menu select Start Local Command In the dialog box that appears type an icaclnt or wincen command wincen server arguments initial_program or icacint server arguments initial_program where server is the hostname or IP address of the Windows NT server Adding an NT Session to the Default Root Menu To add connections to the NCD Window Manager s default root menu you can add wincen or icaclnt commands to the exec command menu parameter For example exec command menu 1 Verdi NT server icaclnt verdi Menu label Command line 12 18 Accessing Windows NT Servers Other Methods of Starting Windows NT Connections default root menu The notation 1 adds the new command to the end of the table and The default menu displayed the end of the menu Changes to this parameter take effect after the when the user presses a raises butsi the Tool NCD Window Manager restarts window For more information about window manager menus see Chapter 7 Connection through the Login Chooser ICA and WinCenter connections can appear in the Login Chooser Connections that Appear in the Login Chooser The following connections appear in the Login Chooser 1 Connections created in the Windows Access utility 4 WinCenter servers that respond to XDM broadcast requests from the terminal You can configure some attributes of WinCenter connect
22. XDM is not running on the host See Starting XDM on page 18 14 for information about testing for and starting XDM There is a network problem To check for a network problem try to TELNET to the host Logging in Through the Login Banner Fails If the user s attempt to log in fails m m The user may be typing the wrong password The user should be using the password set in the etc passwd file If you are using a shadow password file System V UNIX you may be using the wrong version of XDM The version installed by ncdinstall is not the correct version to use NCD Technical Support can provide the correct version for some hosts or you can use the version provided by your host vendor Troubleshooting 18 15 Troubleshooting XDM Login Failures Login Banner Keeps Reappearing Tip You can get sample Xsession files for various hosts from NCD s FTP or WWW server See Contacting Technical Support on page 18 45 If the user logs in and the Login Chooser or login banner reappears a few seconds later there is a problem in the Xsession or xsession file Check the xdm errors file or the user s personal error file xsession errors if any This problem may be caused by the following T setor setenv commands in the user s login file are not duplicated in either the user s xsession file or the user s shell startup file such as cshre for the C shell XDM does not execute the login
23. s For example as you move the mouse from one window to another the background color of the screen may unexpectedly change Colormap flashing disappears and the quality of color images is improved when you use either 16 bit or 24 bit color mode A 1 Setting Color Depth and Monitor Resolution With 16 and 24 bit color only the True Color visual is supported Setting Color Depth and Monitor Resolution You can set color depth in the Boot Monitor the remote configuration file or the Console Setup menus Monitor resolution can only be set in the Boot Monitor To use 16 bit or 24 bit color you must set the resolution and refresh rate according to the values listed in Table A 2 P L LLLE L f sonf LLELLE LL LL Selecting an unsupported screen refresh rate or resolution can damage the monitor Always refer to your monitor installation booklet and test to be sure the refresh rate or resolution selection is supported by the monitor Note that the test grid may appear even though a monitor is not rated to operate at the frequency selected Effects of Video Memory on Resolution and Color Depth The amount of video memory in the terminal affects the color depth and resolution 1 The Explora 400 has 1 MB of video memory The highest possible resolution is 800 x 600 for 16 bit color depth 24 bit color depth is not supported The Explora 450 or 700 has 2 MB of video memory The highest possible resolution at 16 bit color
24. 256 ncdlp truncates characters that do not fit on the page A typical value is 80 r Prints the pages in reverse order last page first False 0 Specifies that ncdlp does not interpret the filename asa False text file instead it simply dumps the file content to the printer x Specifies an XRemote host terminal connection False Using the Command Line Printing Utilities Table 10 2 ncdip Command Line Options Continued Option Description Default s serial_port Which serial port to use Permitted values are 1 1 Serial port 1 2 Serial port 2 with ESP board only 3 Serial port 3 with ESP board only p parallel_port Which parallel port to use Permitted values are 1 1 Parallel port 1 2 Parallel port 2 with PEP board only n network_port The TCP port on which the terminal listens for TCP Serial port 1 87 connections Change this value only if you modify the Serial port 2 5962 serial daemons table so that the Serial daemon is not Serial port 3 5963 listening on a default port h ncd_name The name or IP address of the terminal to which the Terminal named printer is attached When using XRemote use DISPLAY in the DISPLAY variable syntax for specifying the name for example variable hawk 0 filename The name of the file s to print If you don t specify a stdin filename ncdlp reads the file from standard input stdin press Ctrl D to terminate input Using th
25. Chapter 4 Terminal Configuration Methods Terminal Configuration Overview 4 1 Deciding How to Configure Terminals 4 2 Remote Configuration Files 4 2 Console Setup Menus Interactive Configuration 4 2 TELNET Interactive Configuration 4 3 Boot Monitor Setup Menus Interactive Configuration 4 3 Interaction of Configuration Methods 4 3 About Configuration Parameters 4 4 Read Write Parameters 4 4 Read Only Parameters 4 5 When Parameters Take Effect 4 5 Contents Configuring Terminals Using Remote Configuration Files 4 5 Host Resident Configuration Files Created by ncdinstall 4 6 The Terminal Specific Configuration Files 4 7 The Generic Remote Configuration File 4 8 Example Configuration File from the NCDware Distribution 4 10 Editing Remote Configuration Files 4 11 Configuration Commands Used in Remote Configuration Files 4 12 User Preferences File 4 12 Configuring Terminals Using Setup Menus 4 14 Displaying the Setup Menus 4 14 Changing Parameters in Setup Menus 4 16 Cancelling Changes 4 17 Applying Changes to the Current Configuration 4 17 Saving Changes 4 17 Loading Default Values 4 18 Configuring a Remote Terminal through Setup Menus 4 19 Configuring Terminals Using TELNET 4 20 Setting Passwords 4 20 Connecting to a Terminal s Configuration Daemon 4 21 Using Interactive Configuration Commands 4 22 About Configuration Parameters 4 25 Read Only and Write Only Parameters 4 25 Parameter Values 4 25 Setting Paramet
26. Groups 4 4 Terminal Configuration Methods Configuring Terminals Using Remote Configuration Files correspond to the hide boxes displayed in Setup Change Setup Parameters For example parameters in the boot group have names beginning with boot and correspond to the fields in the Change Setup Parameters Boot ing section All of the parameters in Setup Change User Preferences belong to the pref group Read Only Parameters See the Reference Manualforalisting Read only parameters are used to report statistics about a of each statistic field in Show terminal s operations You can view them using TELNET or in Statistics a description and the 7 rng corresponding remote configuration the Console s Show Statistics menu name When Parameters Take Effect See the Remote Configuration A given parameter may take effect Parameter Quick Reference for x aration aboutwhan each 1 Immediately after you press Apply in the Setup menus parameter takes effect or type an apply command when configuring a terminal via TELNET d At boot time At session startup time E LJ At context creation that is when the relevant X server module is loaded Configuring Terminals Using Remote Configuration Files This section describes how to configure terminals using remote configuration files and how to set up a user preferences file When you install terminals using ncdinstall it automatically creates configuration files
27. Keyboard Type Make sure the Boot Monitor keyboard menu and or remote configuration file are not set for the PS 2 type keyboard If you are using the PS 2 type keyboard make sure the keyboard menu and or remote configuration file are not set for the generic 101 key keyboard instead The default N 101 keyboard type is N 101PS on terminals equipped with Boot Monitor 2 8 0 or later the default is N 101US on terminals equipped with earlier versions of the Boot Monitor New Keyboard Not Working Properly 18 22 Troubleshooting When you plug in a new keyboard terminal power must be off or you must cycle power after plugging in the new keyboard The terminal does not recognize a new keyboard until the terminal powers on Keyboard and Keymap Problems If you see the following message while the terminal is booting the keyboard is not properly plugged in or there is a problem with the keyboard connector timeout on keyboard controller Escape Key Doesn t Work on VT 220 style Keyboard If you work in a Digital Equipment Corp environment but occasionally use UNIX instead of VMS the Escape key on the VT 220 keyboard does not work in the UNIX environment Set up an xmodmap 1 file to automatically map the Escape key when you are using UNIX Checking Keyboard Mapping If pressing a key doesn t give the expected result two X clients included in the MIT X distribution or the NCD Keymap Editor can help resolve the problem Usi
28. Managing Node Licenses If you add terminals to the network using ncdinstall you can enter node licenses at that time To establish node licenses after you have added terminals to the network or if you are not using ncdinstall to add terminals use the unit license key parameter to include a license key ina terminal s remote configuration file If a terminal has more than one node license include a unit license key parameter for each license After including a license key in a configuration file you must reboot the terminal for the license to become effective Managing Floating and Site Licenses Tip Some extensions are not unloaded when the user finishes using them therefore their floating licenses are not released To release the license the user must restart the X session NCDware includes Globetrotter Software Inc s FLEXlm license management software for managing floating and site licenses FLEXIm license management software supports Windows NT hosts as well as UNIX hosts The FLEXIm End User Manual and responses to frequently asked questions are provided in HTML format in the flexuser and flexfaq files in the terminals ncd Xncd 5 1 xxx directory on the NCDware CD ROM You can also obtain the manual from www globetrotter com The following sections outline the steps you may need to take to establish floating and site licenses For information about license management on WinCenter hosts see Setting Up Lic
29. Setting Browser Variables and Controlling Preferences About Proxy Servers firewall A router or other computer that controls access to the internal network by protecting it from external access The firewall can also be used to control outgoing traffic Proxy server software allows access to the Internet from within a firewall although some firewalls do not require proxy servers Proxy servers are application specific for example an FTP File Transfer Protocol proxy server permits or blocks incoming and outgoing FTP requests Proxy servers redirect connection requests from hosts on one side of the proxy host to hosts on the other side The proxy server authenticates and authorizes the requests establishes a connection and passes data back and forth Proxy overrides are hosts for which the browser should not use the designated proxy servers Bypassing proxy servers when accessing sites inside the firewall improves performance because all requests that use a protocol for which a proxy server is specified must go through that proxy server unless you specify overrides You can specify proxy servers for the HTTP FTP gopher and SOCKS protocols Specifying the HTTP Proxy Server and Overrides An HTTP proxy server enforces access control for traffic that uses the HTTP protocol to access Web documents If the HTTP proxy servers are not set up correctly users cannot retrieve URLs from outside the firewall Specifying t
30. The default TCP port is 5976 and the default TELNET port is 5996 You can change the defaults using the file manager tcp port and file manager telnet port parameters NFS Mount of a Local File System 9 8 Using a Local File System You can use the mount command to mount a terminal s local file system on a UNIX host You access the files via NFS After mounting the file system and configuring the terminal you can use standard UNIX commands such as cp mv rm mkdir rmdir to access the local file system If you use ncdinstall to add a terminal and you indicate that you want to export the local file system some of the parameters in the following procedure are set automatically in the terminal s remote configuration file To mount and configure access to a terminal s local file system 1 If the local file system is on a floppy disk make sure the file enable floppy filesystem parameter is set to true set automatically by ncdinstall 2 Make sure that file enable nfs server is set to true This starts the NFS server daemon on the terminal after the terminal is rebooted set automatically by ncdinstall 3 Mount the local file system on the UNIX host using the terminal s hostname and xfloppy or local to specify the local file system For example mount ncdu325 xfloppy u john floppy mount ncedu325 local u ncd325 If the UNIX host is one of the following note the recommended changes to the defaul
31. Tip If you are configuring an Access Point from a system running Proxim documents Ter r to three Windows 95 or NT or configuring an Access Point through a different types of stations In an NCD iAlconnecton follow thedirections in the Prodin wireless network only an Access seria co EC JON TOMO e o Point can be a master station The documentation NoD terminals ale simply stations If you are using a UNIX system to boot the Access Point and configuring the Access Point over the Ethernet this section provides additional information about using BOOTP DHCP and SNMP Using BOOTP DHCP BOOTP DHCP provides network configuration data to the Access Point when it boots An etc bootptab file entry for a Proxim Access Point contains the following data name ht ethernet ha address ip IP_address gw gateway nm subnet_mask where name Is the hostname of the Access Point address Is the hardware address on the back of the Proxim Access Point IP_address Is the IP address assigned to the Access Point 13 8 Configuring a Wireless Terminal Configuring the Access Point gateway Is the IP address of the gateway used by the Access Point to contact hosts that are not on the same network segment subnet_mask Is the subnet mask for the network segment connected to the Access Point It may be necessary to enable BOOTP DHCP on the network host see your vendor documentation Using SNMP Simple Network Management Pro
32. at boot serial daemons table Setup Change Setup Use Serial Protocol No Parameters gt Serial gt field immediately Serial Daemons Table all other fields at boot serial interfaces table Setup Change Setup Mode field at Current Mode Parameters Serial gt boot time all other and Hangup Serial Interfaces Table fields immediately are not saved all other fields are print lpr servers Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters gt Print gt Lpr Servers 10 14 Using Printers with NCD Terminals 11 Reassigning Keyboard Functions Using the Keymap Editor This chapter describes how to use the Keymap Editor to remap keyboard functions and add custom translations to keys for the 3270 terminal emulator ncd3270 and NCD Terminal Emulator ncdterm The topics in this chapter are 1 General information about the Keymap Editor Starting and exiting from the Keymap Editor Keymap Editor windows and menus Basic keyboard mapping Saving and applying keymaps Importing keymaps ODODO O O Advanced keyboard mapping translations About the Keymap Editor keymap The assignments of client 3270 or VT320 actions to keysyms Keysyms are the key press release events actions are functions specific to each client Each key on a keyboard has a default action associated with it When you press an alphabetic or numeric key the character printed on the keycap key label appears o
33. in the Length field 4 Click the Apply button The Test Network utility displays one of the messages listed in Table 18 5 Table 18 5 Test Network Messages Message Done hosts s IP answered all packets Meaning The terminal received a response from the host No such host The network was unable to find an address associated with the hostname you specified The hostname cannot be resolved or host doesn t exist Try using the IP address instead of the hostname Data corrupted in retry packet The host or the network medium is corrupting data Internal error Contact NCD Technical Support Time expired host IP not responding The terminal received no response from the host Reasons for Failures to Connect If you are not able to make a connection after running ping and Test Network the most common reasons are incorrect setting of the subnet mask gateway address or broadcast address either in the terminal s configuration or on the host 18 30 Troubleshooting Network Configuration Problems On the terminal check the settings of the ip subnet mask parameter the gateway specified for the terminal in the etc bootptab file and the ip initial default gateway 1 and ip initial default gateway 2 parameters On hosts these parameters are set and displayed using the ifconfig 8 utility Hosts with Multiple Ethernet Addresses If the connection problem is with a multi hom
34. information i i wes Setup menu fields is 1 Configuring the DPS resource path seen at the end of the T Configuring DPS font access by X clients chapter Requirements for using DPS O C O 1 Clearing the DPS cache to reclaim font memory DPS is available on HMX and Explora 700 terminals only and requires a license DPS Overview The DPS X server module allows PostScript applications to display their output on NCD terminals Such local servicing of DPS requests speeds application processing and reduces host and network loading NCD s DPS extension is based on Adobe s Display PostScript Level 2 software supports true WYSIWYG two dimensional graphics and provides access to all Type 1 scaled font libraries The Display PostScript imaging model is device independent allowing graphics to look the same on any supported platform An application that uses Display PostScript works and appears the same on all supported platforms without modification of the application Configuring Display PostScript 17 1 DPS Requirements Display PostScript performs the following functions m m m DPS Requirements Allows applications to scale rotate and render text graphics and scanned images at any angle Scales fonts to any point size Automatically adjusts the colors appearing in color graphics and scanned images on monochrome or grayscale monitors or on monitors with limited color selections Renders graphics that
35. s hostname to either the etc hosts equiv file or etc hosts Ipd file The rest of this section describes how to set up the print table and discusses printing from each of the local clients that use the print API Setting Up the Print Table This section describes how to set up the print table print Ipr servers parameter You can manually add entries to the print table and some entries are automatically placed in the table To manually add entries follow the examples in Figure 10 4 Entries are automatically placed in the table under the following circumstances 1 The first time a user attempts to print from the NCD Terminal Emulator or 3270 terminal emulator an entry is automatically added to the print table for each parallel port Also any improperly configured printers that have been added to the print table are removed 1 Ifyou configure a serial port for printing as described in Configuring the Serial Port and Serial Daemon on page 10 2 an entry for the port is automatically added to the print table 1 Printers that you add to the table through the Setup menus appear immediately in the Select Printers dialog boxes 10 10 Using Printers with NCD Terminals Printing from Local Client Menus Automatic entries for a terminal whose hostname is ncdu01 are shown in the first two lines of the example print table in Figure 10 4 i Host name Print Printer type Description Whether to where the q
36. see also Quick Start PC card PCL printing 18 26 PCMCIA cards see PC cards peripheral devices see printing floppy drive ping 1 18 29 Port Unreachable Boot Monitor message 18 7 PPP Point to Point Protocol for XRemote 16 11 to 16 13 ppp interfaces table for XRemote 16 13 Setup menu field for 16 18 ppp slip interfaces table for XRemote 16 12 Setup menu field for 16 18 pref local client command line options 7 7 see also Setup menus Change User Preferences pref compatibility decwindows keyboards 18 22 pref console key sequence Setup key redefining 7 15 Setup menu field for 8 15 pref environment environment variables for Java 14 10 environment variables for the browser 15 6 15 8 Setup menu field for 14 11 Preferences daemon defined 4 20 password 4 21 pref font extended diagnostics detailed font messages 8 6 Setup menu field for 8 15 pref font path current font path 6 7 Setup menu field for 6 14 pref xserver current pointing device 7 8 printing 3287 print emulator local client 7 9 cables for terminal s serial or parallel port 10 2 configuration parallel port 10 3 to 10 4 serial port 10 2 to 10 3 from local clients 10 9 to 10 13 from the Dialer 16 18 from the Terminal Emulator 10 12 Java applications and applets 10 13 14 10 NCD Mosaic Browser 10 12 ncdlp hostside print utility defined 10 4 file data type detection 10 5 syntax and options 10 5 to 10 7 XRemote usage 10 5 ncdprint hostside print utility
37. use for logging into host 5 14 to 5 15 Terminal Emulator continued see also Terminal Host Chooser Terminal Host Chooser command and options 7 3 configuring 5 14 to 5 15 defined 7 3 terminals adding to network and host databases 3 25 to 3 28 crash troubleshooting 18 41 to 18 43 deleting 3 28 hostname TCP IP determining 8 9 model determining 8 9 problems with insufficient memory 18 34 to 18 37 starting see booting statistics displaying 8 11 to 8 13 wireless see wireless term restrict host choices restricting login 5 15 Setup menu field for 5 19 test net local client 7 6 Test Network Console 7 6 18 29 18 30 command 7 6 defined 7 6 TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol enabling on host 18 12 file permission requirements 18 13 for Java 14 3 for the browser 15 8 to 15 9 secure TFTP font directory location 6 3 font directory pathnames 6 6 server module location 3 15 solving file service problems 18 12 status information 8 13 FTP aborted after 10 retries Boot Monitor message 18 8 FTP connection refused Boot Monitor message 18 9 FTP connection time out Boot Monitor message 18 9 Index 21 Index Tftp error 1 File not found Boot Monitor 18 8 Tftp error 2 Access Violation Boot Monitor message 18 8 TFTP no answer Boot Monitor message 18 7 TFTP timeout Boot Monitor message 18 8 tftpboot ncd 5 0 xxx java directory 14 2 time of day specifying with BOOTP DHCP 3 8 time server ho
38. usr lib X11 NCD fonts pcf MyAppFonts Setting the Font Path for the Current X Session Tip You can change a remote terminal s current font path by displaying the User Preferences window on your terminal and selecting Connect to New Unit from the File menu After entering the remote terminal s IP address or hostname and the User Preferences password or global password follow Step 3 through Step 6 6 6 Configuring Font Service You can set the terminal s font path for the duration of the X session This is useful for setting specialized font paths for individual users Setting the Current Font Path from the Console The current font path overrides the default font path To change the current font path from the Console 1 Select Setup Change User Preferences 2 If User Preferences passwords are set and enforced locally enter the read write password and click on OK 3 Open the Fonts hide box 4 Add delete or replace font directories in the Current Font Path 5 Click on Apply to put the new font path into effect 6 Click on Cancel to exit from the User Preferences window Using Bitmap Fonts See Chapter 4 for information about how this and other user preferences can be saved after the user logs out Setting the Current Font Path in the Remote Configuration File To change the current font path in the remote configuration file use the pref font path parameter This parameter over
39. wincenter audio parameter 12 26 12 30 wincenter colors parameter 12 25 12 30 wincenter numcolors parameter 12 26 12 30 wincenter resolution parameter 12 26 12 31 wincenter resources parameter 12 27 12 31 window manager see NCD Window Manager Motif Window Manager Window Mgrs Console defined 7 5 Window Size Setup menus 12 31 Windows Access adding connections 12 7 configuring 12 7 to 12 13 controlling access to 12 12 copying connections 12 9 displaying 12 12 editing connections 12 11 in Console menus 7 6 properties 12 9 removing connections 12 11 saving connections 12 12 see also Windows NT Windows NT applications published 12 9 starting automatically 12 9 12 11 working directory 12 11 12 15 connection methods compared 12 2 to 12 3 summarized 12 6 Index 23 Index Windows NT continued connections adding to root menu 12 18 automatic 12 17 commands for 12 13 to 12 19 in Login Chooser 12 19 starting 12 18 using Start Local Command 12 18 using the rsh command 12 18 using Windows Access 12 7 to 12 13 keymap files 12 20 license dat file 3 20 master browser ICA 12 22 shared directories mounting on terminal 12 28 see also Windows Access ICA Client WinFrame defined 12 2 wireless Access Point configuration 13 8 to 13 10 antenna 13 1 13 2 Boot Monitor commands 13 2 domain number 13 3 LAN adapter card 13 1 13 2 requirements 13 1 roaming 13 3 security ID 13 4 status information 8 13 13 5 to 13 7 sub
40. 12 see also terminal configuration Setup menus remote shell command restricting use 7 17 use for starting local clients 7 13 remsh 1 restricting use 7 17 use for starting local clients 7 13 Rescan Font Path Console 6 5 resolution monitor A 2 resources X Xdefaults file 7 18 for local clients 7 17 specification troubleshooting 18 17 XLFD requirement 6 4 Xresources file 5 2 Retry Attempts Setup menus 12 30 rgb txt file color definition file locating 9 13 18 11 root menu 12 18 customizing 7 11 default menu customizing 7 14 defined 7 11 router discovery specifying through BOOTP DHCP 3 8 rsh 1 restricting use 7 17 use for starting local clients 7 13 Index S screen display resolution how to determine 8 9 type how to determine 8 9 Searching for IP address IP Address Timeout Boot Monitor message 18 7 security see access control passwords serial connection logging in through 7 5 Serial daemon status information 8 12 serial port cable for printer connection 10 2 configuring printing 10 2 to 10 3 XRemote use 16 10 to 16 11 status information 8 12 serial daemons table configuration for printing 10 3 Setup menu field for 10 14 serial interfaces table configuration for printing 10 2 configuration for XRemote 16 11 configuring for printer 16 11 problems with NCD Terminal Emulator 18 33 Setup menu field for 10 14 serial interfaces table 16 11 server modules see X server modules setup local c
41. 12 28 Setup Menu Equivalents for Remote Configuration Parameters 12 29 Chapter 13 Configuring a Wireless Terminal The Wireless Network 13 1 Hardware and Software Requirements 13 1 Installing the PC Card 13 2 Configuring the Terminal 13 2 Changing the Domain Number 13 3 Changing the Roaming Configuration 13 3 Changing the Security ID 13 4 Displaying Wireless Information 13 5 Displaying Wireless Information from the Boot Monitor 13 5 Information About the LAN Adapter and Access Point 13 6 Network Statistics 13 6 Displaying Wireless Information from the Console 13 6 Displaying Access Point LAN Adapter and Signal Information 13 6 Displaying Wireless Network Statistics 13 7 XV Contents Displaying Wireless Information using TELNET 13 7 Displaying Access Point LAN Adapter and Signal Information 13 7 Displaying Wireless Network Statistics 13 7 Testing the Wireless System 13 8 Configuring the Access Point 13 8 Using BOOTP DHCP 13 8 Using SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 13 9 Installing the MIB 13 9 Making the MIB Accessible 13 9 Displaying and Changing Variables 13 10 Finding the SNMP Variables 13 10 Chapter 14 Configuring and Using Java Overview and Requirements 14 1 Java Files and Directories 14 2 Protocols for Accessing Java Files 14 3 Caching Java Files for Better Performance 14 3 Installing Java Files in a Non Standard Directory 14 3 Using Java Commands 14 3 Using appletviewer 14 3 Configuring the Comm
42. 16 16 defined 16 1 starting 16 4 host setup 16 14 Index 25 Index XRemote continued LAN connection about 16 3 setup 16 9 X server source 16 9 license requirement 16 5 log file 16 17 18 32 NVRAM reset 16 9 PATH variable required 16 15 printing 16 4 requirements 16 1 serial connection direct 16 8 modem setup 16 5 to 16 8 PPP versus SLIP 16 3 terminal configuration 16 10 to 16 11 X server source 16 2 starting xinitremote command 16 1 startup file 16 4 16 15 status information 8 13 terminal configuration 16 9 to 16 13 TMPDIR environment variable 16 17 troubleshooting 18 32 to 18 34 user environment preparing 16 14 16 16 xinitremoterc file 16 15 XREMOTETMPDIR environment variable 16 17 xservremote file 16 16 Xremote 1 XRemote helper program 16 1 XREMOTETMPDIR variable 16 17 Xreset file 5 13 Xresources file defined 5 2 xserver access control enabled Setup menu field for 5 19 XDM access control 5 9 xserver access control enabled default Setup menu field for 5 19 XDM access control 5 9 Index 26 xserver access control list authorized client connections 5 10 Setup menu field for 5 19 xserver access control list parameter 5 9 xserver color depth parameter A 3 xserver default font path effect of X server reset 6 5 in the default ncd_std file 4 10 overridden by pref font path 6 7 permanent font path 6 6 Setup menu field for 6 14 xserver default visual overridden by color depth setting A 2 overridden b
43. 18 37 Troubleshooting Display PostScript File Service Problems oe Zz ole Z R ig G Gc oe EA Most DPS failures are caused by file service problems To see all messages related to file service enable extended file diagnostics The parameter is file extended diagnostics Setup Change Setup Parameters File Service Extended Diagnostics After enabling Extended Diagnostics reboot the terminal and restart the application to see the additional messages DPS file service messages resemble the following examples ETFILE I OPENATTEMPT attempting open for usr lib X11 ncd dps fonts Helvetica ETFILE I MATCHATTEMPT attempting NFS open of sr lib X11 ncd dps fonts Helvetica on 191 42 155 70 for sr lib X11 ncd dps fonts Helvetica ETFILE I OPENSUCCESS open succeeded for usr lib X11 ncd dps fonts Helvetica DPS Applications on Solaris Systems This section describes how to use AnswerBook ImageTool and PageView on a Solaris system Running AnswerBook 18 38 Troubleshooting Problems with AnswerBook derive from incorrect setting of the OPENWINHOME environment variable or failing to set the variable If OPENWINHOME is set incorrectly an error message is displayed as shown in the following example setenv OPENWINHOME u ken answerbook Verifying AnswerBook environment Could not find the AnswerBook administration utility ab admin in u ken bin o9
44. 5 6 using ncd_std for starting local clients 4 10 X resources 7 17 Local File Manager access from the Terminal Host Chooser 5 14 commands 9 5 to 9 6 configuration 9 7 defined 9 3 global password for access 4 21 4 29 password setting and using 9 4 9 7 use of global password 9 7 port specification 9 8 starting 9 3 usage 9 3 to 9 6 local file system mounting 9 8 on a diskette 9 21 to 9 26 ona PC card 9 10 to 9 13 specifying on a floppy disk 9 2 specifying on a PC card 9 2 see also Local File Manager PC cards locale supported by the JVM 14 2 lock local client 7 6 Lock Screen Console 7 6 login file interaction with XDM startup files 18 16 replication of content in XDM startup files 5 7 Index 12 login local client command line options 7 3 login c ica 12 14 12 17 login on Windows NT hosts 5 17 Windows NT connections 12 17 see also XDM login banner defined 5 2 repeated appearance 18 16 see also XDM Login Chooser see XDM login hosts broadcasting for 5 4 how to determine 8 10 listing in the Login Chooser 5 4 to 5 5 specifying 5 3 see also Terminal Host Chooser XDM Login New X Session Console 7 3 login through the NCD Terminal Emulator see Terminal Host Chooser login default hosts Login Chooser configuration 5 4 5 5 Setup menu field for 5 18 Windows NT connections 12 19 login default hosts Setup menu field for 12 30 login ica enabled parameter 12 23 12 30 login ncddm enabled getting
45. 9 2 Managing Files in a Local File System 9 3 Configuring the Terminal for Local File Manager Use 9 3 Starting the Local File Manager 9 3 Hints for Copying Files 9 4 Local File Manager Commands 9 5 Configuring the Local File Manager 9 7 Specifying a Password 9 7 Setting Up Access Control for the Local File Manager 9 7 Specifying the Ports for Local File Manager Access 9 8 NFS Mount of a Local File System 9 8 Configuring a PC Card for Booting 9 10 Preparing the PC Card for Booting 9 10 Preparing the Terminal for Booting 9 13 Booting from a Local PC Card 9 13 NFS Booting from a Remote PC Card 9 17 Using a Local File System on a Diskette 9 21 Configuring a Terminal for Floppy Disk Drive Use 9 21 The ncdfloppy Commands 9 22 The ncdfloppy Command Line Syntax 9 24 ncdfloppy Naming Conventions 9 25 Setup Menu Equivalents for Local File System Parameters 9 27 xi Contents xii Chapter 10 Using Printers with NCD Terminals Overview 10 1 Connecting a Printer to a Terminal 10 2 Printer Cabling 10 2 Configuring Terminal Ports and Daemons 10 2 Configuring the Serial Port and Serial Daemon 10 2 Configuring the Parallel Daemon 10 3 Using the Command Line Printing Utilities 10 4 Setting Environment Variables 10 5 Using the ncdlp Printing Utility 10 5 Using the ncdprint Printing Utility 10 7 Printing from Local Client Menus 10 9 Setting Up the Print Table 10 10 Printing from Terminal Emulator Windows 10 12 Printing from the NCD Mosaic Brow
46. BROWSER_HOME environment variable 15 6 default home page specifying 15 13 displaying text and graphics with CDE 18 26 document cache size setting 15 17 encryption 15 3 environment variables 15 6 15 8 features 15 2 with NFS 15 2 with TFTP 15 2 file cache size specifying 15 11 Index 14 NCD Mosaic Browser continued fonts 15 18 18 26 FTP proxy server 15 15 gopher proxy server 15 15 HTTP proxy server 15 14 image cache size setting 15 17 in line GIFs 18 26 Java availability 15 10 JavaScript enabling disabling 15 12 limitations 15 2 mail server specifying 15 16 maximum TCP IP connections 15 12 memory problems 15 17 modules 15 3 multiple users on a terminal 15 7 navigating 18 25 NCD NCDM in preference files 15 16 online help files 15 10 15 17 print service 10 9 to 10 11 10 12 15 10 proxy servers 15 13 to 15 16 requirements 15 2 SOCKS proxy server 15 16 starting 15 3 troubleshooting 18 25 18 37 user preferences 15 11 to 15 16 using NFS for file access 15 4 to 15 7 using TFTP for file access 15 8 to 15 9 usr lib X11 ncd users nobody 15 6 variables setting 15 16 to 15 17 versions 15 3 X server modules 15 3 see also Java NCD Technical Support technical tips archive 18 44 contacting Technical Support 18 45 NCD Terminal Emulator see Terminal Emulator NCD Window Manager Console command 7 5 host based version command 7 5 starting from xsession 5 7 Index NCD Window Manager contin
47. Box 12 12 Automatically Displaying Windows Access 12 12 Preventing Modifications to Windows Access 12 13 Other Methods of Starting Windows NT Connections 12 13 Summary of Commands for Starting Connections 12 13 Commands for Starting ICA Connections 12 13 Commands for Starting WinCenter Connections 12 16 Starting a Session Automatically 12 17 Configuring an Automatic ICA Connection 12 17 Configuring an Automatic WinCenter Connection 12 17 Starting a Session with a Remote Shell Command 12 18 Starting an ICA Session 12 18 Starting a WinCenter Session 12 18 Starting a Session from Start Local Command in the Console 12 18 Adding an NT Session to the Default Root Menu 12 18 Connection through the Login Chooser 12 19 Connections that Appear in the Login Chooser 12 19 Changes to the Login Chooser 12 20 Specifying the Keymap 12 20 Specifying the Keymap for ICA Connections 12 20 Specifying the Keymap for WinCenter Connections 12 22 Configuring NCDware for ICA Master Browser Connectivity 12 22 Disabling Queries to the Master Browser for Login Hosts 12 22 Setting the Number of Retry Attempts 12 23 xiv Contents Setting the Timeout 12 23 Enabling Diagnostic Messages 12 23 About the WinCenter Configuration Parameters 12 24 Specifying Colormap Usage 12 24 Specifying Window Size Colors and Audio 12 26 Accessing NT Files from NCD Terminals 12 28 Adding Directories to the File Service Table 12 28 User Accounts and Permissions
48. Commands and Startup Disabled Commands exec startup commands Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters Commands and Startup Startup Commands Starting and Configuring Local Clients 7 19 Setup Menu Equivalents for Local Client Parameters Table 7 4 Setup Menu Fields for Local Clients Continued menus When Changes Saved in Parameter Name Console Setup Menu Field Take Effect NVRAM exec user access control Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters Access Control gt Local Command Execution Daemon section Execution User Access Control xserver initial x resources Not available in the Setup Immediately No 7 20 Starting and Configuring Local Clients 8 Getting Information About Terminal Operations Tip Procedures in this chapter provide directions for configuring terminals through remote configuration files For system administrators who use the console for terminal configuration tasks information about Setup menu fields is provided at the end of this chapter This chapter describes how to retrieve information about the terminal the X server and the terminal s network interfaces This chapter covers the following major topics 1 Displaying the Console 1 Displaying and understanding Console messages For explanations of X server messages see the NCDware Reference Manual 4 Configuring message logging 1 Understanding message dialo
49. Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser Setting Up the User s Environment TFTP For example the following variables specify that the user bob s preference files are in usr lib X11 ncd users bob pref environment USER bob HOME usr lib X11 ncd users USER BROWSER_HOME HOME If there is more than one user on a terminal a user who did not log in on the terminal can still access his or her own browser home directory by temporarily specifying a user name in the Console in Setup Change User Preferences Environment Variables and clicking on Apply Setting Up Files and Directories See Selecting the Browser Version on page 15 3 for more information about browser preference files See Chapter 3 for more information about the file service table If you use a browser home directory other than the default directory or specify the user s home directory as the browser home directory make sure the home directory is accessible through the terminal s file service table file service table parameter and have the proper permissions Browser preference files are listed in Table 15 2 on page 15 5 To set up user preference files for each user 1 If you are using a central location for preference files create a directory for each user and make the directories world readable and world writable Empty user preference files are placed by ncdinstall into the usr lib X
50. Connections in the Windows Access Chooser Table 12 2 Windows Access Properties Continued Field Name User Name Password Description The user s account name and password on the Windows NT server If you include these values plus the Windows NT domain the user will be automatically logged on to the server Including the password may compromise network security For a published application the user logs on to the Windows NT server where the application is located Domain The NT domain in which the password and user name are valid Initial Program The name of an initial program to be started automatically when the user logs on to the Windows NT server This field does not apply if the connection is to a published application Working Directory The path to the user s working directory on the Windows NT server If you specify a path applications use the working directory for retrieving and saving files Otherwise the user s home directory is used This field does not apply if the connection is to a published application Editing Connections To edit an existing connection select the connection in the Windows Access chooser and click Properties The properties dialog box opens with all of the properties of the connection displayed Edit the fields you want to change When you click ox the changes are saved in the terminal s remote configuration file Changes also appear in the NC
51. Contents of the Show Version Window Field Information Displayed Model Terminal model NCDware Software version number and X server name Boot Monitor Boot Monitor version Screen Display type Resolution Display resolution and dots per inch Keyboard Type of keyboard attached family name Memory Amount of memory installed Bundled Features X server features that you may use without an additional license Licensed Features X server features or local clients for which you currently hold a license Built in Ethernet or Built in Token Ring Default physical Ethernet or Token Ring network address Current Ethernet or Current Token Ring Current physical Ethernet or Token Ring address TCP IP Name Terminal s hostname for Internet communications TCP IP Address Terminal s address for Internet communications TCP IP Netmask Subnet mask address used in routing Getting Information About Terminal Operations 8 9 The Console Statistics Menus Table 8 2 Contents of the Show Version Window Continued Field Information Displayed NCDnet Name Node name for use in DECnet communications NCDnet Address Node address for use in DECnet communications Booted From Boot host host from which terminal was booted X Session Host Login host Displaying Memory Information Show Memory Click on the Show Memory item to display a graphic
52. Domain Name System defined 3 11 parameters set in ncd_stp 4 10 specifying through BOOTP DHCP 3 7 terminal configuration for 3 11 verifying availability 3 11 documentation comments on 1 6 conventions 1 5 intended audience 1 1 online man pages 1 4 server module listing 3 14 WinCenter Pro 1 4 X Window System 1 domain NT 12 11 12 15 DPS Display PostScript cache freeing 17 12 CIE dict19c dat file 17 7 file access protocols 17 3 fonts adding 17 11 client access configuring 17 11 directories 17 9 included in NCDware distribution 17 8 InitProc dat file 17 7 licensing 17 2 PSres upr file 17 3 to 17 6 resource path 17 10 Solaris systems running applications on 18 38 support files 17 3 to 17 7 17 10 terminals supported 17 1 troubleshooting 18 37 VM_3_2 SNF file 17 7 dps resource path 17 10 ds command Boot Monitor 13 6 dump X server upload 18 42 Index 5 Index E Enable ICA Broadcast Setup menus 12 30 etc bootptab BOOTP database information added by ncdinstall 3 25 troubleshooting 18 31 etc bootptab cfg file 3 8 to 3 9 etc bootptab ip file 3 10 etc hosts network database modified by ncdinstall 3 25 etc passwd file 5 13 Ethernet address adding to system files 3 3 3 26 defined 3 26 erased from NVRAM 18 31 how to determine current 8 9 how to determine default 8 9 multi homed hosts 18 31 use while booting 3 2 Ethernet interface status information 8 12 testing 18 4 exec access control enabled acce
53. Fields for Preparing Terminals for Booting Continued When Saved in Parameter Name Console Setup Menu Field Changes NVRAM Take Effect tcpip dns default Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Immediately No domain TCP IP Name Service gt DNS Default Domain tcpip name local cache Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Immediately No TCP IP Name Service Local Name Cache tcpip name server Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Immediately Yes protocol TCP IP Name Service gt Name Server Protocol or Setup Change Quick Setup Network TCP IP Name Service Protocol tcpip name servers Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Immediately Yes TCP IP Name Service Name Servers or Setup Change Quick Setup gt Network TCP IP Name Servers unit license agents Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Immediately No Licenses License Agents unit license key Setup Change Setup Parameters Immediately Yes Licenses gt License Key or Setup gt Change Quick Setup Licenses gt License Key xserver default font path Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Immediately No Fonts gt Default Font Path or Setup gt Change Quick Setup Fonts gt Default Font Path at Reset Preparing Terminals for Booting 3 33 Setup Menu Equivalents for Remote Configuration Parameters 3 34 Preparing Terminals for Booting 4 Terminal Configuration Methods Tip Some of the procedures in this c
54. File and Applying a Keymap _ Write Translations Figure 11 3 Keymap Editor Write Translations Window Writing a Keymap to a File You can write a keymap to a file and apply that file to an open window or apply the file when starting the emulator from a command line See Placing Required Files in Non Standard Locations on page 3 12 for more information on the file service table To write to a file that resides on a host computer there must be an entry for the file system in the terminal s file service table file service table parameter The file on the host system must be world readable To write the keymap to a file follow these steps from the Write Translations window 1 Select Translation file and type the complete pathname of the file in the File field 2 Click on OK 3 The resulting file contains a list of optional modifiers keysyms and actions For example lt Key gt KP_Enter Enter Ctrl lt Key gt 4 onecharacter 0x4A Reassigning Keyboard Functions Using the Keymap Editor 11 7 Importing a Keymap from a File or Window Applying Keymaps to Windows on the Desktop Keymap changes do not affect windows on the desktop until you explicitly apply the keymap to the windows Applying a Keymap to the Original Window To apply the current keymap to the window from which you started the Keymap Editor follow these steps from the Write Translations window 1 Select Original Appli
55. Frequency file extended diagnostics Setup Change Setup Immediately Yes Parameters gt File Service gt Extended Diagnostics ica extended diagnostics Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters gt ICA gt Extended ICA Diagnostics ip extended routing diagnostics Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters gt IP gt Extended Routing Diagnostics login xdm action on disconnect Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters Login gt XDM section What to do when XDM disconnects 8 14 Getting Information About Terminal Operations Setup Menu Equivalents for Message Logging Parameters Table 8 5 Setup Menu Fields for Configuring the Message Facility Continued F When Changes Savedin Parameter Setup Menu Field Take Effect NVRAM pref console key sequence Setup Change Setup At boot No Parameters Console and Utilities Console Key Sequence pref font extended diagnostics Setup Change User Immediately No Preferences gt Fonts gt Show Extended Font Diagnostics Getting Information About Terminal Operations 8 15 Setup Menu Equivalents for Message Logging Parameters 8 16 Getting Information About Terminal Operations 9 Using a Local File System Tip Most of the procedures in this chapter provide directions for configuring terminals through remote configuration files For system administrators who use the Console for terminal conf
56. Methods 4 1 Terminal Configuration Overview Deciding How to Configure Terminals All of the terminal configuration methods operate on the same database of configuration data The interface to the data differs as does the permanence of the configuration changes Remote Configuration Files Remote configuration means automatically loading an ASCII file of configuration data to a terminal when the terminal boots For terminals that download their X server from a host computer configuration files are also downloaded using either the TFTP or NFS protocol For terminals that load their X server from a local PC card configuration files are loaded from the card For each terminal you add to the network ncdinstall creates two terminal specific remote configuration files A generic file which contains common configuration data for all the terminals is also created if it does not already exist These files contain the basic configuration information for proper terminal operation For most sites remote configuration files are the best way to configure terminals because LY From a central location on a host computer you can configure all the terminals on the network LI Remote configuration files provide permanent configuration for each terminal because they are automatically loaded each time the terminal boots Console Setup Menus Interactive Configuration The Setup menus which are accessible from the Console window displ
57. Parameters gt Time gt Timezone When Changes Saved in Parameter Setup Menu Field Take Effect NVRAM time server timeout Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters gt Time gt Time Server Timeout time zone Setup Change Setup Immediately No 14 12 Configuring and Using Java 15 Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser Tip The procedures in this chapter provide directions for configuring terminals through remote configuration files For system administrators who use the Console for terminal configuration information about the corresponding Setup menu fields is provided at the end of the chapter Overview This chapter describes how to configure the NCD Mosaic Browser The topics in this chapter are 1 An overview of browser functionality 1 Requirements and recommendations for running the browser E Specifying which browser version to run E Setting up the user s environment for file access using NFS or TFTP Printing from the browser Enabling Java Enabling browser on line help O C O Setting terminal configuration parameters for browser user preferences and variables 1 Providing browser fonts The NCD Mosaic Browser nmosaic is based on Version 3 2 of Spyglass Mosaic and provides support for Java applets and JavaScript Version 1 1 The browser frees resources on application servers and the network and can save computing resources if used instead of a host based browser
58. Preparations Before Booting This section describes the following procedures that you may need to perform before booting terminals Improving Reliability Booting See the Remote Configuration Parameter Quick Reference or the Reference Manual for more information about these parameters m O C O O O C Taking steps to improve reliability Configuring BOOTP DHCP Using dynamic IP address allocation with BOOTP Configuring terminals for DNS Domain Name System Configuring the terminal to access files that are in non standard locations Changing the X server module configuration Managing licenses for optional features This section offers suggestions for maximizing reliability by eliminating circumstances in which a single point of failure could prevent operation During the boot process failure recovery is automatic the booting process restarts after a failure Some terminal configuration options that improve booting reliability are m Using more than one boot method in case the first is unavailable In a remote configuration file use the boot second source and boot third source parameters to specify additional methods in case the primary one is not functioning Choices are tftp nfs ncdnet or local yu Trying more than one boot host in case the initial boot host is unavailable In a remote configuration file use the boot tcpip second server and boot tcpip third server param
59. Printing from Local Client Menus Printing from the NCD Applet Viewer and Other Java Applications NCDware supports printing from Java applications The Applet Viewer is an example of a Java application that uses NCDware s Java print support Java applications can only print to PostScript printers Printer Selection After starting an applet with the Applet Viewer the user can select Print and display the Print Dialog The user can print to the default printer queue or enter the name of a different printer queue Default Print Queue Tip The parallel 1 queue is placed in the table by the NCD Terminal Emulator however this queue is configured as an ASCII data stream and must be changed to PostScript before Java applications can send print jobs to this queue For more information about the Terminal Emulator queues see Setting Up the Print Table on page 10 10 The default print queue for the Applet Viewer is PARALLEL1 and there must be entry for this queue in the print table if you want to use the default queue If there is no entry for PARALLEL or this queue is not configured as a PostScript data stream the Java print code searches the print table for an entry with a queue named parallel 1 If this entry is present and configured as PostScript the print job is sent to this queue If neither of these queues is in the print table and the user hasn t entered a different and valid queue name the Print Error
60. Setup menus if a DDC compatible monitor is attached to the terminal 640x480 60 Hz 8 16 or 24 72 Hz 75 Hz 85 Hz 800x600 60 Hz 72 Hz 75 Hz 85 Hz 1024x768 60 Hz 8 or 16 70 Hz 75 Hz 85 Hz A 4 Setting Color Depth and Monitor Resolution Table A 2 Monitor Resolution and Color Depth Settings Continued 1152x900 Resolution pixels 66 Hz 76 Hz 1280x1024 60 Hz 70 Hz 75 Hz 85 Hz 1600x1200 60 Hz 65 Hz Color Depth bits per pixel 8 only Color Support for X Server Extensions and Local Clients Some X server extensions and local clients do not support 16 bit or 24 bit color depths Most local clients work at all color depths Some local clients have special requirements for visual depth or may directly change the frame buffer The following X server extensions and local clients either do not support 16 and 24 bit color or have limited support m m m O O O O OpenGL 24 bit only HMXpro24 only NCD Mosaic Browser 8 bit or 24 bit only Video player 8 bit or 24 bit on HMXpro24 8 bit only on Explora MPEG video decoder slow and fast SIE ICA Client Light pen blue flooding does not work at 16 and 24 bit A 5 Color Support for Third Party Applications The following X server extensions and local clients support all color depths Ly Ly DUUOUUVOUUOUUOOU
61. The following DPS support files are included with NCDware and are installed by ncdinstall in usr lib X11 ncd dps m m m m PSres upr the PostScript resource file VM_3_2 SNF the virtual memory file CIE dict19c dat the color rendering file InitProc dat the context initialization file The following sections describe these files in more detail The PostScript Resource File The PostScript resource file PSres upr is essential for DPS operation An NCD utility is provided for creating a new resource file or updating an existing resource file When working with the resource file keep the following in mind m m If you change the default locations of the DPS support files or DPS font files you must modify the contents of the PostScript resource file to reflect the changes You may also need to add new file service table entries for information on the terminal s file service table see Chapter 3 If you use other PostScript resource files make sure they follow the upr naming convention For more information about PostScript resource files refer to Programming the Display PostScript System with X from Adobe Systems Incorporated Sections in the PostScript Resource File The PostScript resource file contains the following sections m DPSVM This section identifies the VM Virtual Memory file The VM file must be loaded for DPS to work correctly For example Configuring Display PostScript 17 3 Using
62. Using a Local File System 9 25 Using a Local File System on a Diskette 9 26 Using a Local File System For example the UNIX filename Itr first draft is truncated to ltr firs dra when ncdfloppy copies the file to a floppy disk DOS does not permit more than one period the separator between the filename and its extension in filenames or directory names ncdfloppy converts extra periods to the character x For example the UNIX filename ltr 1 draft is changed to Itr Ixd when ncdfloppy copies the file to the floppy disk Setup Menu Equivalents for Local File System Parameters Setup Menu Equivalents for Local File System Parameters Table 9 4 lists the remote configuration parameters discussed in this chapter and a description of the corresponding Setup menu field for each This information is provided for system administrators who configuring terminals through the Setup menus Table 9 4 Setup Menu Fields for Configuring a Local File System Parameter Setup Menu Field When Changes Take Effect Saved in NVRAM file enable floppy filesystem Setup Change Setup Parameters gt File Service Enable Floppy Filesystem At boot No file enable nfs server Setup Change Setup Parameters gt File Service gt Enable NFS Server At boot No file export directory list Setup Change Setup Parameters gt File Service Export Directory List Immediately file manager access c
63. XRemote 16 5 see also license server license server configuring for reliability 3 7 defined 3 16 to 3 17 floating licenses 3 17 to 3 23 license management utilities 3 19 license dat file 3 18 3 20 to 3 22 node licenses 3 17 3 26 options file 3 22 license server continued required files and binaries 3 18 site licenses 3 17 to 3 23 specifying additional license servers 3 20 starting 3 22 supplemental documentation 1 4 3 17 types of licenses 3 16 WinCenter 3 20 3 23 Windows NT 3 23 license dat file defined 3 18 on Windows NT hosts 3 20 using more than one 3 21 to 3 22 list command Local File Manager 9 6 Imcksum 1 3 19 Imdiag 1 3 19 Imdown 1 3 19 Imgrd 1 3 22 3 23 Imhostid 1 3 19 Imremove 1 3 19 Imreread 1 3 19 Imstat 1 3 19 Imswitchr 1 3 19 Imutil 1 3 18 Imver 1 3 19 Load address out of range Boot Monitor message 18 7 Load image out of range Boot Monitor message 18 7 loadable extensions color depth A 1 Nocal pathname 9 2 9 10 local clients access disabling 7 15 18 36 restricting access through remote shell commands 5 13 user based access control 5 12 adding to root menu 7 13 to 7 14 color depth A 5 Index 11 Index local clients continued customizing command line options 7 18 remote configuration 7 17 X resources 7 18 defined 2 4 7 1 disabling modules 3 15 starting automatically at boot time 7 10 starting from the Console 7 6 7 15 starting from XDM startup files
64. a mainframe to a printer attached to a local terminal or a remote terminal via a serial or parallel port See the ncd3287 1 man page No console item 2 wincen Starts WinCenter from the terminal In Utilities Start Local command use the format wincen hostname hostname is the name of an NT system running WinCenter When starting WinCenter with an rsh command use the format rsh ncdname wincen hostname ncdname is the hostname of the NCD terminal See Chapter 12 Accessing Windows NT Servers and the WinCenter documentation No console item 2 icaclnt Starts a connection to a Windows NT host using the ICA Client In Utilities gt Start Local command use the format icaclnt hostname hostname is the name of an NT system running WinFrame or MetaFrame When starting the ICA client with an rsh command use the format rsh ncdname wincen hostname ncdname is the hostname of the NCD terminal See the icaclnt 1 man page and Chapter 12 Accessing Windows NT Servers 1 This local client is not listed in Console menus It must be invoked from a command line from Utilities gt Start Local Command or from a remote configuration file using the exec startup commands parameter This local client is not listed in Console menus It is used by the Windows Access utility Utilities gt Windows Access and can be invoked from a command line from Utilities Start Local Command or from a remote configuration file us
65. and its current value to the specified configuration file For example write C02B994F boot automatically writes one parameter to a terminal s configuration file write filename group Writes all the parameters in the group to the specified configuration file For example write ncd_std config writes all the parameters in the config group to the generic configuration file Terminal Configuration Methods 4 23 Configuring Terminals Using TELNET gt help Displays all configuration commands get lt param gt get lt group gt groups all read only read write set lt param gt lt value gt gt get exec Displays parameters in the exec group exec access control enabled fals exec access control list An empty table exec startup commands A table with two rows of data console Vogin i gt get boot automatically Displays one parameter boot automatically true gt set boot automatically false Changes a parameter s value gt apply Applies pending changes to the terminal s current configuration gt get boot automatically boot automatically false gt cancel Cancels all pending changes that have not been applied gt quit Ends the TELNET session Figure 4 4 Example TELNET Configuration Session 4 24 Terminal Configuration Methods About Configuration Parameters About Configuration Parameters This section describ
66. but be unable to find the configuration file color definition file keymap file or fonts Error Messages See Chapter 8 for information about When a terminal cannot locate files error messages are turning on extenoed diagnostics displayed in the Console message area For example with extended diagnostics enabled the following message might appear SCONFIGD E noread Unable to read configuration file filename Error messages are displayed if the terminal cannot find Its individual configuration file If you are not using terminal specific remote configuration files or you are using the generic configuration file ncd_std you don t need this file and you can ignore the message 1 The generic configuration file ncd_std If you are not using remote configuration files you don t need this file and you can ignore the message 1 The XKeysymDB file which maps private vendor keysyms or keysyms not in the libraries 1 The rgb txt file which defines the colors used by color terminals 4 A font font directory or font management file fonts alias or fonts dir Solving File Transfer Problems Before you take any of the actions described in this section for diagnosing file transfer problems NCD recommends that you See Chapter 8 for information about 1 Turn on extended file service messages turning on extended diagnostics and logging messages toa file 2 Ifthere is a problem with loading fonts t
67. cache size Integer 100 000 The size in bytes of the font server cache Configuring Font Service 6 9 Using the NCD Font Server Table 6 1 Font Server Configuration Parameters Continued Parameter catalogue Value Type and Default List of strings nil Description The font sources to be accessed by the font server in order of preference For example catalogue ibm usr lib X11 ncd fonts 100dpi usr lib fonts speedo usr lib X11 ncd fonts misc usr lib X11 ncd fonts 100dpi When specifying SNF format fonts from a company other than NCD use a prefix followed by a colon to identify the source The prefixes are hp HP ibm IBM dec DEC sco SCO and sun Sun client limit Integer 20 The number of clients the font server supports before refusing service clone self Boolean no Whether the font server should try to clone itself when the limit set in client limit is reached default point size Integer 120 The default point size in tenths of a point for fonts for which point size is not included in the font name default resolutions List of The screen resolutions that the font server supports by resolutions default for cases in which the resolution is not included nil in the font name error file String none The file for logging error messages and notices error method String The logging method for error messages and
68. classes you need The classpath option specifies the path java uses to look up classes The general format for this option is your_path NCDCLASSES NCDCLASSES is a special name recognized by NCD s Java Virtual Machine it is the path to the base class files in the classes zip file Directories are separated by colons For example if all of your application class files are in the directory home avh classes you specify the class path as classpath home avh classes NCDCLASSES Make sure that the class directories are accessible by the terminal through its file service table preferably through NFS rather than TFTP Setting java Properties The D option to the java command redefines a property For example the following command line sets the value of the property awt button color to green java Dawt button color green The java command accepts any number of D options in a command line Some of the more useful properties are described in the following subsections Setting the Java Home Directory The java home property and java directory remote configuration parameter both specify the directory where the Java files are installed If you did not install the files in the default directory either set the parameter to the pathname of the directory or use the D option to the java command to specify the pathname Setting the Current Working Directory 14 8 Configuring and Using Java Some Java applications that r
69. commands A user preferences password gives access to most configuration commands and to user preferences data only Table 4 4 lists the most essential configuration commands Press return after each command An example TELNET session is shown in Figure 4 4 4 22 Terminal Configuration Methods Configuring Terminals Using TELNET Table 4 4 Configuration Commands for Use with TELNET Command Description help Displays a summary of all of the configuration commands get parameter Displays the specified parameter s get group Displays the parameters in the specified group set parameter value A simple assignment statement Sets the specified parameter to the specified value All assignments are pending until you type an apply command The word set is optional White space around the equals sign is not required See Setting Parameters in Tables on page 4 26 for information about adding rows to parameter tables or setting selected variables within a row cancel Cancels all pending changes apply Applies pending commands to the current configuration write nvram Writes to NVRAM any parameters that are saved in NVRAM This command is not available when you are accessing user preferences parameters only write filename read write Writes all of the read write parameters to the specified configuration file write filename parameter Writes the parameter
70. compatible monitor is attached to the terminal When you specify the color depth the resolution is automatically set to the best available 640x480 60 Hz 8 16 or 24 72 Hz 75 Hz 85 Hz 800x600 60 Hz 72 Hz 75 Hz 85 Hz 1024x768 60 Hz 8 or 16 70 Hz 75 Hz 85 Hz 1152x900 66 Hz 8 only 76 Hz 1280x1024 60 Hz 70 Hz 75 Hz 85 Hz 1600x1200 60 Hz 65 Hz Using a Local File System 9 15 Configuring a PC Card for Booting Use the right arrow key to highlight Network in the menu bar The Network window appears Figure 9 1 Help Keyboard Monitor Boot Done Network Get IP Addresses From Network NVRAM DHCP IP Addressing Order 1 SEEM BOOTP IP Addressing Order RARP IP Addressing Order Terminal IP Address First Boot Host IP Address Second Boot Host IP Address Third Boot Host IP Address Gateway IP Address Subnet Mask Broadcast IP Address Terminal NCDnet Address Host NCDnet Address Router NCDnet Address SNAP 802 2 LLC Encapsulation Figure 9 1 The Boot Monitor s Network Menu 9 16 Using a Local File System In the Network window a Use the left arrow key to set the value of Get IP Addresses From to NVRAM b Use the down arrow key to highlight Terminal IP Address Use the backspace key to erase the current address and enter the terminal s IP address Follow the instructions in the help text displayed at the bottom of the screen c Highlight Gateway
71. configuration file on the host on which the launcher runs The following sections describe how to compose commands for starting clients in the launcher configuration file 2 Place a command to start ncdrunwm in a session startup file such as Xsession or xsession The following example runs ncedrunwm on the boot host and starts the local NCD Window Manager on the display named in the environment variable DISPLAY ncedrunwm d SDISPLAY If the ncdrunwm program quits the local window manager also quits unless you include ncdrunwm s k option With the k option the local window manager rkeeps running but the customized root menus no longer function To restart ncdrunwm and regain the customized root menus use ncdrestartwm nedrestartwm You can also use ncdrestartwm to restart the window manager after altering the launcher configuration file or window manager X resource settings Starting and Configuring Local Clients 7 11 Starting Local Clients Launcher Configuration Files A launcher configuration file is an ASCII file that follows the format conventions of mwm s system mwmrc file ncdrunwm can read any of the following launcher configuration files It uses the first file it finds and searches for files in the following order A file specified using ncdrunwm s f option A launchre file in the user s home directory A mwmic file in the user s home directory A systemwide launcher file usr lib X11
72. correctly 1 If the terminal is connected to a thin Ethernet network check the BNC connector and the network cable for any signs of failure High Collision Rates If the Ethernet transceiver does not have SQE squelch mode turned on there are as many collisions as transmissions Statistics Show Statistics gt Ethernet and Statistics Show Statistics IP Each retransmission causes a delay of 9 6 microseconds To solve this problem turn on SQE on the Ethernet transceiver Terminal Boots But Cannot Connect to Certain Hosts The following sections list reasons that a terminal may boot but be unable to connect to some hosts 18 28 Troubleshooting Network Configuration Problems Routing Table and ARP Cache The most common reason for faulty connections is setting the ip routing table or tcpip arp cache parameters in the remote configuration file NCD recommends removing these tables from the remote configuration file Gateway Not Specified Correctly The terminal may not be able to connect to hosts on a different portion of the network because the gateway is not set correctly Check the ip initial default gateway 1 and ip initial default gateway 2 parameters Setup Change Setup Parameters gt IP gt Initial Default Gateway 1 Initial Default Gateway 2 Checking the Connection Tip For normal operation of the terminal do not leave ip respond to broadcast icmp set to true because it generates a grea
73. defined 10 4 syntax and options 10 7 to 10 9 PCL not supported 18 26 troubleshooting 18 26 print lpr servers 10 10 Index 17 Index profile file replication of content in XDM startup files 5 7 published applications ICA Client 12 9 pwd command Local File Manager 9 5 pwireless interface table wireless statistics 13 7 pwireless statistics table wireless statistics 13 7 Q Quick Start PC cards use for XRemote 16 5 quicksetup local client command line options 7 7 see also Setup menus Change Quick Setup R RARP Reverse Address Resolution Protocol use in booting 3 2 reclaim command Local File Manager 9 5 remote configuration defined 4 2 parameters 4 4 to 4 5 4 25 to 4 27 purpose 4 2 remote configuration files stp file user s configuration file 4 7 configuration commands 4 12 configuration language 4 12 created by ncdinstall 4 6 creation by ncdinstall 4 2 4 5 defined 4 2 downloading 3 2 4 2 4 6 editing 4 11 effects of Windows Access on 12 12 generic 4 8 to 4 10 IP address filename hexadecimal 4 6 nced_std generic file 4 6 ncd_std sample 4 10 passwords setting in 4 29 pathname specifying in etc bootptab 3 8 Index 18 remote configuration files continued permissions required 4 11 problems locating 18 11 sample 4 10 setting values in tables 4 26 to 4 27 specifying through BOOTP DHCP 3 8 terminal specific file 4 6 4 7 user s configuration file 4 6 4 8 user s preferences file 4
74. depth is 1024 x 768 For 24 bit color depth the highest resolution is 800 x 600 Effects of Color Depth on Other Configuration Parameters Setting the color depth to 16 or 24 bit has the following effects 1 The wincenter colors parameter is ignored This is equivalent to setting wincenter colors to disabled 1 The xserver default visual parameter is ignored Only the TrueColor visual is supported A 2 Setting Color Depth and Monitor Resolution Setting Monitor Resolution and Color Depth in the Boot Monitor To set color depth in the Boot Monitor you need Boot Monitor version 2 9 409 or later for Explora 400 450 terminals and version 2 9 723 or later for Explora 700 terminals If you have an earlier Boot Monitor version set the color depth in a remote configuration file or the Console Setup menu To set monitor resolution and color depth in the Boot Monitor 1 In the Boot Monitor press the Setup key or type gt se 2 Follow the directions in the initial screen to display the Monitor window 3 When you select the desired color depth a list of possible resolutions and refresh rates is displayed Set the monitor resolution to the maximum possible taking into account the available video memory If your monitor is DDC compatible the resolution is automatically set to the best available when you select color depth Setting Color Depth in Remote Configuration Files See the Remote Configuration Parameter Qu
75. executable The xsession file must be at least executable by the user Make sure fonts have been read Some clients do not start without the correct fonts To debug Xsession or xsession files you can login to the XDM host from the Console by using Terminals New Telnet Set the DISPLAY variable to the IP address of the terminal with the suffix 0 for example setenv DISPLAY 138 41 215 23 0 Run the session file for example usr bin X11 xdm Xsession If Resource Settings are Ignored If clients run but resource settings are ignored check for an xrdb invocation in the Xsession or xsession file xrdb should be the first client started and unlike other clients it should be run in the foreground Running xrdb in the foreground ensures that it reads the user s resource files before xdm starts other X clients If XDM Stops Running XDM may stop running if m m m There is a network problem The XDM binary on the host stops running The host crashes Troubleshooting 18 17 Font and Font Server Problems If XDM stops running the terminal displays the Logout popup window with a message about the login host not responding The window offers two options The No button keeps applications running beware that applications may not work properly 1 The Yes button logs the user out Problems with System Console XDM If you are not using an NCD terminal as the system console and you are using XDM to l
76. fields you want to change and click OK Table 12 2 Windows Access Properties Field Name Description Description A description of the connection Each description must be unique Server Specifies connection to a Windows NT server When the user or connects the server s desktop appears in a window on the user s Hostname terminal The server you enter or select depends on the connection type L For WinCenter type the name or IP address of a WinCenter server L For ICA TCP type the name or IP address of a WinFrame or MetaFrame server or select a Windows NT server from the drop down list of servers that responded to the ICA Client s broadcast Published Application ICA TCP only Specifies connection to a published application on a WinFrame or MetaFrame server When the user connects to a published application the user logs on to the server Then a window containing the application appears on the user s terminal Quitting the application logs the user off the server Type the name of a published application or select an application from the drop down list of applications that responded to the ICA Client s broadcast Accessing Windows NT Servers 12 9 Configuring Connections in the Windows Access Chooser Table 12 2 Windows Access Properties Continued Field Name Connection Type Description Select a protocol from the drop down list ICA TCP connection uses the ICA protocol
77. file service table You will probably need to modify the terminal s file service table parameter so the terminal can download fonts from the usr dt config xfonts C directory You may also need to make modifications to the TFTP or NFS setup on the host For these reasons NCD recommends using a font server instead For information on using a font server and setting up the font path for a font server and CDE see the next section and Adding Font Servers to the Font Path for CDE on page 6 12 Using the NCD Font Server Tip You can use font servers from other vendors with NCD terminals outline font A font that can be scaled to arbitrary sizes and resolutions it is stored as a set of instructions for drawing curves 6 8 Configuring Font Service The NCD font server ncdfs is host resident software that can perform all the tasks related to downloading fonts to NCD terminals The font server is required if you are using outline fonts ncdinstall installs the font server software including sample font server configuration files The sample files are placed in the usr lib X11 ncd fs The instructions in this section assume that the NCD font server software was installed by ncdinstall You must run the font server on each host that provides outline fonts to NCD terminals The font server provides access to more fonts than basic bitmap font service does and it can decrease the time it takes to display fonts
78. for 15 20 browser http proxy host Setup menu field for 15 20 specifying the HTTP proxy host 15 14 browser http proxy host port Setup menu field for 15 20 specifying the HTTP proxy port 15 14 browser http proxy overrides Setup menu field for 15 21 specifying HTTP proxy overrides 15 14 browser java applets enabling disabling applets 15 13 Setup menu field for 15 21 browser jscript active enabling disabling JavaScript routines 15 12 Setup menu field for 15 21 browser max connections Setup menu field for 15 21 specifying maximum TCP IP connections 15 12 browser module browser version to load 15 3 Setup menu field for 15 21 browser smtp email server Setup menu field for 15 21 specifying the mail server 15 16 browser socks host Setup menu field for 15 21 specifying the SOCKS host 15 16 browser socks host port Setup menu field for 15 21 specifying the SOCKS host port 15 16 bt command Boot Monitor 3 30 C CDE Common Desktop Environment adding font directories to the font path 6 7 adding font servers to the font path 6 12 with the NCD Display Manager 5 13 with the NCD Mosaic Browser 18 26 Change Quick Setup Console see Setup menus Change Setup Parameters Console see Setup menus Change User Preferences Console see Setup menus clients adding to root menu 7 13 defined 2 2 status displaying 8 11 see also local clients color definition file on a PC card 9 13 problem locating 18 11 Index 3 Index
79. for Using XRemote Requirements for Using XRemote See Chapter 3 for information on setting the license key parameter XRemote requires a license for each terminal Contact NCD Sales Support if you need to purchase licenses The XRemote host resident software must be installed If you used ncdinstall to install NCDware the XRemote software is automatically installed XRemote over a serial line requires a QuickStart PC card with all of the necessary files installed The Quick Start card comes with the Using a PC Card in Your Thin Client Device document which provides usage and configuration information Setting Up the Physical Connection If you are using XRemote through the terminal s Ethernet or Token Ring interface the normal network cabling is sufficient If you are using XRemote through the terminal s serial port use a serial cable to connect the terminal to a modem or directly to a host Follow the directions in this section Setting Up a Modem Connection This section describes modem requirements ports and cables and modem setup Modem Requirements Tip Although NCD does not endorse specific modems the US Robotics Courier HST Dual Standard modem provides good service for XRemote This chapter provides instructions for setting up the US Robotics modem For use with XRemote a modem should 1 Provide full duplex transmission at 9600 baud or faster You can use slower modems but performance
80. host and its OS release Window manager Boot Method TFTP NFS PROM PC card or MOP Model of NCD terminal Amount of installed memory NCDware version NCDware Boot Monitor version Detailed problem description Ifthe problem involves a third party application the name of the application and which version you are running A Using 16 bit and 24 bit Color This appendix contains the following information 1 An overview of 16 bit and 24 bit color depth support The effect of color depth on maximum monitor resolution and how to set resolution and color depth I 16 bit and 24 bit color support in X server extensions and local clients About Color Support Color depth affects the number of colors that can be displayed with more colors displayed at greater depths 16 bit and 24 bit color are supported for the terminals listed in Table A 1 Table A 1 Terminal Support for 16 bit and 24 bit Color Terminal Model 16 bit Color 24 bit Color Explora 400 X Explora 450 X X Explora 700 X X Color depth is implemented as three X server modules 8 bit 16 bit and 24 bit color Because color depth is a loadable module only the color depth selected in the Boot Monitor is loaded when you boot the terminal The default is the module for 8 bit color In 8 bit mode you may encounter colormap flashing which occurs when one application s colormap takes priority over another
81. in an resource files Xsession or xsession file loads the user s Xdefaults file xrdb display SDISPLAY SHOME Xdefaults Using Command Line Options You can configure local clients by using the command line options described in the man pages For example the following command specifies the size and placement of the Terminal Host Chooser rsh ncdu66 term geometry 80x24 2 150 7 18 Starting and Configuring Local Clients Setup Menu Equivalents for Local Client Parameters Setup Menu Equivalents for Local Client Parameters Table 7 4 lists the remote configuration parameters discussed in this chapter and a description of the corresponding Setup menu field for each This information is provided for system administrators who configure terminals through Setup menus Table 7 4 Setup Menu Fields for Local Clients When Changes Saved in Parameter Name Console Setup Menu Field Take Effect NVRAM exec access control enabled Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters Access Control Local Command Execution Daemon section Enable Execution Access Control exec access control list Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters Access Control Local Command Execution Daemon section gt Execution Access Control List exec command menu Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters Commands and Startup Command Menu exec disabled commands Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters
82. information LJ ROM version of the LAN adapter 1 IP address of the terminal Wireless domain E Hostname and IP address of the last Access Point to which the terminal connected L1 Wireless channel and subchannel I Signal strength of packets received from last connection To display this information type gt wi Network Statistics The Boot Monitor ds command displays network statistics for the LAN adapter To display this information type gt ds Displaying Wireless Information from the Console You can display wireless information and statistics from the terminal s Console Displaying Access Point LAN Adapter and Signal Information The Show Wireless command in the Console s Statistics menu displays the following information Tip LI Wireless signal strength Subchannels are used on Access Points afer alite channels have bagh T Access Point host name and IP address assigned L1 Channel and subchannel I In sync count and roam alarm count The Interface Table in Statistics Show Statistics Wireless LAN displays the same information as the Show Wireless command plus the wireless domain the Access Point host 13 6 Configuring a Wireless Terminal Displaying Wireless Information name and IP address and the ROM version of the LAN adapter The corresponding remote configuration parameter is pwireless interface table Displaying Wireless Network Statistics The Statistics Table in Stati
83. is degraded Half duplex modems are not recommended 1 Comply with CCITT V 32 standard or V 32BIS for data communications and V 34 the standard for 28 8K baud modems Setting Up XRemote 16 5 Setting Up the Physical Connection d Have low latency incurring minimal delays in round trip transmissions even when transmitting small packets If the modem compresses data disable the compression to prevent transmission delays XRemote data is already compressed Flow control is not required If you must use flow control use hardware flow control RTS CTS You need flow control for example if the modem port is fixed at 19200 baud and a connection is made at 9600 bps Software flow control is not recommended because a noisy modem line can inject spurious XOFF characters causing the connection to hang Cabling and Serial Ports When connecting the terminal to a modem use a short serial cable with straight through pin to pin connections All NCD terminals have at least one serial port Serial ports on NCD terminals have a DB 9 female connector Most modems have a female connector so the cable should have a male connector on each end Setting Up a Modem Generic Instructions 16 6 Setting Up XRemote If you are using a US Robotics modem see the next section Your modem manual should have instructions for enabling and disabling the modem control signs that are referred to in this procedure Configure the remote us
84. it is ideal for corporate intranets The browser runs as a local client and can be started through the Console s Utilities menu or by using a command line The browser can be configured in several ways 1 Many user preferences can be set from the browser s Edit Preferences menu and stored in preference files or set through terminal remote configuration files Proxy Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser 15 1 Requirements Requirements servers the mail server and browser variables for special environments are set through terminal configuration parameters only Browser remote configuration parameters take effect immediately are not saved in NVRAM and have Setup menu equivalents 1 Many preferences can be set through the X resources described in the nmosaic man page You can set up printing from the browser to a local printer attached to the terminal and to remote printers The browser has the following limitations LI Some of the HTML 3 2 optional tags are not supported The only available helpers are the MPEG video player and the AU audio player LI Plug ins are not supported To provide users with full browser functionality you should use NFS for file access If you use TFTP the user environment setup tasks must be done manually and the following features are not available L1 The user cannot view the source for HTML files The Save As and Open Local commands cannot list files Therefore the us
85. java Command The java command is for running standalone Java applications You can use any of the methods described in Chapter 7 or the Start Local Command item in the Console s Utilities menu to run this command The syntax of the java command is java options classname arguments where options Are modifiers to the java command The java options are listed in Table 14 2 classname Is the name of the class to be executed the name of the application arguments Are options for the application and are passed to the application Configuring and Using Java 14 5 Using Java Commands For example the following command starts a Java application using the class name Test class on the terminal called ncedux and increases the sizes of the Java code stack the C code stack and the memory allocation pool rsh ncdux java oss64k ss64k mxl2m Test class The options for the java command are listed in Table 14 2 Table 14 2 Java Command Options Option Description classpath path Specifies the path java uses to look up classes in the local or host based file system Separate directories by colons For more information see Setting the Class Path on page 14 8 D propertyName newValue Redefines a property value propertyName is the name of the property whose value you want to change and newValue is the value to change it to For more information see Setting java Properties on
86. license pool Imreread 1 Tells the license software to read the license file Imstat 1 Reports status of the license software and feature usage Imswitchr Switches the report writer log file Imver 1 Reports the FLEXIm library or binary versions Installing License Management Software For UNIX hosts ncdinstall automatically installs the license management binaries ncdlicense ncdlmd and Imgrd in ust bin X11 ncd If you install NCDware manually you can place the binaries in any location you choose For Windows NT WinCenter hosts setup installs the license management executables Imgrd exe and ncdlicense exe in c winnt You also need to install the license dat file See Setting Up the license dat File on page 3 20 Preparing Terminals for Booting 3 19 Optional Preparations Before Booting Specifying License Server Hosts If you install NCDware or terminals using ncdinstall the installation program sets the license server to the boot host If you are setting up other license server hosts you must list their hostnames or IP addresses in the unit license agents parameter For example unit license agents eagle kestrel Setting Up the license dat File The license dat file which contains the required licensing data must be installed on each license server host There are three possible scenarios for setting up this file m If you are not already using products
87. login tony the value of BROWSER_HOME is usr lib X11 ncd users tony If you want browser preference files to be stored in the user s actual home directory or some other location set BROWSER_HOME to HOME or to an alternate directory in the pref environment remote configuration parameter User Files and Directories If user directories are located in the default browser home directory create a directory for each user in the users subdirectory ncdinstall automatically mounts and exports the usr lib X11 ncd directory so the browser can read and write any files that reside in users If you are storing user preference files in actual home directories you must export those directories The terminal mounts the user s home directory using information provided by the NCD Display Manager 15 6 Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser Setting Up the User s Environment NFS If the browser home directory is not the default directory or a user s home directory make sure it is accessible through the terminal s file service table and exported More Than One User on a Terminal If there is more than one user on a terminal a user who did not log in on the terminal can still access his or her own browser home directory The user does this by specifying a user name in the Console in Change User Preferences gt Environment Variables and clicking Apply Mounting a Temporary Directory See Chapter 3 for more information on the fil
88. lt get protected gt Connecting to a Terminal s Configuration Daemon You can connect to the TELNET port of the terminal you are working on or to another terminal on the network To connect to a terminal s Configuration or Preferences daemon 1 From the Console start the Terminal Emulator chooser Terminals New Terminal To connect to the local terminal s daemon select Config from the Default Hosts list and click ox Toconnect to a remote terminal s daemon type the terminal s hostname or IP address followed by 5999 Terminal Configuration Methods 4 21 Configuring Terminals Using TELNET the configuration port in the Service field For example ncdl abc com 5999 A TELNET session window displays Type your configuration password after the Password prompt in the Terminal Emulator window and press Return A prompt gt appears You can now type any of the configuration commands listed in Table 4 4 To disconnect from the daemon type quit after the prompt Using Interactive Configuration Commands See Table 4 4 on page 4 23 for more The configuration commands you can use and the data commands displayed in a terminal emulator session depend upon the type of password you use when starting the session m m m A read write configuration password gives access to all of the configuration commands A read only configuration password gives access to only the get help and quit
89. managers Light emitting diode A network that connects devices over relatively short distances typically within a building or campus An NCD utility for managing the local file system on PC cards or floppy disks The file system located on a PC card or a floppy disk A window displayed on the screen for entering a username and password for logging in A configurable memory threshold on NCD terminals A secret password used with XDM to control access to the X server and protect a user s display from unauthorized access Keys such as Control Alt and Shift that modify the actions of other keys X also supports a set of logical modifier key functions such as the meta key that can be mapped to physical keys A host that provides translation between network hostnames and IP addresses Glossary 7 Glossary 8 NCD Display Manager NCD s host based daemon for providing user NCD Terminal Emulator ncddm 1 NCDnet ncdterm 1 ncdrunwm NFS NIM node NVRAM information to local clients and preventing unauthorized users from remotely starting local clients on a terminal ncddm NCD s VT320 compatible terminal emulation local client The NCD Display Manager An NCDware option that allows an NCD terminal to participate fully in a DECnet network Gives users access to DECwindows Offers attachment via Ethernet or serial line Synonymous with DECnet The local NCD Terminal Emulator prov
90. parameter value Change User Preferences gt Keyboard gt LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 drop down list Click on the list to display the choices and select one Change Quick Setup Booting Boot From text entry field Type a permitted value Change Setup Parameters gt Licenses gt License Key table Delete add or change rows in tables To delete a row click anywhere in the row and press the Delete button To add a row position the cursor in a row and click on the New button A new row appears above the current row fields are set to nil all Os or the default value To change a value in a row click on the specific parameter you want to change The parameter appears in the text entry field Position the cursor in the text entry field backspace to erase and type a new value The values for some fields are displayed as drop down lists Change Setup Parameters gt Commands and Startup gt Startup Commands 4 16 Terminal Configuration Methods Configuring Terminals Using Setup Menus Cancelling Changes If you make changes in a configuration window and decide to cancel them click on the Restart or Cancel button at the bottom of the window before applying the changes 1 The Restart button cancels changes and leaves the window open The Cancel button cancels changes and closes the window Applying Changes to the Current Configuration To apply parameter changes
91. popup appears when the user attempts to print If you specify a printer for Java command lines and a queue name is repeated in the print table the print job goes to the first printer listed in the table For example at a large site many printers may have the queue name LPO Other Java applications may have different default printer queues These queues must be entered into the print table and correctly configured on the remote or local machine Printing to a File If the user prints to a file the resulting file contains PostScript data When printing to a file the user must enter an absolute path name in the Print Dialog box and the file must be accessible through the terminal s file service table For more information about the file service table see Chapter 3 Using Printers with NCD Terminals 10 13 Setup Menu Equivalents for Printing Parameters Setup Menu Equivalents for Printing Parameters Table 10 4 lists the remote configuration parameters discussed in this chapter and the corresponding Setup menu field for each This information is provided for system administrators who need to configure terminals through Setup menus Table 10 4 Setup Menu Field for Printing When Changes Saved in Parameter Name Setup Menu Field Take Effect NVRAM parallel daemons table Setup Change Setup Use Parallel No Parameters Parallel Protocol field Parallel Daemons Table immediately all other fields
92. preferences file 1 If you use TFTP as the file transfer protocol a Create the empty file before attempting to write to it for example touch ncdprefs o o Make sure the file is accessible through the terminal s file service table c If you are using secure TFTP make sure the file is in a secure TFTP directory If you use NFS as the file transfer protocol make sure the file is available through the terminal s file service table and the file system is exported Put the file in the user s home directory The file should have the following permissions readable and writable by the owner readable by the group and readable by others Set the user s preference settings in Setup Change User Preferences From the File menu in the User Preferences window select Save to File Inthe dialog box that appears type the pathname of the preferences file Click OK Place the following command in an XDM xsession file in the user s home directory ncdloadprefs display SDISPLAY HOME pref_file amp 7 where pref_file is the name of the user s preference file The next time the user logs in on any terminal the settings in the user s personal preferences file take effect Terminal Configuration Methods 4 13 Configuring Terminals Using Setup Menus Configuring Terminals Using Setup Menus Setup menus are useful for immediate and temporary configuration changes or if users are permitt
93. reset when the browser restarts Enabling or Disabling Automatic Image Loading Loading documents without images improves browser performance Images that are not loaded are represented by text enclosed in a box After loading a document the user can load one or all of the missing images In the browser Preferences menus automatic image loading is enabled The default value of browser auto load images is user preference which allows the user to permanently enable or disable automatic image loading by writing to the preference file To prevent the user from permanently changing this preference item and always allow automatic image loading set the parameter to enable To prevent automatic image loading set it to disable Enabling or Disabling JavaScript JavaScript or Jscript is a language developed by Netscape Communications Corp for creating dynamic Web pages It is not the same as Java although some of its capabilities are similar The browser jscript active parameter controls whether JavaScript routines are executed when a Web document is loaded In the browser Preferences menus JavaScript is enabled 15 12 Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser Setting Browser Variables and Controlling Preferences The default parameter value is user preference which allows the user to permanently enable or disable this feature by writing to the preference file To prevent the user from permanently changing thi
94. statistics are displayed in the Console Statistics Show Statistics XRemote You may wish to use these statistics to consult with Technical Support about improving the performance of XRemote on your terminals XRemote Error Messages 18 32 Troubleshooting Errors that occur during an XRemote session are logged in a file called usr tmp XRemoten where n is a number assigned by XRemote and displayed as XRemote starts The log file is cleared every time a new XRemote session begins If there is no log file check the usr tmp directory permissions to make sure the directory is writable XRemote Problems Two common error messages in the log file are J Invalid arguments detected This message indicates a probable error in the xinitremoterc file If so rename the file so it is not read by XRemote and restart XRemote If you can isolate the problem to the file start a new file and add back commands one at a time until you find the command that is causing the error message Ll Connection to X server lost This message indicates that XRemote either did not start or started and then quit Garbled Characters Displayed See Chapter 16 for information about Garbled characters displayed after you type the xinitremote how to set the terminal andmodemfor command usually indicate that the connection is configured Spit iransmission to transmit 7 bit words rather than 8 bit words The modem the tty port on the host and the termin
95. such as xrdb xset and xmodmap in the foreground 1 Load the client resource database using xrdb To start the host based NCD Window Manager ncdwm add an ncdwm command 4 To start a local window manager add the ncdrunwm command for the local NCD Window Manager or ncdrunwm mwm for the local Motif Window Manager nedrunwm The host based application launcher that provides application startup and host access services for NCD local clients ncdrunwm should be the last client started in the script Otherwise run the last client in the foreground so that exiting from this client is equivalent to logging out You can make the launcher the last client with a logout menu entry in the launcher configuration file For example Log Off f quit When the user selects Log off from the menu the session ends L Make the file world executable Login and X Session Management 5 7 Controlling User and Host Connections to Terminals Controlling User and Host Connections to Terminals XDM access control ensures that only clients started by authorized users from authorized hosts can connect to NCD terminals XDM access control employs an authorization key known to the X server running on the user s terminal and to the clients that the user starts For access control to be effective you must configure both the XDM host s and terminals Configuring the Host for XDM Access Control To configure the host 1 On h
96. terminal s built in Local File Manager On a PC card you specify the local file system as local The pathname local refers only to the local file system on a PC card The terminal cannot access a host based file system whose pathname starts with local until after the configuration file has been read Once the configuration file has been read however you can create a file service table entry mapping local to another local mount point Local File System on a Floppy Disk 9 2 Using a Local File System On a floppy disk you specify the local file system as xfloppy You can use a terminal s floppy drive to copy files between a UNIX host and DOS compatible 720K or 1 44M floppy disks You can access the local file system on a floppy disk using either the Local File Manager or the hostside ncdfloppy command Do not try to access the floppy drive using both the Local File Manager and the hostside ncdfloppy utility without rebooting the terminal between use of the two methods Switching access methods without rebooting can damage files Managing Files in a Local File System Managing Files in a Local File System The Local File Manager is a utility for managing a local file system The Local File Manager includes commands to 1 Format the local file system and verify its structure 1 Make and remove directories change the current working directory and list directory content recursively 1 Copy delete list rename an
97. that emulates the function of a terminal allowing users to connect to hosts and use non X applications The terminal emulator xterm in the MIT X distribution emulates a Digital VT102 terminal The NCD Terminal Emulator ncdterm emulates a VT320 terminal NCD s tn3270 terminal emulator emulates an IBM 3278 terminal Trivial File Transfer Protocol The Internet standard protocol for file transfer Directory containing X server images Glossary 11 Glossary 12 thick Ethernet thin Ethernet Token Ring transceiver TRP board twisted pair Ethernet UDP UID A type of Ethernet cable used to connect devices over a distance of up to 1000 meters Can be connected to an NCD terminal s DB 15 Ethernet connector through an AUI cable IEEE 802 3 10Base5 Also called ThickNet A type of Ethernet cable used to connect devices over a distance of up to 300 meters NCD Network Interface Modules NIM and Parallel Ethernet PC boards PEP have a BNC thin Ethernet connector NCD s Ethernet Serial PC ESP board allows thin Ethernet through a transceiver IEEE 802 3 10Base2 Also called Thinnet A local area network architecture in which a token is passed sequentially from station to station Only the station possessing the token can communicate on the network Device for connecting a terminal to an Ethernet network Token Ring PC An interface board that incorporates a Token Ring connector and a socket for a PC c
98. the NCD Display Manager 5 12 usr lib X11 ncd configs default configuration file directory 4 6 usr lib X11 ncd dps DPS directory 17 10 usr lib X11 ncd fonts default font directory 6 1 usr lib X11 ncd fs default font server directory 6 8 usr lib X11 ncd users browser home directory 15 6 usr lib X11 ncd users nobody browser directory 15 6 usr lib X11 ncd zoneinfo timezone files B 2 Index usr lib X11 xdm ncd directory 5 13 usr tmp Xremoten files 16 17 V verify command Local File Manager 9 6 video local client 7 8 Video Player troubleshooting 18 37 Video Player Console 7 6 video RAM VRAM color depth setting A 1 visual effect of wincenter colors parameter 12 25 effects of setting color depth A 2 vp local client 7 6 VT320 terminal emulation see Terminal Emulator VUE with the NCD Display Manager 5 13 W wd command Boot Monitor 13 3 wincen local client defined 12 16 using 12 18 WinCenter audio disabling 12 26 color depth 12 26 colormap flash 12 24 12 26 18 27 configuration parameters 12 24 to 12 27 connections adding to root menu 12 18 automatic 12 17 in Login Chooser 12 19 network type 12 10 Start Local Command 12 18 using Windows Access 12 7 to 12 12 defined 12 2 keyboards 12 22 license management services 3 23 WinCenter continued license dat file 3 20 manuals for 1 4 resources 12 27 window size 12 26 see also Windows NT wincenter host based command 12 16
99. the default printer Commands in the NCD Terminal Emulator and Dialer File menus and the 3270 emulator File menu allow users to send the contents of the window or the current session log to a printer Printers can be local that is connected to the terminal s serial or parallel ports or they can be remote printers The default printer is highlighted in the Select Printer dialog box If the user hasn t selected a different default the first printer listed in the dialog box is the default If the user selects a different default all Terminal Emulators started thereafter have that printer as the default When the user logs out the default reverts to the first printer in the list or the printer named in the resource If you need to add entries to the print table and to the Select Printer dialog box see Setting Up the Print Table on page 10 10 Printing from the NCD Mosaic Browser In the browser users select File gt Print from the browser s Document View window The Print Setup dialog box is displayed The printers in the print table print lpr servers are listed in the drop down list from which the user selects a printer Note that only PostScript printers appear in the drop down list in the Print Setup dialog box The browser can only print to PostScript printers For information about adding printers to the print table see Setting Up the Print Table on page 10 10 10 12 Using Printers with NCD Terminals
100. the server to connect to Ifyou choose the WinCenter protocol the Server Published Applcation section changes to Hostname Enter the name or IP address of the Windows NT server in the Hostname field Ifyou choose the ICA TCP protocol you can enter the name or IP address of a server enter the name of a published application or select a server or published application from a drop down list Click the down arrow to display items in a drop down list 5 All other fields are optional and have default values Table 12 2 explains all of the fields in the dialog box Note that the available options change depending upon whether you chose ICA TCP or WinCenter for the connection type 6 Click Apply if you want to create additional connections at this time Click oK when you have finished adding connections 7 The new connections Are added to the Windows Access chooser 12 8 Accessing Windows NT Servers Configuring Connections in the Windows Access Chooser Are saved in the terminal s auto save remote configuration file See Saving Connections on page 12 12 for more information about saving settings Appear in the Login Chooser after the user logs out or restarts the terminal Copying Connections To create a new connection by copying an existing connection select a connection in the Window Access chooser and click Copy The properties dialog box opens with all of the properties filled in Edit the
101. the symbolic name of the range of IP addresses defined in this ip entry This symbolic name is the same as netn defined in an ether line Preparing Terminals for Booting 3 9 Optional Preparations Before Booting dns Is the method for determining if an IP address or hostname in the range is already in use The permitted values are none bootpd does not use DNS or the hosts table etc hosts to assign a hostname or IP address or to determine whether a hostname or address is in use name bootpd uses the hostname or IP returned by the DNS name server or the hosts file for the terminal If none is assigned bootpd supplies the name busy bootpd does not use IP addresses from DNS or the hosts table It uses the next available IP address in the range provided ip1 Are the lower and upper limits of the ip2 range of IP addresses that can be allocated automatically string Is an optional bootptab format string such as tc NET1 See the bootptab 5 man page The bootptab ip File bootpd maintains the bootptab ip file which contains the successful allocations of IP addresses to hosts The file is retained after bootpd resets so the same addresses can be assigned to hosts the next time they boot You can view this file but you should not attempt to edit it 3 10 Preparing Terminals for Booting Optional Preparations Before Booting Setting Up Domain Name Service for the Terminal Tip You can also use IEN 1
102. the terminal s hardware or move the terminal to another network connection location Troubleshooting 18 5 Troubleshooting Boot Failures Boot Failure Messages Messages displayed when the terminal fails to boot are explained in Table 18 3 These messages are not logged in the Console messages area Table 18 3 Boot Monitor Messages Boot Monitor Message Diagnosis and Actions to Take Host IP address timeout The boot host is down or The IP address of the host may be configured incorrectly or The terminal cannot connect to the host or The boot host is on another subnet and the terminal cannot get through the gateway Correct the boot host s IP address in the host or terminal configuration and reboot the terminal Check the network connection to the host TFTP timeout The TFTP service is not running on the boot host or is not set up properly Correct the problem and reboot the terminal Failed to mount The directory containing the X server may not be exported Correct the NFS problem and reboot the terminal Gateway not on same subnet The gateway is on a different subnet from the terminal Correct the terminal s configuration and reboot NVRAM checksum error Reload NVRAM factory defaults and reboot If this doesn t work there may be a hardware problem Call NCD technical support 18 6 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Boot Failures Table 18 3 Boot Monitor Messages
103. the terminal is on a LAN the terminal can either download an X server from a network host or use an X server on a PC card installed in the terminal s base If the terminal is connected through a serial line the terminal must have its X server on a Quick Start PC card If a terminal is on a serial line and the terminal was previously used on a LAN reset the terminal s NVRAM to its default settings If the terminal is new or hasn t been used on a LAN resetting NVRAM is not necessary To reset NVRAM 1 Enter the Boot Monitor To invoke the Boot Monitor while the terminal is booting press the Escape key while address requests are being broadcast to the network when the words TFTP load or NFS load appear After you press the Escape key the Boot Monitor prompt appears Setting Up XRemote 16 9 Setting Up the Terminal 2 Type the following commands gt nv NVRAM Utility C adr change location adr D start end display contents L load defaults X server Q return to monitor M load MWT defaults R S reload NVRAM values save new values gt gt 1 Load defaults gt gt s Save configuration values Are you sure y gt gt q Quit the NVRAM utility gt rs Reboot the terminal gt Setting Configuration Parameters See Chapter 4 for more information about terminal configuration methods If the terminal is on a LAN edit the host resident remote configuration fi
104. used in user based access control for storing magic cookies XDM access control relies on all clients having access to the authorization key in the Xauthority file in the user s home directory This is the case if you run all clients on the host where user home directories reside or if user home directories are shared across all hosts on which your clients run xauth 1 A utility used in host access control when access is required by clients running on hosts other than the user s login host If you need to run clients from a host that does not have a shared home directory you can use the xauth 1 utility to extract the authorization key from the Xauthority file in the user s home directory on one host and merge it into Xauthority files in the user s home directory on other hosts This must be done at the start of each X session so you should automate the process by putting backgrounded xauth commands in startup scripts Xsession or xsession 5 10 Login and X Session Management Controlling User and Host Connections to Terminals magic cookie A secret password used with XDM to control access to the X server and protect a user s display from unauthorized access In addition you can use xauth to put the magic cookie in another user s Xauthority file enabling that user to start clients on the terminal Two ways of using xauth to extract the authorization key and merge it into another fi
105. videoname Runs the NCD Video Player which decodes displays and controls MPEG 1 format digitized video See the vp 1 and ncdsendvideo 1 man pages Utilities Windows Access icaui host Displays the Windows Access dialog box that allows connections to Windows NT hosts using ICA and WinCenter See the icaui 1 man page 7 6 Starting and Configuring Local Clients Summary of Local Clients Table 7 1 Local Client Menu Choices Commands and Functions Continued Console Name amp Location Setup Change Quick Setup Command and Options quicksetup d display h host p password Function Displays the Quick Setup window for changing the most frequently modified configuration parameters The d option specifies the X server to use by default hostname 0 0 the h option specifies the host to try to connect to the p option specifies a password required for connecting to a remote terminal using the h option Setup Change Setup Parameters setup d display h host p password Displays the Setup Parameters window for making immediate and temporary configuration changes The d option specifies the X server to use by default hostname 0 0 the h option specifies the host to try to connect to the p option specifies a password required for connecting to a remote terminal using the h option See the ncdsetup 1 man page Setup Chang
106. want the client to run For example to start an xterm on the terminal from the host kestrel assuming that the DISPLAY environment variable is set rsh kestrel n usr bin X11 xterm display S DISPLAY amp Starting and Configuring Local Clients 7 13 Starting Local Clients Adding Local Clients to the Default Root Menu The default root menu lists a number of local client Draw Demo appletviewer http java sun com applets DrawTest examplel html commands If you do not configure root menus or if some mouse buttons are not bound to a root menu pressing a mouse button in the root window displays the default root menu To add local clients to the default root menu add commands in the exec command menu table For example to add a command to the menu to start a specific Java applet you could add the following line The default entries in exec command menu are listed in Table 7 2 Table 7 2 Default Root Menu Contents Menu Label Command Show Console console Start Terminal term Start Dialer dialer Start 3270 tn3270 Start 3179G tn3270 gddm loadps E S3 Start Keymap Editor keymap_editor Show Memory show memory Show X Connections show connections Lock Screen lock Setup User Preferences pref Login login Logout logout 7 14 Starting and Configuring Local Clients Starting Local Clients Starting Local Clients from the Console Tip
107. with the desired name must exist already on the remote file system and write access must be enabled for the file Local File Manager Commands Table 9 1 lists the Local File Manager commands The Local File Manager does not recognize wildcard characters Press Return after typing a Local File Manager command Table 9 1 Local File Manager Commands Command Description cd directory Changes the current working directory compare file1 file2 or Compares the contents of the two files and displays a message cmp file file2 stating whether the files are equivalent copy sourcefile destfile Copies sourcefile to destfile Copying files may take a long or time and affect the X server s response time while it is taking cp sourcefile destfile place cwd or pwd Displays the current working directory delete file s or Deletes files from the local file system On a PC card after del file s or using the delete command use the reclaim command to re remove file s or pack previously used file space for subsequent use rm file s or Using a Local File System 9 5 Managing Files in a Local File System Table 9 1 Local File Manager Commands Continued Command format filesystem The q and 720 options are for use with a floppy drive only Description Formats the local file system filesystem is either local PC card or xfloppy diskette The default is to format local Formatting the file s
108. you are using node licenses for any licensed features you need a 12 or 16 licenses character license string for each licensed feature If you don t have the licenses you need contact NCD Sales Support Tip 3 From the Main menu select 3 Configure NCD You can press Return at most Terminals ncdinstall prompts to select the default which appears in brackets following the prompt 4 From the Configure NCD Terminals menu select 1 Add NCD Terminal 5 ncdinstall prompts you to supply the model IP address Ethernet address hostname subnet mask and gateway 6 Verify your input and correct any errors 7 Specify whether you want to use the terminal as an NFS server Type y for yes or n for no 8 Specify whether you want to export a local file system that is use the terminal as an NFS file server Type 1 to export a PC card file system 2 for a floppy or a11 for both 3 26 Preparing Terminals for Booting Configuring Terminals for the Network 10 11 If you are not using node licenses press Return and go to the next step If you are using node licenses answer the following Type y to indicate you want to use a licensed feature Enter the 12 or 16 character license string and press Return Type y to indicate you want to license an additional feature or press Return to continue Repeat Step 5 through Step 9 for each terminal you want to add When you ve finished adding term
109. 11 ncd fonts pcf 75dpi usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf 100dpi usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf dw75dpi usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf dwl00dpi usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf java usr lib X11 ned fonts pcf Xol browser environment HOME usr lib X11 ncd users BROWSER_HOME HOME Browser entries in file service table file service table 1 tmp nil 139 40 202 19 tftp usr lib X11 ncd users tmp file service table 1 usr lib X11 ncd users nil 139 40 202 19 tftp usr lib X11 ncd users apply Figure 4 2 Generic Remote Configuration File Terminal Configuration Methods 4 9 Configuring Terminals Using Remote Configuration Files Tip The parameters in the ncd_std file are The name service parameters must be listed first Until the terminal has 2 The tcpip name server protocol parameter sets the name read the name service parameters all service protocol to both DNS and IEN 116 The name hosts must be referenced by their IP service resolves hostnames and their IP addresses addresses instead of their hostnames 1 The tcpip dns default domain parameter sets the default domain suffix that is appended to hostnames in name service searches for example ncd com D Each row in the tcpip name servers parameter table contains the IP address of a name server host These are hosts that pro
110. 11 ncd users nobody directory Copy the preference files into each user directory Make the user preference files world readable and world writable If you are using secure TFTP make sure that all directories to be accessed by the browser are in a secure TFTP directory On some systems such as AIX the directories accessed through secure TFTP must be listed in the etc tftpaccess ctl file See the TFTP man page on your system Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser 15 9 Providing Print Services Providing Print Services You can set up browser printing either on remote printers attached to other network hosts or a printer attached to the terminal s parallel port Remote printing is through the LPD protocol and the terminal always sends a PostScript data stream Note that local printing may be slow and remote printing uses terminal memory to store queued print jobs For information about setting up printing services see Chapter 10 For information about using the Browser s print dialog box see the NCDware User s Guide Making Java Available See Chapter 14 for more information ncdinstall installs the Java class files zip files in a directory about Java called java in the same directory as the X servers The class files must be in this directory or in a directory linked to this directory If you use ncdinstall to install NCDware the class files are properly linked Browser Help Files ncdinstall installs t
111. 16 name service protocol or a local name translation table in the tepip name local cache remote configuration parameter If you set up a DNS server host and the terminals to use aname service you can use hostnames instead of addresses when configuring the terminal and when using commands that require a network address To use DNS Domain Name System verify that it is enabled on the host and configure the terminal as described in the following sections Verify that DNS Is Enabled on the Host grep named etc rc To verify that DNS is enabled on the host 1 Verify that DNS software named or in named is enabled in a startup file such as etc re local on the name server host Use a command such as the following to find the command line that starts the name service software etc rce local if f usr etc in named a f etc named boot then in named echo n named gt dev console 2 Make sure that the DNS name service database is set up on the server host 3 Run the ps command to verify that named or in named is running Configure the Terminal to Use DNS If you use ncdinstall to add terminals terminals use DNS and the boot host is designated as the name server host If you don t use ncdinstall or you want to use additional or different name server hosts use the following procedure to configure terminals for name service Note Place the following assignments at the beginning of the remote conf
112. 18 12 If You Are Using TFTP for File Transfers 18 12 If You Are Using NFS for File Transfers 18 13 Files Not Installed 18 13 File Service Table 18 13 Troubleshooting XDM Login Failures 18 14 Check the XDM Log File 18 14 Problems with the Login Chooser 18 14 If the Host Is Not Listed in the Login Chooser 18 14 Check XDM on the Host 18 14 Host Is Listed But XDMCP Message Appears 18 15 Host Does Not Respond 18 15 Logging in Through the Login Banner Fails 18 15 Login Banner Keeps Reappearing 18 16 XDM Logs Out for No Reason 18 16 Clients in Session Files Don t Start 18 16 If Resource Settings are Ignored 18 17 If XDM Stops Running 18 17 Problems with System Console XDM 18 18 Font and Font Server Problems 18 18 Terminal Cannot Find Specific Fonts 18 18 Font Format is Wrong 18 19 Incorrect Compression Factor 18 19 New Font Path Doesn t Work 18 19 Using xset to Change the Font Path 18 20 Application Launcher Font Problems 18 20 xxi Contents Host Specific Font Problems 18 20 Font Server Problems 18 21 Keyboard and Keymap Problems 18 21 Shift Keys Not Working Properly 18 22 Control and Caps Lock Keys Swapped on 101 Key Keyboard 18 22 New Keyboard Not Working Properly 18 22 Escape Key Doesn t Work on VT 220 style Keyboard 18 23 Checking Keyboard Mapping 18 23 Using the NCD Keymapper Utility 18 23 Using the xmodmap Client 18 23 Using the xev Client 18 24 Compatibility with the Boot Monitor 18 24 Window Manager
113. 3270 or VT320 window Type the full pathname of the file in the File field Click on OK WON rR ON e Select Application Window 2 Click on OK Click on the window from which you want to read translations Select Brixton brxkeMap file Reassigning Keyboard Functions Using the Keymap Editor 11 9 Mapping the Keyboard Advanced Mode Mapping the Keyboard Advanced Mode This section describes how to used advanced mode Figure 11 5 shows the Keymap Editor in advanced mode Advanced mode allows complete graphical editing of keyboard translations The subject of X translations is beyond the scope of this book For a complete description of key translations see an X Window System reference such as Quercia V and O Reilly T X Toolkit Intrinsics Programming Manual O Reilly amp Associates Inc Displays translations for one key at Action List all actions associated a time as you press a key instead with 3270 or VT320 emulation of displaying all translations Keymap Editor
114. 4 Automating Login through the NCD Terminal Emulator 5 15 Configuring Terminal Emulator Sessions without Login 5 16 Configuring Login to Microsoft Windows NT Hosts 5 17 Setup Menu Equivalents for Configuration Parameters 5 18 Chapter 6 Configuring Font Service Using Bitmap Fonts 6 1 Bitmap Font Formats 6 2 Putting Fonts on a Non Standard Host 6 2 Adding Bitmap Fonts to Font Directories 6 3 Using Alternate Fonts 6 4 Deleting Bitmap Fonts and Font Directories 6 5 Changing the Terminal s Font Path 6 5 Changing the Font Path Permanently 6 5 Setting the Font Path for the Current X Session 6 6 Configuring the Font Path for CDE Bitmap Fonts 6 7 Using the NCD Font Server 6 8 Configuring Font Server Operation 6 9 Enabling the Font Server 6 11 Adding Font Servers to the Font Path 6 11 Adding Font Servers to the Font Path for CDE 6 12 Adding Outline Fonts 6 13 Setup Menu Equivalents for the Font Parameters 6 14 Contents Chapter 7 Starting and Configuring Local Clients Summary of Local Clients 7 1 Starting Local Clients 7 10 Starting Clients Automatically at Boot Time 7 10 Adding Clients to a Window Manager s Root Menu 7 11 Configuring a Window Manager s Menus 7 11 Launcher Configuration Files 7 12 Adding Local Clients to a Root Menu 7 13 Adding Host Based Clients to a Root Menu 7 13 Adding Local Clients to the Default Root Menu 7 14 Starting Local Clients from the Console 7 15 Restricting Access to Clients 7 15
115. 44 tag 3 8 see also DHCP bootpd 8 3 6 bootptab cfg file 3 8 to 3 10 bootptab ip file 3 10 boot second source Setup menu field for 3 31 specifying an alternate boot source 3 5 boot tcpip second server Setup menu field for 3 31 specifying an alternate boot host 3 5 boot tcpip third server Setup menu field for 3 31 specifying an alternate boot host 3 5 boot third source Setup menu field for 3 31 specifying an alternate boot method 3 5 broadcast address specifying through BOOTP DHCP 3 8 setting through the Boot Monitor browser see NCD Mosaic Browser browser auto load images enabling disabling image loading 15 12 Setup menu field for 15 19 browser cache size Setup menu field for 15 19 size of the browser cache 15 11 browser environment setting browser variables 15 16 Setup menu field for 15 19 Index browser ftp proxy host Setup menu field for 15 19 specifying the FTP proxy host 15 15 browser ftp proxy host port Setup menu field for 15 20 specifying the FTP proxy port 15 15 browser ftp proxy overrides Setup menu field for 15 20 specifying FTP proxy overrides 15 15 browser gopher proxy host Setup menu field for 15 20 specifying the gopher proxy host 15 15 browser gopher proxy host port Setup menu field for 15 20 specifying the gopher proxy port 15 15 browser gopher proxy overrides Setup menu field for 15 20 specifying gopher proxy overrides 15 15 browser home page setting the default home page 15 13 Setup menu field
116. 8 Local File Manager floppy drive 9 3 Setup menu field for 9 27 Index file enable nfs server booting from remote terminal 9 17 local file system exporting 9 8 Setup menu field for 9 27 file export directory list booting from remote terminal 9 17 9 18 Setup menu field for 9 27 file extended diagnostics detailed messages 8 6 file service messages 8 7 Setup menu field for 8 14 file extended diagnostics 18 38 file initial server 1 for accessing files 3 13 for accessing fonts 6 2 file initial server 2 for accessing files 3 13 for accessing fonts 6 2 file manager access control enabled access to Local File Manager 9 7 Setup menu field for 9 27 file manager access control list access to Local File Manager 9 7 Setup menu field for 9 27 file emanager password 9 27 file manager tcp port port for Local File Manager 9 8 Setup menu field for 9 28 file manager telnet port port for Local File Manager 9 8 Setup menu field for 9 28 file nfs access control default 9 9 file nfs access control list 9 9 file nfs gid 5 13 file nfs uid 5 13 file service table copying files to the PC card 9 11 for font access 6 2 placing files in non standard locations 3 12 to 3 14 file service table continued problems in loading files other than configuration file 18 12 Setup menu field for 3 32 trying all matches 18 13 Windows NT shared directories 12 28 file smb default password 12 29 file smb default username 12 29 f
117. Continued Boot Monitor Message Diagnosis and Actions to Take Load address out of range The X server file is corrupted Recopy the X server or from the distribution and try booting again Load image out of range or The X server was only partially downloaded Try booting again Object file larger than available The terminal doesn t have enough memory to boot memory the specified X server file This may be because memory was installed improperly or you may need to add more memory See the memory installation booklet for your terminal Incorrect object fil The terminal tried to boot the wrong X server file or Or Incorrect product file you are trying to load an X server for a different terminal model You can use the UNIX what 1 command to determine the model and version for which an NCD X server file is intended Searching for IP address 1 Make sure RARP or BOOTP DHCP address IP Address Timeout resolution service is running on your network and there is a correct entry in etc ethers for RARP or in etc bootptab for BOOTP DHCP 2 Check for a loose Ethernet connection 3 Make sure the boot host is up and running Port Unreachable or TFTP is not running on the system you are trying to TFTP no answer boot from Troubleshooting 18 7 Troubleshooting Boot Failures Table 18 3 Boot Monitor Messages Continued Boot Monitor Message Tftp error 1 File not found Diagn
118. DPS Support Files FontFamily DSPVM local VM_3_2_ snf master VM_3_2_ snf ColorRendering This section identifies the file containing color rendering information The identified file aids the DPS extension in rendering colors in a device independent manner For example ColorRendering DefaultCIE CIE dict19c dat ColorCIE CIE dict19c dat ContextInit This section identifies the context initialization file used when a context is created For example ContextInit InitProc InitProc dat FontAFM This section identifies the locations of the Adobe Font Metric AFM files Some applications that use the PostScript language need these files for proper operation The section lists each font name and font location For example FontAFM Avant Garde Bold0Ob1l fonts AFM AGWO afm AvantGarde Book fonts AFM AGW afm AvantGarde Demi fonts AFM AGD afm AvantGarde DemiOblique fonts AFM AGDO afm FontFamily This section identifies the supported font families and additional typefaces For example Courier Bold Oblique Courier BoldOblique Bold CourierBold Medium Courier Oblique Courier Oblique m FontOutline This section identifies the locations of the available outline font files It lists each outline font name and the font location For example FontOutline AvantGarde Book fonts AGW pfa AvantGarde BookOblique fonts AGWO pfa AvantGarde Demi fo
119. Disabling Access to Specific Local Clients from the Terminal 7 15 Restricting Access to Local Clients from Other Hosts 7 16 Restricting User Access to Local Clients 7 17 Configuring Local Clients 7 17 Setting Resources for Local Clients 7 17 Setting Resource Values through Remote Configuration 7 17 Setting Resources in Resource Files 7 18 Using Command Line Options 7 18 Setup Menu Equivalents for Local Client Parameters 7 19 Contents Chapter 8 Getting Information About Terminal Operations Displaying the Console 8 1 Console Messages 8 2 Format of Console Messages 8 4 Viewing Messages in the Console Window 8 4 Viewing Messages through TELNET 8 5 Logging Messages to a File 8 5 Configuring Message Logging 8 6 Configuring Message Time Stamps 8 6 Changing the Message Buffer Size 8 6 Enabling Extended Diagnostics 8 6 X Server Messages Displayed in Dialog Boxes 8 7 Logout Confirmation Dialog Box 8 7 Kill X Clients Dialog Box 8 8 The Console Statistics Menus 8 8 Displaying General Information Show Version 8 8 Displaying Memory Information Show Memory 8 10 Displaying Status of Clients Show X Connections 8 11 Displaying Terminal and Network Statistics Show Statistics 8 11 Displaying a Remote Terminal s Statistics 8 13 Setup Menu Equivalents for Message Logging Parameters 8 14 Contents Chapter 9 Using a Local File System Overview 9 1 Local File System on a PC Card 9 1 Local File System on a Floppy Disk
120. Dware Login Chooser the next time the user logs in Deleting Connections To remove an existing connection select the connection in the Windows Access chooser and click Delete The connection is removed from the terminal s remote configuration file and no longer appears in the Login Chooser Accessing Windows NT Servers 12 11 Configuring Connections in the Windows Access Chooser Saving Connections All of the settings that you make in the Windows Access dialog are saved to the auto save remote configuration file after you click OK Connections that you delete are removed from the remote configuration file The terminal must be configured for auto save config auto save file in order to save connections by default auto save is enabled The default auto save filename is the initial configuration file loaded by the terminal plus the suffix stp You can specify a different filename in the config auto save file name parameter See Chapter 4 for more information about auto save In the remote configuration file connections are saved in the ica chooser entries parameter table Each entry describes one connection in the Windows Access chooser for example ica chooser entries htype Server ti Pubs h verdi ty ICA TCP g 1024x768 htype Server ti Mktg h strauss ty WinCenter g 1024x768 net LAN Note NCD does not recommend manually adding ICA connections to the remote configuration file or manually edi
121. IP Address backspace to erase the current address and enter the gateway address to be used by the terminal if any d Highlight Subnet Mask and Broadcast IP Address and change them to the addresses used on your network Reboot the terminal by using the right arrow key to highlight Done and pressing the Return key Figure 9 2 Configuring a PC Card for Booting 7 Figure 9 2 The Boot Monitor s Done Menu The terminal boots and displays the Console and the Login Chooser NFS Booting from a Remote PC Card To boot an NCD terminal from another terminal s PC card you must do the following m m m Configure the boot host the terminal with the PC card This requires using the Local File Manager see Managing Files in a Local File System on page 9 3 for directions Configure each of the remote terminals that will be booting from this boot host Manually boot each remote terminal Configuring the Boot Host Terminal On the boot host terminal 1 2 Set the file enable nfs server parameter to true The file export directory list parameter equates the default locations of the X server and support files required for booting a terminal to the actual physical location of the files in local By default the parameter is set as follows Using a Local File System 9 17 Configuring a PC Card for Booting 3 4 Tip 5 To boot over NFS from a remote terminal you must h
122. IX shell For example rsh ncd_name keymap_editor option where ncd_name is the hostname or IP address of the terminal From the default window manager menu click any mouse button on the root window and select Keymap Editor from the root menu Exiting from the Keymap Editor To exit from the Keymap Editor select Quit from the file menu To save the current keymap before quitting apply the keymap to a window or save it in a file See Writing a Keymap to a File and Applying a Keymap on page 11 6 11 2 Reassigning Keyboard Functions Using the Keymap Editor Keymap Editor Window and Menus Keymap Editor Window and Menus Figure 11 1 shows a typical display when you first invoke the Keymap Editor The keyboard layout initially displayed is for the keyboard attached to your terminal You may choose a different keyboard layout by selecting Keyboards from the menu bar and clicking on a different keyboard name Trash Can for deleting Keyboard an action from a key Name Editar Menu Bar Fie Ede View Heyooards Help Action List T NT m i Keyboard F ee o epre To jinan pi ijji p Figure 11 1 Keymap Editor Basic Mode Display The keyboard layout in the Keymap Editor window shows the keycaps the legends printed on the keys and the names of any functions associated with a key If you start the Keymap Editor from the Console no actions are displayed because there is no keymap availa
123. Local File Manager Password Type the Local File Manager password and press Return 3 The Local File Manager starts immediately and a prompt gt appears NCD X Terminal Local File Manager gt If the Local File Manager disconnects instead of displaying a prompt gt make sure a password has been defined and you are using the correct password See Configuring the Local File Manager on page 9 7 4 Before copying files read the following section Hints for Copying Files To copy files use the following command gt copy sourcefile destfile 5 To disconnect from the Local File Manager use the following command gt quit Hints for Copying Files 9 4 Using a Local File System Before copying files make sure that the terminal s file service table includes an entry for the remote file system For information about the file service table see Chapter 3 Make sure the PC card or floppy disk has been formatted For information on formatting see Local File Manager Commands on page 9 5 Managing Files in a Local File System If you are copying files to a PC card make sure the card is write enabled If you are copying files to a PC card and you have recently deleted files from the local file system use the reclaim command first to ensure that all available space is accessible Before using TFTP to copy files from the local file system to a remote file system an empty file
124. NCD how to reach 18 44 technical tips archive 18 44 TELNET logging in through 7 4 password 4 20 use in interactive terminal configuration 4 20 to 4 27 TELNET ports for the Configuration daemon 4 21 for the Local File Manager 9 8 term see Terminal Emulator term default connect timeout 5 15 term default hosts Setup menu field for 5 19 Terminal Host Chooser configuration 5 15 Index terminal configuration access to configuration data controlling 4 28 to 4 29 booting without a configuration file 4 6 changing user s configuration file stp file 4 18 displaying current values 4 15 experimental configuration changes 4 3 immediate configuration changes 4 3 4 14 to 4 19 loading defaults from Setup menus 4 18 methods overview 4 1 passwords 4 20 4 28 to 4 29 permanent configuration changes 4 2 precedence of data from various sources 4 3 read write parameters 4 4 4 25 read only parameters 4 5 4 25 temporary configuration changes 4 14 troubleshooting 18 10 user s preferences file 4 12 using Boot Monitor Setup menus 18 2 to 18 3 using TELNET 4 3 4 20 to 4 23 when parameters take effect 4 5 see also remote configuration remote configuration files Setup menus Terminal Emulator 3270 see 3270 terminal emulator bypassing login requirement 5 16 CTERM connection 7 4 defined 5 14 LAT connection 7 4 ncdrunterm 5 16 printing 10 12 serial connection 7 5 TELNET connection 7 4
125. NET You may also write data from the Setup menus or TELNET into NVRAM or remote configuration files thus changing the terminal s default configuration at boot time About Configuration Parameters See the Remote Configuration Almost all of the terminal s configuration parameters are Parameter Quick Reference for a either read write or read only A few parameters consisting complete list of read write and write f d d ti k it lv Each ohly conifiguraiion parameters of passwords and encryption keys are write only Eac possible values SNMP names and configuration parameter corresponds to a variable in the MIB other information file which defines SNMP variables for NCD terminals Read Write Parameters With few exceptions you can use either remote configuration files Console Setup menus or TELNET to set all of the read write parameters Seethe Reference Manualfor a listing Read write parameter names have two different formats one of Setup menu items and for the parameters in the Setup menus and one for the a aaa a Soar parameters set through TELNET or remote configuration files For example Configuration File TELNET Name Setup Menu Name boot automatically Boot automatically at power up serial interfaces table Serial Interfaces Table Parameters are organized into groups according to their functions and the remote configuration file TELNET name of each parameter begins with its group name
126. Problems 18 24 Cut and Paste Between Local Clients 18 25 Java Stack Overflows 18 25 NCD Mosaic Browser 18 25 Navigating in the NCD Mosaic Browser 18 25 Displaying Text and Graphics 18 26 Fonts 18 26 In line GIFs 18 26 Local Printing Problems 18 26 Printer Setup Problem 18 27 Colormap Problems 18 27 Application Launcher Problems 18 27 xxii Contents Network Configuration Problems 18 28 Checking Network Statistics 18 28 Lost Carrier Errors 18 28 High Collision Rates 18 28 Terminal Boots But Cannot Connect to Certain Hosts 18 28 Routing Table and ARP Cache 18 29 Gateway Not Specified Correctly 18 29 Checking the Connection 18 29 Reasons for Failures to Connect 18 30 Hosts with Multiple Ethernet Addresses 18 31 Lost Ethernet Address 18 31 XRemote Problems 18 32 XRemote Error Messages 18 32 Garbled Characters Displayed 18 33 Keystrokes Do Not Appear in the Terminal Emulator Window 18 33 Memory Problems 18 34 Displaying Memory Statistics 18 34 Popup Warning Messages 18 34 Failure to Open Display Console Messages 18 35 Memory Saving Suggestions 18 35 Font Usage 18 35 Discarding X Settings 18 35 Diagnostic Messages Buffer Size 18 36 XRemote Data Compression Mode 18 36 Disabling Local Clients 18 36 ARC Cache Size 18 36 Backing Store 18 36 Adding Memory 18 36 xxiii Contents NCD Mosaic Browser Java 18 37 Video Player 18 37 Troubleshooting Display PostScript 18 37 If the DPS Extension Fails to Start 18 37 File Serv
127. RIZATION 1 and the terminal s encryption key For example Ethernet 00 00 a7 10 51 10 0x1234999 Only root should be able to read and write this file An encryption key can be any number you wish as long as it consists of up to 14 hexadecimal digits preceded by Ox Note that the same key is used to configure the terminal as described in the next section Configuring the Terminal for XDM Access Control To make XDM access control effective you must enable X server access control and make sure the access control list is empty To configure a terminal for XDM access control Enable X server access control a The xserver access control enabled parameter controls the current status of host based access control This is reset to the default mode when the terminal boots Set this parameter to true b The xserver access control enabled default parameter controls the default status of host based access control Set this parameter to true Enter the hosts from which clients are allowed to connect to the terminal s X server into the xserver access control list table An example table is shown in Figure 5 2 Hosts from which clients without the authorization key are permitted X server access xserver access control list eagle tcpip The client connects to the host using this ncdul0 tcpip protocol Hosts with access through both ncdu10 ncdnet TCP IP and DECnet must have entries in the acces
128. Remote 16 11 to 16 13 SMB Server Message Block protocol 12 28 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol configuring wireless Access Points 13 9 status information 8 12 use of global password for 4 21 4 29 SQE 18 28 Start Java Applet Console 7 6 Start Local Command Console 7 6 12 18 Start NCD Mosaic Browser Console 7 6 startcmd local client 7 6 Starting server pleas Monitor message 18 9 startjava 14 4 Startup Commands Setup menus 12 30 startup file see xsession file Xsession file login file cshre file profile file statistics displaying 8 11 stats see Show Statistics subnet mask adding to system files 3 3 3 26 defined 3 26 how to determine 8 9 specifying through the Boot Monitor 9 16 wait Boot system launchre file 7 12 system mwmnc file 7 12 Index 20 T TCP login manager on host not responding X Server message 8 7 TCP ports for font server 6 10 for ncdfloppy 9 25 for the Local File Manager 9 8 TCP status information 8 12 TCP IP protocol status information 8 12 tcpip arp cache 18 29 tcpip dns default domain default domain suffix 3 12 in default ncd_std file 4 10 Setup menu field for 3 33 tcpip name local cache name service problems 18 15 Setup menu field for 3 33 tcpip name server protocol in default ncd_std file 4 10 Setup menu field for 3 33 using DNS 3 11 tcpip name servers in default ncd_std file 4 10 Setup menu field for 3 33 using DNS 3 12 Technical Support
129. Setup Change Setup When the No port Parameters Browser browser starts Network Proxy Settings section FTP Proxy Host Port browser ftp proxy Setup Change Setup When the No overrides Parameters Browser browser starts Network Proxy Settings section FTP Proxy Host Overrides browser gopher proxy Setup Change Setup When the No host Parameters Browser browser starts Network Proxy Settings section Gopher Proxy Host browser gopher proxy Setup Change Setup When the No host port Parameters Browser gt browser starts Network Proxy Settings section Gopher Proxy Host Port browser gopher proxy Setup Change Setup When the No overrides Parameters Browser browser starts Network Proxy Settings section Gopher Proxy Overrides browser home page Setup Change Setup When the No Parameters Browser gt User browser starts Preference Overrides section Default home page browser http proxy host Setup Change Setup When the No Parameters Browser gt browser starts Network Proxy Settings section HTTP Proxy Host browser http proxy host Setup Change Setup When the No 15 20 Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser Setup Menu Equivalents for Browser Configuration Parameters Table 15 3 Setup Menu Fields for Browser Parameters Continued Parameters Browser gt Network Proxy Settings section SOCKS Port browser starts When Changes Saved in Parameter Name Se
130. Solid Color Fonts The NCD Mosaic Browser might attempt to use fonts such as Palatino and ITC that are not supplied by NCD If you want to use these fonts you must add them to your font path In line GIFs The NCD Mosaic Browser does not display in line GIF Graphics Interchange Format graphics in the correct vertical position Local Printing Problems When the printer finishes a job the message Closed Session should appear in the Console Messages hide box If this message does not appear you must explicitly close the connection using the Abort Serial Line command in the Console menu The print spooler software supplied in some previous releases prints ASCII PCL and PostScript files PCL printing is not supported in NCDware 5 1 Call NCD Technical Support for a workaround 18 26 Troubleshooting Printer Setup Problem Printer Setup Problem When adding printers to the print table in the Setup menus do not use curly brackets in a text field such as the Description field Using curly brackets in a text field causes the NCD terminal to panic Colormap Problems If colors in applications flash that is colors change depending on whether an application s window is active you can prevent or minimize the problem by specifying how NCDware handles WinCenter colors If you are not using WinCenter you can disable Microsoft Windows colors by setting the wincenter colors parameter to disabled In the Console this
131. The browser socks host parameter specifies the name of the SOCKS host that approves requests from outside the local network for a local network resource The default is nil The browser socks host port parameter specifies the TCP IP port for the SOCKS proxy server The default is 1080 and the range is 0 to 65535 Specifying the Mail Server Tip Tosend mail the browser connects to an SMTP server You can SMTP and MAILTO are notincluded specify an SMTP server host using the browser smtp email in the browser module that has t encryption they are included in the server parameter other two modules Setting Browser Variables for Special Environments You can set browser variables for special environments in the browser environment parameter Note that the names of the variables differ from the names of the remote configuration parameters and the names in the browser preferences menus Variables set in the browser environment parameter take precedence over the user s preferences in the nmosaic pref file This means that variables set in browser environment replace those already set in nmosaic prefs The format for preferences that are not configuration parameters or browser preference items is NCD NCDM name value where name is a variable name and value is its value 15 16 Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser Setting Browser Variables and Controlling Preferences Tip Quotation marks must be placed around br
132. This chapter introduces NCD thin client devices terminals NCDware NCD s terminal and host software and the network computing environment NCD Terminals and the Network Environment NCD terminals operate in a distributed network computing environment that allows users to run multiple applications residing on host computers Figure 2 1 on the next page shows a basic network computing system consisting of terminals and application hosts Using a terminal and NCDware users can run applications written for the X Window System legacy applications designed for ASCII terminals applications running on Microsoft Windows NT hosts and applications written for IBM 3270 series terminals To run Windows NT applications you need NCD s WinCenter software sold separately from NCDware Citrix WinFrame or Citrix MetaFrame WinCenter also allows you to run Java video and UNIX applications on the NT desktop Besides running applications on many different types of host systems NCD terminals can use devices such as printers and plotters Some of these devices can be attached directly to a terminal serial or parallel printers or a floppy drive and accessed by remote terminals as well Introduction to Thin Client Devices and NCDware 2 1 The X Window System Minicomputer Supercomputer Workstation Windows NT System Mi NCD Terminal Work station Data j Windows Application
133. To redefine the value for the Setup key or key combination use pref console key sequence After the X server is running users can start local clients by selecting a command from the Console menus or by typing a command name in the dialog box displayed by selecting Start Local Command from the Utilities menu To display the Console press the Setup key or on keyboards that do not have a Setup key a Setup key combination Table 7 3 Table 7 3 Setup Key Equivalents Keyboard Key Combination Sun Type 4 compatible Press the Alt Graph key and the Help Setup key simultaneously VT220 style Press the Compose key and the F3 key simultaneously 108 key style Press the Alt key and the F3 key simultaneously 122 key 3270 compatible Press the Alt key and the Alt ExSel key simultaneously Windows 95 compatible Pause Restricting Access to Clients You can disable access to specific local clients or restrict access to local clients through remote configuration Disabling Access to Specific Local Clients from the Terminal To disable specific local clients list their command names in the exec disabled commands table For example to disable the Change Setup Parameters local client exec disabled commands setup Starting and Configuring Local Clients 7 15 Starting Local Clients Tip You cannot disable an individual show command show version show memory and show connection You can di
134. Troubleshooting Display PostScript If OPENWINHOME is not set the following messages are displayed answerbook Verifying AnswerBook environment The OPENWINHOME environment variable is not set Are you running OpenWindows Check reset the value of OPENWINHOME then rerun AnswerBook o oO No special fonts are needed for AnswerBook Running ImageTool Problems with ImageTool are caused by unavailable fonts colormap flash and incorrect setting of OPENWINHOME Font Problems If the required fonts are not in the terminal s font path or are not in the correct order in the font path the image appears briefly and the application shuts down Error messages similar to the following are displayed imagetool X error of failed request BadValue integer parameter out of range for operation Major opcode of failed request 94 X_CreateGlyphCursor Minor opcode of failed request 0 Resource id in failed request Oxc Serial number of failed request 1869 Current serial number in output stream 1873 You need the following fonts and font management files and the font directory must be second in the font path xserver default font path right after built ins OLCursor46 pcf fonts alias fonts dir See Chapter 6 for more information about fonts Troubleshooting 18 39 Troubleshooting Display PostScript Colormap Flash To get the proper colors make the window with the picture the focus window a
135. WinCenter connection uses the X protocol Window Colors Number of colors 16 colors 256 colors High Color 16 bit WinCenter only True Color 24 bit WinCenter only Cache Size KB ICA TCP only The cache is used by ICA for video display and a larger cache increases the speed of the video display Depending on the number of simultaneous connections needed by the user and the amount of free memory in the terminal you may want to increase or decrease the default value of 2048K Reduce the cache size if the terminal is running out of memory Network Type WinCenter only LAN For connections to servers on the local network WAN Enables optimized accelerated communication on a low bandwidth connection Use this option if the WinCenter server is outside your building or accessed via a lower bandwidth connection such as an ISDN line Window Size A predefined window size or custom size The default is Full Screen which produces a window as large as the monitor screen Note however the maximum window sizes explained below For Custom Size enter a custom window size using the format widthxheight do not use spaces ICA TCP The maximum window size permitted is 1280x1024 The user cannot resize the window after it is displayed WinCenter The maximum window size is 1600x1200 The user can resize the window after it is displayed 12 10 Accessing Windows NT Servers Configuring
136. X Resource Path pref font path Setup Change User Immediately No Preferences gt Fonts gt Current Font Path xserver default font path Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters Fonts gt Default Font Path Configuring Display PostScript 17 13 Setup Menu Equivalents for Remote Configuration Parameters 17 14 Configuring Display PostScript 18 Troubleshooting This chapter explains 1 How to resolve common problems 1 What to do if a terminal crashes 11 How to retrieve information from NCD s World Wide Web server or through FTP 1 How to contact NCD Technical Support Troubleshooting Boot Failures If the terminal cannot boot load an X server it enters the Boot Monitor gt prompt after displaying diagnostic messages This section presents some general hints for booting the terminal followed by details about specific problems you may encounter Getting the Terminal Booted To quickly get the terminal running NCD recommends resetting the terminal s NVRAM non volatile RAM to factory defaults and booting the terminal manually Resetting NVRAM Resetting NVRAM to its default settings often solves booting problems especially if m m m The terminal booted previously but now you are trying to load a different X server You are booting the terminal from a different host You have changed the terminal s IP address You want to run a previous release of the X server Troubleshooti
137. a Diskette p port Specifies the TCP port for the parallel daemon If you use the default port 5964 you don t need to use this option If you change the default port number you must reboot the terminal before using its floppy drive and use this option to specify the port number command Specifies one of the commands listed in Table 9 3 After the command executes ncdfloppy exits If you don t specify a command ncdfloppy goes into interactive mode and prompts you for commands For example the following command copies a file from the floppy disk into the current directory of the local UNIX file system then exits ncdfloppy get my_file o9 ncdfloppy Naming Conventions When you specify filenames and directories with ncdfloppy commands keep the following guidelines in mind to avoid conflicts between DOS and UNIX style file system conventions 1 You can use either a UNIX style slash or a DOS style backslash as a separator in pathnames 1 ncdfloppy recognizes the asterisk question mark and square brackets in filenames and interprets them as wildcard characters 1 DOS limits label names to eleven characters and ncdfloppy truncates label names that exceed that length 1 DOS limits filenames and directory names to an eight character filename separated from a three character extension by a period for example letter21 doc ncdfloppy truncates any names that exceed those lengths
138. a Local File System 9 21 Using a Local File System on a Diskette If you don t set the use parallel protocol field the following error message appears when you try to use the floppy drive No response from terminal parallel protocol may not be enabled or a previous connection to the parallel port needs to be aborted this can be done from the Console Unable to initialize floppy drive If the error message appears and you need to use the floppy drive immediately 1 Reset the parallel port From the Console select Console gt Abort Parallel Port 2 Inthe Setup menus Change Setup Menus Parallel select the parallel port set the Use Parallel Port Protocol field to true and click Apply The ncdfloppy Commands To start an ncdfloppy interactive session type ncdfloppy Vv At the prompt you can type any of the ncdfloppy commands listed in Table 9 3 You can also supply commands in the ncdfloppy command line see The ncdfloppy Command Line Syntax on page 9 24 Table 9 3 ncdfloppy Commands and Options This command cat filename type filename Performs this function Displays the contents of a file on the screen ed directory chdir directory Moves you to the specified directory on the floppy disk file system del filename delete filename Deletes a file from the floppy disk 9 22 Using a Local File System Using a Local File System
139. ad See the FLEXIm End User Manual for more information about license management software incompatibility Management on WinCenter Hosts on page 3 23 for information about how to get and install the license dat file If you have multiple license server hosts install a license dat file on each host If the license management binaries are running when you put the license file on the license server use the Imreread utility to force the license manager software to read the new license file Imutil lmreread Combining an Existing license dat File with NCD s license dat If you are already running FLEXIm software on your network for managing applications other than NCD s check the already existing license dat file and the file supplied by NCD to see if the files are compatible If each file has the same number of SERVER lines and DAEMON lines and the files contain identical hostid fields in each SERVER line you can combine the two license dat files and run only one Imgrd Note that Imgrd is not required for site licenses To combine the two files use any text editor Read the contents of all compatible files into one file and remove the extra set of SERVER lines If the license management binaries were running when you edited the license file you must use the Imreread utility to force the license manager software to read the edited license file fusr bin X11 nced lmutil lmreread Installing More than One L
140. age 18 9 cshre file interaction with XDM startup files 18 16 replication of content in XDM startup files 5 7 CTERM logging in through 7 4 curly brackets in remote configuration text field 18 27 cut and paste between local clients 18 25 cwd command Local File Manager 9 5 D DECnet name service 8 12 status information 8 12 terminal address how to determine 8 10 Default Hosts Setup menus 12 30 defaultHost resource ncdterm 5 15 Index DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol definition 3 2 during X server downloading 3 2 option tags used by NCD terminals 3 7 priority of request 3 7 see also BOOTP diag buffer size decreasing to save memory 18 36 message buffer size 8 6 Setup menu field for 8 14 diag log file name of the message log file 8 5 Setup menu field for 8 14 Diagnostic daemon access from the Terminal Emulator 8 5 access from the Terminal Host Chooser 5 14 log file 8 5 diagnostics file service messages extended 18 11 font service messages extended 18 11 ICA Client messages extended 12 23 loss carrier errors 18 28 X server messages format 8 4 logging to a file 8 5 types 8 3 diag timestamp frequency Setup menu field for 8 14 time stamp on logged messages 8 6 dialer local client 7 5 Dialer XRemote 16 4 16 6 16 7 16 18 Dialer starting XRemote 16 4 diskette drive see floppy drive display screen resolution how to determine 8 9 resolution how to set A 2 type how to determine 8 9 DNS
141. age 15 13 Specifying Proxy Servers and the Mail Server 15 13 About Proxy Servers 15 14 Specifying the HTTP Proxy Server and Overrides 15 14 Specifying the FTP Proxy Host and Overrides 15 15 Specifying the Gopher Proxy Host and Overrides 15 15 Specifying the SOCKS Server Host and Port 15 16 Specifying the Mail Server 15 16 Setting Browser Variables for Special Environments 15 16 Changing the Size of the Image and Document Caches 15 17 Controlling the Display of Animated GIF Files 15 17 About Browser Fonts 15 18 Setup Menu Equivalents for Browser Configuration Parameters 15 19 Chapter 16 Setting Up XRemote Overview 16 1 XRemote Over a Serial Connection 16 2 XRemote on a LAN 16 3 Simultaneous XRemote and LAN Sessions 16 4 XRemote and a Local Printer 16 4 How XRemote is Used 16 4 Requirements for Using XRemote 16 4 xviii Contents Setting Up the Physical Connection 16 6 Setting Up a Modem Connection 16 6 Modem Requirements 16 6 Cabling and Serial Ports 16 7 Setting Up a Modem Generic Instructions 16 7 Setting Up a US Robotics Modem 16 8 Setting Up a Direct Host Connection 16 9 Setting Up a LAN Connection 16 10 Setting Up the Terminal 16 10 The X Server 16 10 Resetting NVRAM 16 10 Setting Configuration Parameters 16 11 Serial Port Numbers in Parameters 16 11 Configuring the Serial Port 16 12 Configuring PPP and SLIP Characteristics 16 12 Setting Up XRemote Hosts 16 15 Preparing the User s Environment 16 15 Setting the U
142. al representation of the amount of unused terminal memory Below the graph figures are displayed for LY Total installed memory LI Total free unused memory I Size of the largest block of free memory The buttons at the bottom of the window have the following functions 1 The Update button adds to the graph by showing an updated reading of free memory The Restart button restarts the graph with an updated reading of free memory L The cancel button closes the window 8 10 Getting Information About Terminal Operations The Console Statistics Menus Displaying Status of Clients Show X Connections Click on the Show X Connections item to display a popup window that lists all active X clients and the terminal resources the clients are using The information displayed for each client is listed in Table 8 3 Table 8 3 Show X Connections Window Field Information Displayed Name Client s name Host Host on which the client is running Auth Type of authorization used XID Window identification number Windows Windows created by the client Pixmaps Off screen drawing areas used by the client GCs Graphics context information Fonts Number of fonts in use Cursors Cursors created by the client Cells Color cells allocated by the client Colormaps Colormaps allocated by the client Displaying Terminal and Network Statistics Show Statistics See the Reference Manual f
143. al conventions are used in this manual Text in This Format Indicates display text Text displayed on the screen or text ina file for example a field in the Setup menus input text Text to be typed as shown variable Portion of a command line or line in a file where you provide the value for example a terminal s IP address filename The name of a system file directory or pathname emphasized text An especially important word or phrase or explanatory text parameter name The name of a remote configuration parameter true A value assigned to a remote configuration parameter Other conventions used in this manual are 1 When you should press two keys at the same time they are shown as in this example Ctrl Z Press the Control and z keys together 1 You should always press Return after typing a command in a terminal emulator or in the Boot Monitor 1 Movement through menus in the Console is shown as a series of arrows For example Setup Change Setup Parameters Serial means to display the Setup menu select the Change Setup Parameters menu item and open the Serial hide box About this Manual 1 5 Comments on the Manual Comments on the Manual You can send comments suggestions or questions about this manual to the NCD Technical Publications Department by Internet e mail Write to techpubs ncd com 1 6 About this Manual 2 Introduction to Thin Client Devices and NCDware
144. al daemons table Parameter for Printing Configuring the Parallel Daemon The parallel daemons table parameter configures the terminal s parallel daemon In most cases you do not need to change the default settings Figure 10 2 shows the default table for a terminal with one parallel port Using Printers with NCD Terminals 10 3 Using the Command Line Printing Utilities Make sure that the use parallel protocol field is set to false Port TCP LAT LAT number port service service name rating parallel daemons table 1 false 5964 PARALLELD false nil 50 Use parallel NCDnet Enable LAT protocol object name service Figure 10 3 The parallel daemons table Parameter for Printing Using the Command Line Printing Utilities The host based utilities for printing to a printer connected to an NCD terminal do not use the system print spooler and do not queue print jobs You can use these commands over an XRemote Ethernet or Token Ring connection to a UNIX host The printer can be attached to the local terminal or to another NCD terminal See Table 10 1 for list of the commands and the types of printers supported for each command The print utilities run on a UNIX host The NCDware installation program ncdinstall installs the print utilities and other necessary programs into the usr bin X11 ncd directory Table 10 1 Host side Printing Utilities Command Usage ncdlp Use for a simple ASCII pr
145. al emulator if used must all be set to transmit 8 bit words Keystrokes Do Not Appear in the Terminal Emulator Window If keys typed on the keyboard are not displayed in the Serial Terminal Emulator window before you start XRemote 1 Verify that serial interfaces table s current mode field is set to terminal See your terminal s hardware manual 1 Verify your serial cable type it might be the wrong one eae eee 1 In the Dialer client or Serial client try typing a sequence of characters that the modem responds to For example type AT and press Return Ifthe modem does not respond you may need to change your cable configuration or the modem may need to be configured to ignore some modem control signals Ifan error message appears in the message area of the Console every time you press a key you are probably not in terminal mode that is your NCD Terminal Emulator ncdterm window is not Troubleshooting 18 33 Memory Problems connected to the serial port Re establish your connection Memory Problems If the terminal displays popup warning messages about memory or about modules that are not loading you may not have enough memory in the terminal Displaying Memory Statistics Check the Console Statistics Show Memory for information about the amount of memory installed and how much available free memory the terminal has If the Statistics module cannot be loaded you can use the ne
146. als File Service Table All files accessed by the terminal must be available through the terminal s file service table file service table parameter Setup Change Setup Parameters File Service gt File Service Table By default the terminal is configured to try only the first matching directory name You can configure the terminal to try all matches by setting file try all matches on open to true Trying all matches means that the terminal searches all possible matching directories to find the files it needs Setup Change Setup Parameters File Service gt Try All Matches on Open Troubleshooting 18 13 Troubleshooting XDM Login Failures Troubleshooting XDM Login Failures This section provides solutions for XDM problems Check the XDM Log File A good first step is to check the messages in the XDM log file usr lib X11 xdm xdm errors or usr openwin lib xdm xdm errors If the user has a personal xsession file that logs error messages in a personal error file check the personal error file xsession errors as well Problems with the Login Chooser This section discusses the reasons for problems with the Login Chooser If the Host Is Not Listed in the Login Chooser If a login host is not listed in the Login Chooser either XDM is not running on the host or the host is on a different subnet from the terminal Starting XDM To check if XDM is running netstat a grep xdm If XDM is not run
147. ame of a directory If this variable is not set XRemote consults the TMPDIR variable If this variable is not set XRemote creates the log file in usr tmp These variables can be set in the user s shell configuration file such as login or profile On some host systems there is a potential problem with the permissions on the usr tmp directory A user starts XRemote creating the log file Xremote1 for example and quits XRemote Another user starts XRemote and XRemote attempts to create another file named Xremotel1 If the directory permissions are wrong the old file cannot be overwritten and XRemote cannot start To overcome this potential problem either 1 Set the directory permissions to world read world write and world execute or 1 Use the XREMOTETMPDIR or TMPDIR variable to specify a log file in the home directory of each user Setting Up XRemote 16 17 Providing Print Services Providing Print Services You can set up printing from the Dialer either on remote printers attached to other network hosts or a printer attached to the terminal s parallel port Remote printing is through the LPD protocol and the terminal always sends a PostScript data stream Note that local printing may be slow and remote printing uses terminal memory to queue print jobs Commands in the Dialer s File menu allow users to send the contents of the Dialer window or the current session log to a printer connected to the terminal s se
148. ample on an HMX terminal gt copy tftpboot Xnced 5 1 xxx modshmx setup hmx modshmx setup hmx 9 18 Using a Local File System Configuring a PC Card for Booting Tip You can enter the Boot Monitor after the terminal boots by using the appropriate key combination see Table 3 5 on page 3 30 Configuring the Remote Terminals On each remote terminal booting from the PC card use the Boot Monitor to configure network parameters 1 Enter the Boot Monitor To invoke the Boot Monitor while the terminal is booting press the Escape key while address requests are being broadcast to the network when the words TFTP loador NFS load appear After you press the Escape key the Boot Monitor prompt appears Display the Boot Monitor Setup menus by typing the following command gt se Use the right arrow key to highlight Monitor in the menu bar The Boot Monitor and Color Depth menus appear a Use the right arrow key to move to the Color Depth menu and use the down arrow key to select the color depth The available resolutions and refresh rates for the chosen color depth are listed in the Resolution menu b Use the left arrow key to move to the Resolution menu and use the down arrow key to select the resolution and refresh rate The available resolution and color depth settings are listed in Table 9 2 on page 9 15 For more information about color depth see Appendix A Using 16 bit and 24 bit Color Use the r
149. and Line 14 4 Configuring the Properties File 14 4 Using the java Command 14 5 Setting the Class Path 14 8 Setting java Properties 14 8 Setting the Java Home Directory 14 8 Setting the Current Working Directory 14 8 Setting the User s Home Directory 14 9 xvi Contents Java Fonts 14 9 Setting the Time of Day 14 9 Setting Environment Variables 14 9 Providing Print Services 14 10 Setup Menu Equivalents for Java Configuration Parameters 14 11 Chapter 15 Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser Overview 15 1 Requirements 15 2 Selecting the Browser Version 15 3 Starting the Browser 15 3 Setting Up the User s Environment NFS 15 4 Setting the Environment Variables and Mounting Directories 15 6 Environment Variables 15 6 User Files and Directories 15 6 More Than One User on a Terminal 15 7 Mounting a Temporary Directory 15 7 Setting the UID and GID 15 7 User Preference Files 15 7 Setting Up the User s Environment TFTP 15 8 Setting the Environment Variables 15 8 Setting Up Files and Directories 15 9 Providing Print Services 15 10 Making Java Available 15 10 Browser Help Files 15 10 xvii Contents Setting Browser Variables and Controlling Preferences 15 11 Specifying the Size of the Browser Cache 15 11 Specifying Maximum TCP IP Connections 15 12 Enabling or Disabling Automatic Image Loading 15 12 Enabling or Disabling JavaScript 15 12 Enabling or Disabling Applets 15 13 Specifying a Default Home P
150. and X Session Management Specifying the Hosts Offered for Login Specifying the Hosts Offered for Login After a user logs out an NCD terminal that was installed and configured using ncdinstall and does not have a pre existing remote configuration file sends an XDM query requesting a response from the host on which NCDware was installed The host displays a login banner for the user to log in This section describes how to specify the hosts to offer to the user for login Displaying a Login Banner Only There are several ways to display a login banner only without first displaying a Login Chooser Login from a List of Specified Hosts To configure a terminal to request login from a list of specified hosts and display a login banner from the first available host among them See the nedlogin 1 man 1 In the exec startup commands parameter include login h p P 2 ken for Libri as host1 host2 hostn The host variables are the names of the ina aa ata hosts you want offered for login For example exec startup commands login eaglethawk dovetfalcon 2 Log out then log in again The terminal displays a login banner from the first available of the specified hosts Login from One Specific Host To configure a terminal to request login from a specific host and display a login banner from that host Tip 1 In the exec startup commands parameter include login and To confidure theterminal to try the name
151. and is recommended in this release only for preventing colormap flash when using 4 bit or 8 bit color depth For more information about Accessing Windows NT Servers 12 5 Overview and Requirements controlling colormap flash see About the WinCenter Configuration Parameters on page 12 24 Methods of Configuring Connections There are several ways to set up connections to Windows NT servers All of the following methods can be used for both ICA Client and WinCenter connections m m m m Connection through the Windows Access chooser in the Console Utilities Windows Access Automatic connection to a Windows NT server after logging out or restarting the terminal Connection through remote shell commands Connection through Start Local Command in the Console Utilities gt Start Local Command Connection through the NCD Window Manager s default root window Connection through the Login Chooser These connection methods are described in the following sections Note The NCDware wincenter parameters set the defaults for colormap usage color depth window size and audio for all WinCenter connections See About the WinCenter Configuration Parameters on page 12 24 12 6 Accessing Windows NT Servers Configuring Connections in the Windows Access Chooser Configuring Connections in the Windows Access Chooser The simplest way to configure access to Windows NT servers is to add connections to t
152. any of these local clients are discussed in detail in this manual and in other NCDware manuals As noted in the table some console menu items are not local clients Table 7 1 Local Client Menu Choices Commands and Functions Command and Console Name amp Location Function Options Console accessed through console Provides a menu bar for accessing local Setup key or key clients and a hide box for displaying combination diagnostic messages See the ncdconsole 1 man page Console Clear Messages Not a local client Deletes all output from the Messages area Console Rescan Not a local client Recalls messages that were deleted from the Messages Messages area Console Abort Waiting Not a local client Cancels persistent font requests to the NCD Fonts font server Console Abort Ringing Bell Not a local client Stops the bell ringing Console Abort Serial Line 1 Console Abort Serial Line 2 Console Abort Serial Line 3 Console Abort Parallel Port 1 Console Abort Parallel Port 2 Not local clients Cancels a serial or parallel connection Console Reboot Not a local client Reboots the terminal 7 2 Starting and Configuring Local Clients Summary of Local Clients Table 7 1 Local Client Menu Choices Commands and Functions Continued Console Name amp Location Login Login New X Session Command and Options login d display
153. apter This chapter describes local clients and the common procedures for starting them controlling access to them and configuring them Most local clients are implemented as X server modules The instructions in this chapter assume that the X server and its modules have been installed by ncdinstall For information about the location of the X server modules and configuring module load policies see Chapter 3 The topics in this chapter are Descriptions of the local clients and local commands Methods for starting local clients Controlling access to local clients O C O Methods of configuring local clients Summary of Local Clients Local clients also called local commands are X programs that run on the terminal instead of on host computers In most ways local clients are normal X clients for example you can use X resources to customize them By using local clients for such tasks as terminal emulation and window management you can off load some of the processing from network hosts to the terminal Table 7 1 lists the NCD local clients and corresponding Console menu items and summarizes the purpose command syntax for use in remote configuration remote shell commands and startup files and commonly used options for each local client A complete list of command line options and resources for each local client is included in its man page Starting and Configuring Local Clients 7 1 Summary of Local Clients M
154. apter is updated with the new information and the terminal attempts to communicate using the new security ID To change the password back to the default gt ws Enter Y to change password to default or Q to quit Y Security code 30201 Starting wireless LAN to update Security ID Testing updated security ID When you enter a new security ID it is encoded and converted to hexadecimal You cannot display the actual security ID and there is no corresponding remote configuration parameter or Setup menu field Displaying Wireless Information This section describes displaying information about the LAN adapter card and the wireless network from the Boot Monitor the Console and TELNET For information about using SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol to display information see Using SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol on page 13 9 Displaying Wireless Information from the Boot Monitor To use Boot Monitor commands reboot the terminal and interrupt the boot by pressing the Escape key when the following message appears on the screen TFTP NFS load lt ESC gt to abort When the prompt appears gt you can type commands Configuring a Wireless Terminal 13 5 Displaying Wireless Information The following subsections provide directions for displaying wireless information and statistics Information About the LAN Adapter and Access Point The wi command displays the following current wireless network
155. ard A type of Ethernet that uses twisted pair telephone wire NCD Network Interface Modules NIM and Parallel Ethernet PC PEP boards have a twisted pair Ethernet connector NCD Ethernet Serial PC ESP boards allow twisted pair Ethernet through a transceiver IEEE 802 3 10BaseT User Datagram Protocol A protocol that specifies the format for transmitting data using NFS and TFTP A number used by the UNIX operating system to identify a user URL User Preferences daemon visual visual depth VRAM WinCenter window manager X protocol X resource X resource file Uniform Resource Locator A string of characters that precisely identifies an Internet resource s type and location Daemon that runs in the terminal and provides network and local access to a terminal s user preferences data The method used by the X server to display clients for example grayscale or True Color The degree of richness or intensity of color In monitors the number of colors a video adapter can display at one time Also known as color depth Video RAM Specially designed dynamic random access memory chips that maximize the performance of video adapters NCD s software enabling Windows NT servers to be shared by multiple users simultaneously running applications on NCD terminals PCs or workstations A host based or local client for manipulating windows on the display The communication protocol used in X fo
156. ariables for Java local clients through NCD s user preferences facility Using remote configuration files or TELNET use the pref environment parameter For Java you can set the USER and HOME variables for the java command This provides an alternative to using the NCD Display Manager or java command line options Configuring and Using Java 14 9 Providing Print Services The pref environment parameter is a table with rows consisting of an environment variable name followed by its value for example pref environment USER ralph HOME u ralph Providing Print Services The Java Virtual Machine JVM 1 1 4 supports printing to a serial parallel or remote printer or to a Postscript file from trusted Java applets using standard Java classes All printing through the JVM generates Postscript output only and the Java application determines the page layout The JVM can print to a printer attached to the local terminal a printer on a remote terminal or a printer attached to another network host When you select Print from the Applet Viewer s Applet menu a Print dialog box appears Figure 14 1 For information on setting up Applet Viewer printing see Chapter 10 For information on using the Print Dialog see the NCDware User s Guide Prine MOtheare jii Mirig Cophess Print tee Printer PARALLELI File Banmer Fage Title COs bea Priadag Print Command Opalona riman Forrai Landicepe
157. artup files such as XDM Xsession and xsession files Local Local Telnet f exec rsh SNCDNAME term To start local clients use remote shell commands rsh or remsh as functions in launcher configuration entries When you use remote shell commands to start local clients a daemon in the terminal responds to the remote shell request and starts the local client Remote shell command syntax is rsh hostname command options where hostname Is the terminal where the local client is to run command Is the local client command options Are the command options listed in Table 7 1 and in the man pages For example the following command starts the Terminal Host Chooser on a terminal with the hostname ncdu10 rsh ncdul0 term When you include a remote shell command in a launcher configuration file as a function enclose the entire command and its options in single or double quotes The following entries in a launcher configuration file create a root menu item for starting an NCD Terminal Emulator via TELNET Telnet rsh SNCDNAME term telnet amp ctyp Entries in mwm launcher configuration files for starting local clients include the mwm function name for example ctype telnet amp Adding Host Based Clients to a Root Menu xterm 1 A standard host based terminal emulator client kestrel To start host based clients from a window manager menu you must define the display on which you
158. ately No 4 30 Terminal Configuration Methods 5 Login and X Session Management This chapter describes how to manage login and logout configure the user s session use the NCD Display Manager Tip Procedures in this chapter provide directions for configuring terminals through remote configuration files For system administrators who use the Console for terminal configuration information about Setup menu fields is provided at the end of the chapter The topics covered in this chapter are m m A description of XDM X Display Manager Configuring XDM including specifying the hosts offered for login and configuring the NCD Login Chooser The instructions in this chapter assume that XDM software is installed and enabled on the host Setting up the user s X session environment Configuring access to the terminal by clients and users Using the NCD Display Manager ncddm to set the user s environment variables Configuring login through the NCD Terminal Emulator Configuring login to Microsoft Windows NT hosts This is introductory material this topic is covered more fully in Chapter 12 XDM s Purpose and Functions XDM is host and terminal resident software for managing login logout and client startup XDM software consists of the xdm program on the host and an implementation of XDMCP X Display Management Control Protocol in the terminal You can configure XDM to start clients automatically a
159. atus line and in the Console window only set the following preference NCD NCDM gif_show_animate_error FALSE Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser 15 17 About Browser Fonts About Browser Fonts Fonts required by the browser are included in the NCDware distribution These fonts are placed by ncdinstall in the usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcef java directory and the font directory must be included in the font path or on font servers of terminals that run the browser When you use ncdinstall to add a terminal to the network the usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf java directory is included in the terminal s default font path The default font path of terminals installed by ncdinstall is xserver default font path ilt S I sr 1l sr l sr l sr l Sr a bu u u u u u u Lae 15 18 Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser sr l ins ib X11 ib X11 ib X11 ib X11 ib X11 ib X11 ib X11 Ss FSS Poa ea ae SS PSs ncd f ncd f ncd f ncd f ncd f ncd f ncd f nts pc nts pc nts pc nts pe nts pc nts pc nts pc f misc f 75dpi 100dpi F dw75dpi F dwl00dpi f java f Xol Setup Menu Equivalents for Browser Configuration Parameters Setup Menu Equivalents for Browser Configuration Parameters Table 15 3 lists the remote configuration parameters discussed in this chapter and the corresp
160. ault value Terminal Configuration Methods 4 25 About Configuration Parameters The keyword default is accepted by all parameters and sets the parameter to its default value in TELNET sessions and remote configuration files Always type parameter names in lowercase Some parameter values are not case sensitive that is true can be written True or TRUE String values such as filenames and hostnames are case sensitive Setting Parameters in Tables In TELNET sessions and remote configuration files curly braces are required as delimiters for the entire table and for each row within a table Working with Tables in TELNET Sessions When working with tables in TELNET sessions you use the row number to specify the row you want to delete change or add Adding Rows Assume that you have set up the following table which automatically runs the listed commands each time the user logs in exec startup commands wm term login eagle To add row 4 use a simple assignment statement such as gt exec startup commands 4 lat The resulting table is exec startup commands wm term login eagle ft Lat 4 26 Terminal Configuration Methods About Configuration Parameters See the Remote Configuration Parameter Quick Reference for the names of the fields in table rows To add a row to the end of the table use the index number 1 For exampl
161. ava applications can cause stack overflows that panic the terminal To avoid this problem you can increase the Java code stack size C code stack size and memory allocation pool The recommended strategy is to double the default sizes until the Java application runs successfully For information about the command options to use and the default sizes see Using the java Command on page 14 5 The default sizes allow most Java applications to run Here is an example rsh ncdux java oss64k ss64k mxl2m Test class NCD Mosaic Browser This section provides solutions for browser problems Navigating in the NCD Mosaic Browser Using the Home and End keys to move to the start and end of a document may not work as expected If the keyboard focus is on a Web page Home and End may work If they do not work Shift Home and Shift End may work instead If the Troubleshooting 18 25 Local Printing Problems keyboard focus is in a text entry field or on any other portion of the browser the Home and End keys do not work at all Displaying Text and Graphics The Common Desktop Environment CDE sets a resource so that the text displays white In the NCD Mosaic Browser certain pages such as the start page and help pages have a white background As a result the text on these pages does not display To avoid this problem set your screen background to any color other than white using Setup Change User Preferences Screen Background gt
162. available fonts A database required in every font directory so that the terminal can locate the fonts it contains A file in a font directory that correlates outline fonts with their XLFD name used with the Display PostScript extension A computer that attaches to two or more networks and routes packets from one to the other Graphics Interchange Format A graphics file widely used to encode and exchange graphics files on the Internet A password that provides read write access to the Configuration User Preferences Local File Manager and SNMP daemons Used instead of individual passwords to save space in NVRAM s optional string space An individual device on a network such as an NCD terminal or a computer A string used to uniquely identify a device on a network Part of the domain name Independent Computing Architecture A protocol that allows communication between a WinFrame or MetaFrame server and an ICA client Internet Control Message Protocol A broadcast protocol that handles error and control messages An integral part of the Internet Protocol IP Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Glossary 5 Glossary 6 IGMP TEN 116 initial file server Internet IP IP address Java keycap keymap keysym Internet Group Management Protocol A broadcast protocol that handles multicasting across multiple networks An integral part of the Internet Protocol IP An IEN Inter
163. ave a non compressed X server on the PC card Compressed servers are named with a bl extension 6 gt mkdir modshmx file export directory list tftpboot local usr lib X11 ncd local If the defaults are not accurate for your configuration set the parameter to the actual location in local On the PC card use the Local File Manager to create a Nocal configs directory and place configuration files for the remote terminal s in it Create configuration files for the remote terminals and use the Local File Manager to copy them to the ocal configs directory The configuration files for remote terminals need only contain an entry specifying the font path such as xserver default font path built ins tftpboot fonts You can use a standard configuration file for all the terminals named ncd_std or individual files named for each terminal s IP address For information about creating and naming remote configuration files see Chapter 4 Copy a non compressed X server to the local directory on the PC card For example for booting HMX terminals you must place an X server named Xncdhmx on the PC card Both the remote terminal and the terminal equipped with the PC card can load and execute the Xncdhmx server Create a directory named modsmodel where model specifies the terminal model hmx xpt or xpl on the PC card and copy each desired X server module into it For ex
164. ay the current configuration of the terminal and permit you to make immediate configuration changes There are three Setup menus LI Change Quick Setup provides a small set of the most essential configuration parameters 1 Change Setup Parameters provides all of the configuration parameters 4 2 Terminal Configuration Methods Terminal Configuration Overview NVRAM Non volatile RAM in the terminal s base which contains the parameters used for booting NVRAM contents are initially set at the factory NVRAM settings are retained when the terminal is rebooted or powered off 1 Change User Preferences customizes the work environment of the terminal user Setup menus are useful for making immediate changes to the terminal s current configuration or experimenting with parameter changes You can make the changes permanent by writing them to a remote configuration file and some parameters can be saved in NVRAM You can use Setup menus to configure the terminal you are using or another terminal on the network A possible drawback of the Setup menus is that users can make configuration changes although you can control access to configuration data TELNET Interactive Configuration TELNET A general purpose network utility program for communicating with another host terminal or computer on the network You can use TELNET to configure a terminal through an NCD terminal emulation window Like the Setup me
165. ble Select File gt Read Translations to import functions from an open window Reassigning Keyboard Functions Using the Keymap Editor 11 3 Keymap Editor Window and Menus Although the keyboard layout shows only the US English version of a keyboard every key press on the keyboard appears in the layout allowing you to map actions to the correct keys no matter which keyboard version you are using Keycap Sections Each keycap in the layout has three sections m Menu Bar Options For all keys except the alphabetic keys the top section shows what happens when you press the key along with the Shift key The middle section shows what happens when you press the key alone The bottom section shows what happens when you press the key along with the Control key E Key plus Shift Key Shift 3 Key alone 3 Key plus Control Key Control 3 Figure 11 2 Key Layout Sections The Keymap Editor menu bar has five options m m The File menu includes options for reading and writing translations and for exiting from the Keymap Editor The Edit menu includes options for basic editing functions such as cut copy and paste The View menu offers options for displaying only the keycaps only the translations or both keycaps and translations From the View menu you can also switch back and forth between basic and advanced modes The Keyboards menu displays the layouts of all NCD keyboards supported by the Keymap Edito
166. but is attempting to continue F A fatal error The module did not complete its activities and cannot continue ABBREV Is the abbreviated message for example READ for an operation that involved reading a file For example SFILE I READ reading font file fonts alias See Chapter 18 for information on You should take steps to resolve messages with severity levels contacting Technical Support E and F Contact NCD Technical Support if you need assistance Viewing Messages in the Console Window You can see current messages by opening the Messages hide box 1 Inthe Console click on Messages 2 To see more messages scroll through messages in the window or enlarge the window 8 4 Getting Information About Terminal Operations Console Messages Console Clear Messages clears messages from the message area Console Rescan Messages redisplays messages that were cleared previously Viewing Messages through TELNET You can see current messages on the local terminal or a remote terminal by connecting directly to the diagnostic module through a TELNET connection 1 2 Tip 3 While you are connected ask the terminal user to perform the action causing the problem You can read the messages as they are issued 4 In the Console select Terminals New Terminal For the local terminal select Diag from the Default Hosts list Fora remote terminal enter the hostname or IP address of the NCD terminal to
167. bytes and can range from 32 KB to 512 KB The default stack size is 32 KB ss32k The oss option sets the maximum stack size used by the JVM to interpret bytecodes The default stack size is 400 KB You can modify the meaning of cstacksize and javastacksize by appending either the letter k for kilobytes or the letter m for megabytes v or verbose Causes java to print a message to the diagnostic log each time a class file is loaded verify Runs the verifier on all code verifyremote Runs the verifier on all code loaded into the system via a classloader that is loaded from the network verifyremote is the default for the interpreter verbosegc Causes the garbage collector to print out messages whenever it frees memory The verifier provides the first level of Java security by checking Java bytecode before it is run and making sure the bytecode obeys the basic rules of the Java language Garbage collection is a technique used by Java to automatically detect objects that are no longer being used and to free the memory used by such objects Configuring and Using Java 14 7 Using Java Commands Setting the Class Path Tip In NCD s implementation if a zip file is not found in the directories in the classpath java tries to find class files in the same directories See Chapter 3 for information about the file service table You must specify the location of all
168. cast wait time parameter to specify the number of seconds the terminal waits for hosts to respond to a query before it begins to display hostnames in the Login Chooser The default is 3 seconds 1 In the exec startup commands parameter include login For example exec startup commands login Set the login xdm broadcasts parameter login xdm broadcasts prompt After the user logs out the terminal displays a Login Chooser listing all the hosts that answered the terminals broadcast Windows NT Hosts in the Login Chooser If Windows NT hosts or published applications are added to the Windows Access chooser Console gt Utilities Windows Access those connections also appear automatically in the Login Chooser For more information about Windows NT connections see Chapter 12 Login and X Session Management 5 5 Using XDM to Customize the User Environment Using XDM to Customize the User Environment XDM uses two types of startup files for configuring user environments The Xsession file provides a system wide environment and the xsession file provides an individual user environment that differs from the standard environment Configuring a System Wide Environment The system Xsession file is a startup script used for configuring a standard environment Typically an Xsession file performs the following functions 1 Executes xrdb 1 to load the resource database I Starts initial clients including a wind
169. cation Window 2 Click on OK Applying a Keymap to All Open Windows Tip To apply the current keymap to all open 3270 or VT320 windows Windows that you open after complete the following steps from the Write Translations window applying the keymap do not inherit the new keymap 1 Select All Application Windows of Class For 3270 windows type ned3270 in the Class field For VT320 windows type nedterm in the Class field 2 Click on OK Importing a Keymap from a File or Window You can use the Read Translations window to import keymaps from another file or window This function is available in both basic and advanced modes To import a keymap 1 Start the Keymap Editor using a method described in Starting the Keymap Editor on page 11 2 2 Select File Read Translations The window shown in Figure 11 4 appears 3 Starting from the Read Translations window follow the instructions in Table 11 2 to import a keymap from a variety of sources 11 8 Reassigning Keyboard Functions Using the Keymap Editor Importing a Keymap from a File or Window Figure 11 4 Keymap Editor Read Translations Window Table 11 2 Sources for Importing Keymaps To import a Follow these steps Keymap file created by Select Translation file the Keymap Editor Type the full pathname of the keymap file in the File field Click on OK Keymap from a Version 1 2 Brixton keymap file Keymap from a
170. center parameters affect some attributes For information on the host based wincenter command see the WinCenter documentation For information on wincenter parameters see About the WinCenter Configuration Parameters on page 12 24 1 wincenter Host based command for starting a WinCenter connection For information on the host based wincenter command see the WinCenter documentation 1 login Local client that you can use to start automatic WinCenter connections Resets the X server when the user 12 16 Accessing Windows NT Servers Other Methods of Starting Windows NT Connections ends the connection After the terminal boots or the user logs out anew WinCenter session starts on the specified host See the ncdlogin 1 man page for information about command options Starting a Session Automatically You can configure a connection that starts an ICA or WinCenter connection after the user logs off or restarts reboots the terminal Configuring an Automatic ICA Connection Tip If c ica is included in a login command line all other login command options are ignored exec startup commands To configure NCDware so an ICA session starts automatically put a login c ica command in the exec startup commands table The syntax of the command line is login c ica icaclnt command options When configuring an automatic connection you can use any of the arguments listed in Table 12 3 For example
171. cess Key Combinations Keyboard Type Key Combination 101 key or 102 key Windows 95 compatible US English IBM PS 2 Caps Lock Left Alt Setup Ctrl Left Alt Setup VT220 compatible Ctrl Compose F3 108 key Ctrl Left Alt F3 97 key Left Alt Caps Lock Setup 107 key Sun Type 4 compatible Stop A L1 A 122 key 3270 compatible Lexmark Alt Rule Home 123 key Sun Type 5 compatible Stop A L1 A Troubleshooting 18 21 Keyboard and Keymap Problems Tip NCD keyboards are identified by a label on the bottom of the keyboard Also check the terminal s remote configuration file and make sure the keyboard is not set incorrectly in that file NCD recommends that you do not set the keyboard type in the remote configuration file unless you are using a foreign language version or with a Boot Monitor version prior to 2 8 0 the PS 2 version of the 101 key keyboard This is because the terminal correctly identifies the keyboard when the terminal is powered on Shift Keys Not Working Properly Check to see if the pref compatibility decwindows keyboards parameter is turned on by mistake Setup Change User Preferences gt Compatibility Be Compatible with Old DECwindows Keyboards Control and Caps Lock Keys Swapped on 101 Key Keyboard Make sure some other keyboard type is not selected in the xserver keyboard type parameter Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Input Devices gt
172. cessary change it If you change the location of X server modules on the boot host include a line similar to the following example in a remote configuration file to set the modules directory parameter to the new location tftpboot ncd release modsmodel modules directory usr vendor ncd modshmx The new directory is included automatically in the file service table Licensed Features and Types of Licenses Licenses are required for OpenGL the CompCore video fast MPEG decoder Starlight Networks StarWorks software support NCDnet 3270 Terminal Emulator DPS Display PostScript XIE X Imaging Extension the local Motif Window Manager the NCD Mosaic Browser Java and XRemote There are three types of licenses Floating A 20 character license string authorizes a fixed license number of terminals on a network to use the feature at the same time the authorization is provided for a specific Microsoft Windows NT or UNIX host Site A 20 character license string authorizes license unlimited use of the feature at your site the authorization is provided for a specific Windows NT or UNIX host Node A 12 or 16 character license string authorizes a license terminal to use the feature the terminal is identified by its Ethernet address When you add terminals using ncdinstall node licenses also called node locked licenses are installed 3 16 Preparing Terminals for Booting Optional Preparations Before Booting
173. ction by remote devices such as an NCD terminal Load Balancing About Color Depth _ You must have WinFrame or MetaFrame installed and configured on the Windows NT servers J Servers must have ICA WinStations installed For information about WinStations see the Citrix documentation Both connection methods ICA and WinCenter can take advantage of load balancing on Windows NT servers Load balancing is the ability to distribute requests from clients among a specified set of servers With load balancing login requests and application requests can be directed to the server that is least busy For ICA load balancing the following are required 1 A master browser on the network OM A load balancing option pack installed on each server that is participating in load balancing You configure load balancing through the configuration tools in WinCenter 3 1 or later WinFrame 1 7 or MetaFrame See the documents supplied with those products for more information Appendix A explains how to set color depth and monitor resolution in the Boot Monitor and how to set color depth in NCDware Color depth and monitor resolution for Windows NT server displays on the terminal can be set in the Windows Access chooser and in command lines creating connections to servers Color depth and monitor resolution for WinCenter displays on the terminal can also be set through the NCDware wincenter configuration parameters This is an older method
174. d 3 30 bt command 3 30 configuring essential booting parameters 18 2 to 18 3 defined 2 3 ds command 13 6 keyboard compatibility 18 24 messages 18 6 to 18 9 nv command 9 14 prioritizing DHCP BOOTP and RARP requests 3 7 Setup menus 9 14 18 2 to 18 3 Index 1 Index Boot Monitor continued un command 18 42 18 43 up command 18 42 18 43 updating Explora 400 450 and 700 C 1 uploading X server 18 42 18 43 version how to determine 8 9 wd command 13 3 wicommand 13 6 wireless commands 13 2 to 13 5 wr command 13 4 ws command 13 5 boot desired source 3 29 booting booting from the wrong host 18 9 defined 3 2 Explora 400 450 terminals 18 9 failure messages 18 6 to 18 9 from a PC card boot source order 3 29 booting manually 3 30 locally 9 10 to 9 17 remote terminals 9 17 improving reliability 3 5 to 3 7 manual booting 3 29 to 3 31 modifying 3 2 problems locating X server modules 3 16 quick boot from factory default NVRAM 18 1 to 18 2 rebooting 3 29 secondary and tertiary retrieval methods 3 5 specifying additional boot hosts 3 5 troubleshooting 18 1 to 18 13 booting continued via another terminal s PC card remote terminal 9 17 to 9 20 via NFS 3 5 18 10 via TFTP 3 5 18 10 see also X server Index 2 BOOTP automatic IP address allocation 3 8 backup boot hosts 3 6 configuring wireless access points 13 8 defined 3 2 option tags used by NCD terminals 3 7 to 3 8 specifying configuration file pathname 3 8 T1
175. d DECnet to start clients must have two entries in the table To restrict all access to local clients enable access control with the exec access control list parameter but make the access control list empty 7 16 Starting and Configuring Local Clients Configuring Local Clients Restricting User Access to Local Clients The exec user access control parameter prevents the use of a remote shell command to start local clients by anyone but the logged in user This restriction is effective only if the user logs in through XDM and you run the NCD Display Manager ncddm on the login host enable the terminal for ncddm and set the exec user access control parameter to true See Chapter 5 for more information about ncddm Configuring Local Clients X resource You can configure many aspects of the appearance and In hex Ninos Seon a aes behavior of local clients through X resources and command used to set a value aetining tne Oi is behavior GPaBHEATanGO OF a ciieht line options Table 7 1 on page 7 2 lists many of the command line options available for configuring local clients The local client man pages list all resources and command line options Setting Resources for Local Clients This section describes the two methods of setting resources for local clients Setting resources in remote configuration files only if you are not using a session manager such as XDM 1 Setting resources in Xdefaults files or ot
176. d Roam Configurations are 0 Slow Few Masters 1 Normal 2 Fast Many Overlapping Masters Current Roam Configuration 0 In the Console you can display the current roaming setting in Change Setup Parameters Network Interfaces gt Roaming Condition To display the current roaming condition using TELNET view the net roaming condition parameter Changing the Security ID Tip The LAN adapter must be installed in the terminal before you can set the security ID The security ID and domain determine with which Access Point s the terminal can communicate All hosts that communicate with each other over the wireless network must have the same security ID All LAN adapters and Access Points have the same default security ID This allows you to use wireless terminals without configuring the domain security ID or roaming parameters Setting a security ID improves the security of the wireless subnetwork The ID is encrypted and cannot be read although you can change it 13 4 Configuring a Wireless Terminal Displaying Wireless Information To change the security ID type the ws command followed by an ID number of up to 20 characters For example gt ws 12345 If the ID number begins with a blank precede the blank with a left bracket character The ID must match the IDs of the Access Point s and any other wireless hosts with which the terminal communicates After you press Return the terminal s LAN ad
177. d are chosen from the Windows standard 20 colors visual to static color A wincenter colors setting of all clients overrides the xserver default visual parameter and sets the Accessing Windows NT Servers 12 25 About the WinCenter Configuration Parameters Specifying Window Size Colors and Audio This section describes how to set the following LJ Maximum window size 1 Number of colors m WinCenter audio enabled or disabled The window size and number of colors you set here become the defaults for all WinCenter sessions and this is how you can set these parameters from the terminal for WinCenter sessions started with the login command or from XDM broadcasts To retain these values after the terminal reboots set them in a remote configuration file The parameters to use are wincenter resolution wincenter numcolors and wincenter audio Table 12 5 lists the values you can assign to these parameters the default is in bold font Reducing the number of colors to 16 helps reduce colormap flashing Table 12 5 Values for wincenter resolution wincenter numcolors and wincenter audio Parameter Description Values Result wincenter resolution Maximum size of the full screen The WinCenter window WinCenter window default covers the display area when 640x480 invoked via XDM and is 800x600 smaller than full screen when 1024x768 invoked via a remote shell 1152x900 command 1280x1024 1600x1200 wincenter numcolors
178. d compare files 1 Display information about the local file system and the current directory Configuring the Terminal for Local File Manager Use Before using the Local File Manager to access a floppy drive the file enable floppy filesystem parameter must be set to true in the terminal s remote configuration file The default setting is false Starting the Local File Manager The Local File Manager on the terminal at which you re working the local terminal can be used with or without requiring a password A password is required when connecting to a remote terminal s Local File Manager see Specifying a Password on page 9 7 After you start the Local File Manager you can use the commands listed in Table 9 1 Press Return after each command To use the Local File Manager 1 From the Console select Terminals New Terminal to start a Terminal Host Chooser Toaccess files on the local terminal select File from the Default Hosts list Toaccess files on a remote terminal type the hostname or IP address of the terminal followed by the port number in the Service field of the Using a Local File System 9 3 Managing Files in a Local File System Terminal Host Chooser The default port number is 5996 2 Click on OK or press Return If a password is required the Local File Manager password prompt appears Trying 192 43 116 50 Connected to ncdu7 Escape character is NCD X Terminal
179. d keysym information By comparing the keycode values displayed by xev 1 with the values for the keyboard you can determine whether a key was reassigned Compatibility with the Boot Monitor Verify that the Boot Monitor PROMs installed in your terminal support the keyboard you are using For information about Boot Monitor versions and which keyboards they support see the Boot Monitor Release Notes Window Manager Problems 18 24 Troubleshooting If the local Motif Window Manager is slow to start configure the module load policy table modules load policy parameter or Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Loadable Modules to load this module at boot time When it initially sizes the window the NCD Window Manager ignores the WM_NORMAL_HINTS maximum size property Cut and Paste Between Local Clients Cut and Paste Between Local Clients In NCD local clients the default selection area is PRIMARY but in OpenWindows the selection area is CLIPBOARD You must change PRIMARY to CLIPBOARD before attempting to cut and paste using a resource similar to the following stringSelections CLIPBOARD After this change all local clients use CLIPBOARD instead of PRIMARY for all text selections Key translations that specify multiple cut and paste selections or multiple cut buffers such as translations for transferring data between local clients and OpenWindows clients are not supported in local clients Java Stack Overflows J
180. d running embeddable Java applets and standalone Java applications The major topics in this chapter are m DCO DO O O An overview of the components of NCD s JVM implementation Java files and directories Using Java commands Java fonts Setting the time of day for Java applications Setting environment variables for Java commands Printing from Java applications Overview and Requirements JVM requires a license for each terminal Contact your sales representative if you need to purchase licenses applet A small Java application that can be embedded in another application such as an applet viewer or Web browser The user programs included with the JVM are m m The java program which allows users to run complete Java applications The appletviewer program which is a Java application that allows users to run applets in an applet viewer window Although appletviewer allows you to run applets embedded in an HTML page it does not display any of the surrounding HTML data The appletviewer program provides print capability Configuring and Using Java 14 1 Java Files and Directories You can start java and appletviewer from the Console s Utilities menu Users can run applets and Java applications that reside on the local network or the World Wide Web The only locale supported by NCD s JVM is the C locale which sets the minimal environment for C language translation A locale is a database tha
181. documentation file modsmodel doc policy Is the load policy on demand at boot or disable The following example sets the local Motif Window Manager module to load at boot and disables the Change Setup Parameters menu and touch screen module modules load policy mwm at boot touchscreen disable setup disable Putting Modules in a Non Standard Location ncdinstall puts modules in the tftpboot ncd release modsmodel directory where release is the NCDware version number such as Xncd 5 1 xxx and model is the terminal model on which the modules run such as modshmx for the HMX family of terminals On systems running secure TFTP ncdinstall puts modules in the secure_dir tftpboot ncd release modsmodel directory where secure_dir is the TFTP secure directory Preparing Terminals for Booting 3 15 Optional Preparations Before Booting Tip When the terminal boots it first looks for modules in the If a terminal cannot find modules directory specified in the modules directory parameter The X during booting error messages display To find outwheretheXserver Serversets the value of modules directory based on the location is looking for server modules check of the X server boot image If the modules are not found in the the Change Quick Setup local client directory specified in modules directory the terminal looks in for the current value of Files gt Loadable Modules Directory and if ne
182. dow Manager command name mwm This client requires a license See the mwm 1 and nedrunwm 1 man pages Utilities Refresh Screen Not a local client Redraws the screen Utilities Blank Screen Not a local client Starts the screen saver Starting and Configuring Local Clients 7 5 Summary of Local Clients Table 7 1 Local Client Menu Choices Commands and Functions Continued Console Name amp Location Utilities Lock Screen Command and Options lock Function Locks the screen after prompting for a password Keeps anyone without the password from using the terminal See the ncdlockscreen 1 man page Utilities Rescan Font Path Not a local client Rescans the font path Utilities Free DPS Not a local client Releases terminal memory used by Display Mosaic Browser Memory PostScript applications Utilities gt Test Network test net Runs the network test See the ncdtestnet 1 man page Utilities gt Start Local startcmd Displays a window for the user to enter a Command command line for a local client or local command Utilities gt Start NCD browser Starts the NCD Mosaic Browser See the nmosaic 1 man page Utilities gt Start Java Applet startjava or appletviewer URL Displays a window for the user to type an URL for a Java applet or starts an applet See the appletviewer 1 man page Utilities Video Player vp options
183. down list ICA and WinCenter Specifying the Keymap Both ICA and WinCenter connections support a number of international and non standard keyboards by default Specifying the Keymap for ICA Connections The ICA Client reads the keyboard type set in the X server and loads the appropriate keymap when the session starts The default keyboards supported for ICA connections and the default keyboard map for each keyboard are specified in the NCDKbd txt database file Figure 12 3 shows the default file Both NCDKbd txt and the keymap files supplied for the ICA Client reside in the boot directory usually tftpboot Xnced 5 1 xxx in a subdirectory called icakbds You can edit the NCDKbd txt file to add a keyboard keymap pair or substitute a different keymap file for any of the listed keyboards The keyboard must be one of the supported keyboards that is the keyboards listed in Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Input Devices Keyboard Type or in the Boot Monitor Setup menus 12 20 Accessing Windows NT Servers Specifying the Keymap Changes to the NCDKbd txt file take effect after you start the ICA Client Belgian CH SAB lgfr kbd Belgian French lgfr kbd Danish dansk kbd French frenchx kbd German germanx kbd IBM PS 2 us kbd Italian italianx kbd N 97 us kbd N 101 us kbd N 123 North American usx kbd N 108 US decl108 kbd Norwegian norsk kbd Spanish spanishx kbd Spanish Latin America spanishx kbd Swedish Finnish sven
184. dquery utility instead nedquery a hostname where hostname is the name of the terminal Popup Warning Messages backing store The X server displays up to three popup warnings when abit sito for saving applications consume too much of a terminal s memory sic ane cc depending upon the severity of the problem This message is displayed only if backing store is enabled Low On Memory Backing store has been discarded You may free memory by terminating a client to avoid one being terminated automatically in the future This message is displayed whether or not backing store is enabled Low On Memory Further attempts to open new windows may result in the termination of some existing window If the second message has been displayed and clients continue to consume more memory the terminal displays a third message Low On Memory The newest client will be terminated 18 34 Troubleshooting Memory Problems Failure to Open Display Console Messages Console messages may indicate failure to open the display because of a possible memory problem If the terminal is generating such messages but has an adequate amount of free memory you should specify pre allocated network buffers normally these buffers are allocated automatically as needed To specify the number of buffers use the net minimum data buffers parameter You can specify up to 16 384 buffers Memory Saving Suggestions Font Usage See Chapter 6 for in
185. ds is an empty single or double quotes Clients start in the order in which you t919 No local amp onts start list them in exec startup commands automatically at boot time For example the following parameter assignment starts the local NCD Window Manager first then the Terminal Host Chooser and finally the Login Chooser exec startup commands wm term rv login 7 10 Starting and Configuring Local Clients Starting Local Clients Adding Clients to a Window Manager s Root Menu root menu Menu displayed by placing the pointer on the root window and clicking a mouse button You can customize a window manager s root menus so that users can start clients by selecting a menu item Configuring a Window Manager s Menus Tip The local NCD window managers default root menus list many of the NCD local clients and a selection for quitting the local window manager Mouse buttons not bound to a menu in the launcher configuration file display the default menu when the pointer is on the root window The host based nedrunwm launcher utility starts either the local NCD Window Manager or the local Motif Window Manager The launcher reads its configuration file and sends the information to the local window manager When the local window manager starts it displays the user s root menus as specified in the launcher s configuration file To customize root menus 1 Set up a launcher
186. e gt exec startup commands 1 nedclock Changing Values within a Row To change values in a row use the row number and a simple assignment statement For example assume that you have the following table which specifies the attributes of the terminal s serial ports serial interfaces table 1 terminal terminal 2400 8 1 none none none 2 terminal terminal 9600 8 1 none none none To reset the baud rate only use the parameter name for baud rate and a simple assignment statement without curly braces gt serial interfaces table 1 baud rate 9600 Deleting Rows To clear all parameters from a row use the row number and one set of empty curly braces For example gt exec startup commands 2 To clear all parameters from a table use nested sets of empty curly braces For example gt exec startup commands Working with Tables in Remote Configuration Files For many tables you can simply edit the table itself in the remote configuration file with a text editor Some tables however have rows that are added automatically by the X server for example the file service table For these tables you should add each new row to the end of the table using the index number 1 as described in Adding Rows on page 4 26 Terminal Configuration Methods 4 27 Controlling Access to Terminal Configuration Data Controlling Access to Terminal Configuration Data Depending upo
187. e Escape key the Boot Monitor prompt appears Reset the terminal s NVRAM to its default values by typing the following commands gt nv NVRAM Utility C adr change location adr D start end display contents load defaults X server Q return to monitor load MWT defaults R reload NVRAM values S save new values gt gt 1 Load defaults gt gt s Save configuration values Are you sure y gt gt q Quit the NVRAM utility Display the Boot Monitor Setup menus by typing the following command gt se Use the right arrow key to highlight Monitor in the menu bar The Boot Monitor and Color Depth menus appear a Use the right arrow key to move to the Color Depth menu and use the down arrow key to select the color depth The available resolutions and refresh rates for the chosen color depth are listed in the Resolution menu b Use the left arrow key to move to the Resolution menu and use the down arrow key to select the resolution and refresh rate Configuring a PC Card for Booting The available resolution and color depth settings are listed in Table 9 2 For more information about color depth see Appendix A Using 16 bit and 24 bit Color Table 9 2 Monitor Resolution and Color Depth Selection Resolution pixels Color Depth bits per pixel Automatic Detection DDC This selection appears if a DDC
188. e User Preferences pref d display h host p password Displays the User Preferences window for making immediate and temporary changes in the configuration parameters governing user preferences The d option specifies the X server to use by default hostname 0 0 the h option specifies the host to try to connect to the p option specifies a password required for connecting to a remote terminal using the h option See the ncdpref 1 man page Statistics Show Version show version Displays version numbers and other information about the current state of the terminal See the ncdshow 1 man page Statistics Show Memory show memory Displays information about free and installed memory in the terminal See the ncdshow 1 man page Starting and Configuring Local Clients 7 7 Summary of Local Clients Table 7 1 Local Client Menu Choices Commands and Functions Continued Statistics gt Show X Connections Console Name amp Location Command and Options show connections Function Displays information about all the current X clients connected to the terminal See the ncdshow 1 man page Statistics Show Statistics stats d display h host p password Displays statistics pertaining to the terminal The d option specifies the X server to use by default hostname 0 0 the h option specifies the host to try to connect to the p op
189. e browser with 128 bit encryption 1 nmosaice for the browser with 40 bit encryption Starting the Browser Users can start the Browser from the Console s Utilities menu The basic command for starting the browser from a command line is rsh terminal browser where terminal is the terminal s hostname To specify a URL when you start the browser use the following command This command opens a new browser window displaying the specified URL rsh terminal browser w URL Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser 15 3 Setting Up the User s Environment NFS The browser command starts the browser version specified in the browser module parameter as described in Selecting the Browser Version on page 15 3 To start the browser more quickly at boot time specify the following modules to load at boot modules load policy Libx2 at boot libxt at boot lLibxmu at boot libxm at boot libxaw at boot libmos at boot desktop at boot lLoadb at boot browser at boot nmosaic at boot Setting Up the User s Environment NFS Tip If you are not using nedinstall and nedadm see the nmosaic man page for information about how to set up the environment manually This section describes setting up the user environment if you are using NFS as the terminal s file access method Most of these tasks are done automatically by ncdinstall and the NCD Display Ma
190. e ncdprint Printing Utility See the nedprint 1 man page for The hostside ncdprint utility is for printing on a printer additionalintormation on nedprint connected to an NCD terminal s serial or parallel port It does not use the system print spooler queue printing jobs or format the data to be printed You can use ncdprint over either an XRemote or an Ethernet connection to a UNIX host Use ncdprint if you are using a printer other than a simple ASCII printer an HP DeskJet or an HP LaserJet To use ncdprint to send a document to the printer use a UNIX utility such as cat 1 enscript 1 or lwf 1 to process the file Using Printers with NCD Terminals 10 7 Using the Command Line Printing Utilities for input to the ncdprint command You can also use the UNIX redirect input operator lt The following example sends the file book over an Ethernet connection to the printer connected by serial port 1 to the terminal named hawk cat book ncdprint hawk The following example sends the file book over XRemote specified by the xport option to the printer connected to parallel port 1 specified by including xport p1 in the command line to the terminal named hawk nedprint prot none xport pl hawk 0 lt book The syntax of nedprint is nedprint prot protocol tcp port_number xport com_port ncd_name Table 10 3 describes the command line options used with ncdprint to specify Y P
191. e service table To store data temporarily for example audio and MPEG files for the helper applications the browser attempts to write to a directory called tmp The tmp directory must be accessible through the terminal s file service table file service table parameter and must be exported by the host system On the host the tmp directory can have any name on the host but the local mount point must be entered as tmp in the file service table for example tmp nil eagle ncd com nfs browser_tmp unix 3 30 8 192 8192 Setting the UID and GID Tip If you need to change the UID and GID use the file nfs uid and file nfs gid configuration parameters User Preference Files The NCD Display Manager gets the UID and GID variables from the etc passwd file or from NIS These variables are used to create files with proper permissions so users can keep their files private The browser uses the preference files listed in Table 15 2 on page 15 5 The browser creates these files in the designated browser home directory as the user saves preferences and uses other browser features Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser 15 7 Setting Up the User s Environment TFTP Setting Up the User s Environment TFTP This section describes the tasks required to set up the user environment if you are using TFTP as the terminal s file access method See Overview on page 15 1 for information about browser
192. e the password in NVRAM 4 28 Terminal Configuration Methods Controlling Access to Terminal Configuration Data Controlling Access to Setup Menus Tip If you have already set password s for TELNET access to a terminal s configuration data these passwords apply to the Setup menus as well Skip to Step 5 to apply the password s locally Tip Passwords are saved in a limited area in NVRAM reserved for saving various string values Using a global password conserves space SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol A protocol for monitoring and controlling the activity of devices on a network To require passwords for reading or writing a terminal s configuration data through the Setup menus 1 Click on the Access Control hide box in the Change Setup Parameters window To set passwords for controlling access to Change Setup Parameters and Change Quick Setup type passwords in one or both of the following fields There is an initial default read only password public Config Read Only Password Config Read Write Password To set passwords for controlling access to Change User Preferences type passwords in one or both of the following fields User Preferences Read Only Password User Preferences Read Writ Password To set a global password type the password in the Unit Global Password field The global password provides read write access to the Console Change Setup Param
193. e user to return to recently opened files nmosaic prefs The user preferences set from the browser s Edit menu plus browser parameters set from Setup menus and remote configuration files Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser 15 5 Setting Up the User s Environment NFS Setting the Environment Variables and Mounting Directories This section describes the environment variables files and directories used by the browser and describes what to do if more than one user needs to run the browser on a given terminal Environment Variables Tip If the USER variable is not set to the user who logged in on the terminal it is set to nobody and the browser looks for preference files in usr lib X11 ned users nobody nedinstall installs empty preferences files in this directory The following environment variables are used by the browser for reading and writing user preference files 1 HOME the user s home directory This value is provided by the NCD Display Manager 1 USER the user s login name This value is provided by the NCD Display Manager BROWSER_HOME the browser home directory where the browser looks for its user preference files This value is set by default to usr lib X11 ncd users USER The NCD Display Manager and the browser set up the variables so that users can write to their user preference files and the browser can read the files For example for a user with the
194. eate one in the directory containing the substitute font and make it world readable 2 In the fonts alias file add a line that maps the font name that the client requests to the name of the substitute font For example if the client is requesting a font called odd_font you would add a line like this 10 100 75 75 c 60 iso08859 1 odd_font 6 4 Configuring Font Service misc fixed medium r normal Using Bitmap Fonts Deleting Bitmap Fonts and Font Directories To delete bitmap fonts 1 Delete the font files 2 Update the fonts dir file by running ncdmkfontdir in the directory from which the fonts were deleted for example ed usr lib X11 fonts 100dpi nedmkfontdir 3 Use the Rescan Font Path utility in the Console Utilities gt Rescan Font Path to direct the X server to read the fonts dir file To delete bitmap font directories 1 Delete the directories 2 Update the current font path if desired see instructions in Setting the Font Path for the Current X Session on page 6 6 3 Remove the deleted directories from the default font path use the instructions in Changing the Font Path Permanently on page 6 5 Changing the Terminal s Font Path By default when the X server resets the font path reverts to the path specified in the xserver default font path parameter The terminal does not read changes to the default font path until it has been rebooted The pref font path parameter d
195. ection between the local networks is relatively slow you can use XRemote to improve performance Setting Up XRemote 16 3 Overview Simultaneous XRemote and LAN Sessions For terminals connected to a LAN the terminal can communicate through XRemote and the LAN at the same time A terminal cannot run an XRemote session using XRemote protocol at the same time as an XRemote session using a TCP IP protocol XRemote and a Local Printer For terminals with more than one serial port a user can have a printer attached to one serial port while using XRemote over another serial port For information about attaching and using a printer see Chapter 10 How XRemote is Used When using XRemote on a serial line the user selects a serial port through the Console s Dialer client enters modem commands if using a modem and logs into a host with an XRemote helper through a terminal emulation window The user then types an xinitremote command to start the helper process See the NCDware User s Guide for When using XRemote on a LAN the user logs into a host with detalls OG USING X Remote an XRemote helper through a terminal emulation window The user then types an xinitremote command to start the helper process The helper looks for an XRemote startup file in the user s home directory or another designated place If no startup file is found the helper starts an xterm terminal emulator 16 4 Setting Up XRemote Requirements
196. ed 16 bit or 24 bit applications might make assumptions about the organization of the frame buffer and therefore display the wrong colors A 7 Color Support for Third Party Applications A 8 B Setting the Time of Day Overview This appendix describes how to configure a terminal s time parameters so that the terminal can supply the current date and time Normally an NCD terminal does not know the current date and time Java applets and some other applications the current date and time Time parameters are also useful for general NFS use and if you are using a diskette drive attached to a terminal Specifying Time Server Hosts To specify the time server host set the time server parameter to the name or IP address of a host that provides the current time from UDP port 37 The default time server is the boot host or the time server specified in the BOOTP DHCP packet returned to the terminal Specifying Retries and the Timeout To specify the number of attempts made to contact the time server use the time server retries parameter the default is three attempts To specify how long to wait for a reply from the time server use the time server timeout parameter the default is three seconds B 1 Overview Specifying the Terminal s Time Zone To specify the time zone use either the time zone or time offset from gmt parameter The time zone parameter is easier to use and adjusts for daylight savings time aut
197. ed around each row and the entire table Long rows can extend past the end of the line without an end of line character Introduces a comment Comments are one line in length read filename Reads parameter settings from another file apply Applies preceding assignments to the terminal s current configuration Usually not necessary because when the terminal reads to the end of the configuration file it automatically applies all of the assignments in the file write nvram Writes to NVRAM any parameters that are stored in NVRAM User Preferences File Configuration files are associated with a specific terminal instead of a specific user If the user moves to a different terminal the configuration files associated with that terminal are loaded You can however prepare a preferences file that is loaded when the user logs in so the user has the same user preference settings at any terminal and preferences are preserved after the user logs out 4 12 Terminal Configuration Methods Configuring Terminals Using Remote Configuration Files Tip If you do not have nedloadprefs call NCD Technical Support See Chapter 3 for information on the file service table See Chapter 5 for information on xsession files The preferences file is loaded by the ncdloadprefs utility when the user s X session begins This utility is installed by ncdinstall for most hosts To create a
198. ed host make sure that all addresses are set in the ip equivalent addresses table Setup Change Setup Parameters gt IP gt Equivalent IP Addresses Lost Ethernet Address An NCD terminal does not work if its Ethernet address is not in NVRAM The Ethernet address is printed on a label on the bottom of the terminal s base To re enter an Ethernet address that has been accidentally erased invoke the Boot Monitor and use the nv utility to change the address For example to enter the Ethernet address 00 00 A7 10 24 14 1 Start the NVRAM utility and type c 04 to start changing the Ethernet address the Ethernet address starts at location 0x4 gt nv NVRAM Utility C add change location add D display contents Q return to monitor L load defaults R reload NVRAM values S save new values gt gt c 04 Troubleshooting 18 31 XRemote Problems XRemote Problems 2 Type each pair of numbers in the Ethernet address 004 xx 00 005 xx 00 006 xx AT 007 xx 10 008 xx 24 009 xx 14 3 At the following prompt you have typed the entire Ethernet address and you can type q to stop entering numbers 00A xx q 4 Type s to save and y after the question Are you sure F Are you sure y 5 Type qto end the NVRAM utility session and resume using the Boot Monitor utility gt gt g 6 You can reboot the terminal by typing the rs reset command gt rs XRemote
199. ed to partially or completely configure their own terminals Displaying the Setup Menus Setup menus are accessible from the Console menu bar while the terminal is running If the Console is not visible press the Setup key To hide the Console press the Setup key again For keyboards that do not have a Setup key use the relevant key combination in Table 4 2 to display or hide the Console Table 4 2 Setup Key Equivalents Keyboard Key Combinations Sun Type 4 compatible Press the Alt Graph key and the Help Setup key simultaneously VT220 compatible Press the Compose key and the F3 key simultaneously 108 key style Press the Alt key and the F3 key simultaneously 122 key 3270 compatible Press the Alt key and the Alt ExSel key simultaneously Windows 95 compatible Press the Pause key To display the Setup menu items click on Setup in the Console menu bar The menu items shown in Figure 4 3 are displayed 4 14 Terminal Configuration Methods Configuring Terminals Using Setup Menus Click on Setup to display the Setup menu items NCD User Services Console Console Login Terminals WindowMgr Utilities Setup Statistics g Messages Change Quick Setup Change Setup Parameters Change User Preferences Figure 4 3 Terminal Console and Setup Menus The Setup menu items are
200. eneric filename ncd_std To convert an IP address to a hexadecimal filename you can use the UNIX bc 1 utility For example be obase 16 192 40 154 4 CO 28 9A 4 Each portion of the IP address must be represented by two characters so the filename should be C0289A04 2 Edit parameters as required 3 Make sure the file has the correct permissions The file should be readable by all Editing Remote Configuration Files You can edit any remote configuration file with a text editor such as vi When editing a configuration file be sure to retain the correct file permissions Remote configuration files must be readable and writable by all Terminal Configuration Methods 4 11 Configuring Terminals Using Remote Configuration Files Configuration Commands Used in Remote Configuration Files Table 4 1 lists the commands most commonly used in remote configuration files Table 4 1 Commands in Remote Configuration Files Command and Syntax parameter value What the Command Does A simple assignment statement setting the value of the parameter White space around the equals sign is optional For statements that extend past the end of a line use the backslash character at the end of each continuation line except the last parameter value A parameter table consisting of rows containing one or more values White space is required between values in a row Delimiters are requir
201. ense Management Daemons on page 3 22 License Management Binaries and Files Table 3 2 lists the license management binaries and files required for floating or site licenses Table 3 2 Required Software for Floating and Site Licenses Name Heseription Required for Required for p Floating Licenses Site Licenses license dat The license data file yes yes ncdlicense The FLEXIm client that negotiates with yes yes Imgrd for licenses needed by terminals ncdlmd FLEXIm s vendor daemon which tracks yes no NCDware licenses that are checked out Imgrd FLEXIm s license manager daemon yes no NCDware also includes the license management utilities listed in Table 3 3 To run one of these utilities include Imutil in the command line for example Imutil lmstat 3 18 Preparing Terminals for Booting Optional Preparations Before Booting If you link the names of the utilities to Imutil you can specify just the utility name in the command line For information about the syntax and usage of these utilities see the utility man pages or the FLEXIm End User Manual Table 3 3 License Management Utilities Utility Name Imcksum 1 Description Prints license checksums Imdiag 1 Diagnoses license checkout problems Imdown 1 Shuts down all license software Imhostid 1 Reports the host identification of a system Imremove 1 Removes specific licenses and returns them to the
202. ense Management on WinCenter Hosts on page 3 23 To establish and manage floating and site licenses you must perform some or all of the following actions If you are not using ncdinstall install the license management software on the host s that you wish to use as license servers The software is installed by ncdinstall See Installing License Management Software on page 3 19 for more information Preparing Terminals for Booting 3 17 Optional Preparations Before Booting If you do not have a license for a feature that you need call NCD Sales Support at 650 694 0650 When you obtain licenses from NCD a license dat file containing the required licensing data is supplied This file must be placed on all license servers or the data in the file must be combined with data in an existing license dat file See Setting Up the license dat File on page 3 20 Customize the granting of license privileges based on user hostname or display name or control logging of license usage information by using options files See Using an Options File on page 3 22 If you did not select the ncdinstall option for preparing system services start ncdlicense For floating licenses also start Imgrd Make sure these daemons start when the host system reboots If you select the option for preparing system services in ncdinstall commands for starting these programs are added to system startup files See Starting the Lic
203. enter host 6 In about three minutes terminals can start getting licenses from the WinCenter host Uninstalling the License Services To uninstall the FLEXIm License Server type lminstall remove To uninstall the NCD License Proxy Server type ncdlicense remove 3 24 Preparing Terminals for Booting Configuring Terminals for the Network Configuring Terminals for the Network See the NCDware Reference Manual You can use ncdinstall to add terminals to database files and to for information on configuring the modify and delete information that ncdinstall places in the network database files r i RSE databases If you did not use ncdinstall initially to add a terminal to the network you cannot use it later to modify or remove that terminal from the network Instead you must change the databases manually When running ncdinstall you can use the following commands q Quit from ncdinstall m Go to Main Menu t Go to the top of the current submenu h Display Help Enter a subshell type exit to return to ncdinstall Adding Terminals to the Network To add terminals to the network run ncdinstall on the host on which you installed NCDware ncdinstall prompts you to supply the information listed in Table 3 4 about each terminal and adds information about each terminal to the etc hosts and etc bootptab system files This information is necessary for terminals to participate on the network Before changing system fi
204. er s modem and host side modem in the same way 1 Assemble and attach the modem to the terminal following the instructions in the modem manual 2 Turn the modem on 3 Open a Dialer window from the Console Terminals New Dialer and set the following modem parameters Use the commands described in your modem manual Disable any compression used by the modem Consult your modem manual for instructions on disabling compression and error correction such as Microcom Networking Protocol MNP Setting Up the Physical Connection 4 Disable XON XOFF flow control on the modem If you need to use flow control enable hardware flow control using RTS CTS Verify that the modem is configured for 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity and no handshake Type the modem command for saving parameters in the modem s NVRAM Setting Up a US Robotics Modem If you are using a US Robotics Courier HST Dual Standard modem use the following procedure as an example for setting up the remote terminal and host side modems for XRemote Setting Up the Remote User s Modem 1 Assemble and attach the modem to the terminal following the instructions in the US Robotics modem user s manual Turn the modem on Open a Dialer window from the Console Terminals New Dialer In the Dialer window type the commands listed in Table 16 2 Press Return after each command Table 16 2 US Robotics Modem Configuration Setting
205. er s home directory is used This option has no effect if the connection is to a published application Accessing Windows NT Servers 12 15 Other Methods of Starting Windows NT Connections Table 12 3 Command Options for the icacInt and login c ica Commands Continued Name key map keymap_file Description The keymap definition file to use for this connection For more information see Specifying the Keymap for ICA Connections on page 12 20 initial_program An initial program and its command line arguments to be started on the Windows NT server This must be the last option on the command line This option has no effect if the connection is to a published application 1 For the most commonly used keyboards you can specify an international keyboard in the xserver keyboard type configuration parameter Commands for Starting WinCenter Connections The commands for starting WinCenter connections are 1 wincen Local client for starting WinCenter connections Does not reset the X server when the user ends the connection This command is used by Windows Access and should be used whenever a WinCenter connection is made from an X session This command simply starts the host based wincenter command and you can use the arguments of the host based command To configure most attributes of a connection use the arguments of the host based wincenter command The win
206. er 2 remote configuration parameters define the initial file servers If you want to put the font directory on a host other than the boot host or an initial file server or in a different directory you must map the default font location known by the terminal to the host or directory Use the file service table parameter to map the default location the local mount point to the location of the font directory on the file server host the file server mount point Figure 6 1 shows an example file service table File server host file service table usr lib X11 nced nil eagle tftp usr local lib X11 ncd unknown 3 30 8192 8192 Local mount point File server mount point Figure 6 1 File Service Table Entry for Fonts 6 2 Configuring Font Service Using Bitmap Fonts See Chapter 3 for more information about the file service table and initial file servers To change the file server access point 1 Find the entry in the file service table parameter that has fusr lib X11 ncd in the local mount point field usr lib X11 ncd is the pathname that the terminal uses in looking for fonts 2 Inthe file server mount point field type the actual location of the fonts 3 Ifthe fonts are on a host other than the boot host or an initial file server enter the name or IP address of the host in the file server field Adding Bitmap Fonts to Font Directories Tip If you are using secure TFTP make s
207. er cannot navigate through a directory tree by clicking on directory names I Helpers cannot be used because TFTP cannot create the temporary host files they need LI Preference files cannot be read or written unless they already exist and are world readable and writable A license is required for each terminal that runs the NCD Mosaic Browser Contact NCD Sales Support if you need to purchase licenses See the NCDware Release Notes for terminal memory requirements of the browser 15 2 Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser Selecting the Browser Version Selecting the Browser Version The browser module parameter determines which module is loaded when the browser starts A change of module takes effect the next time the browser is started The module names to use with this parameter are O no encryption the version for terminals with low amounts of memory This version does not include gopher finger encryption or SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol By default this is the module loaded QO 128 bit encryption the version with all features and 128 bit encryption for use in the US and other countries that can import this type of encryption O 40 bit encryption the version with all features and 40 bit encryption If you are specifying module load policy for the browser in the modules load policy parameter the module names to use are nmosaic for the browser without encryption L nmos128 for th
208. erminal Session XRemote Session When Changes Take Effect Immediately Saved in NVRAM No file initial protocol 1 Setup Change Setup Parameters gt File Service gt Initial Protocol 1 or Setup Change Quick Setup gt Files gt File Service Protocol At boot time Yes file initial protocol 2 Setup Change Setup Parameters gt File Service gt Initial Protocol 2 or Setup Change Quick Setup gt Files Backup File Service Protocol At boot time Yes file initial server 1 Setup Change Setup Parameters gt File Service gt Initial File Server 1 or Setup Change Quick Setup gt Files gt File Server Address At boot time Yes file initial server 2 Setup Change Setup Parameters gt File Service gt Initial File Server 2 or Setup Change Quick Setup gt Files Backup File Server Address At boot time Yes file service table Setup Change Setup Parameters gt File Service gt File Service Table Immediately modules directory Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Loadable Modules Loadable Modules Directory or Setup Change Quick Setup gt Files gt Loadable Modules Directory Immediately modules load policy Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Loadable Modules Load Policy Immediately 3 32 Preparing Terminals for Booting Setup Menu Equivalents for Remote Configuration Parameters Table 3 6 Setup Menu
209. ers in Tables 4 26 Working with Tables in TELNET Sessions 4 26 Working with Tables in Remote Configuration Files 4 27 vi Contents Controlling Access to Terminal Configuration Data 4 28 Disabling the Setup Menus 4 28 Controlling Access to the Console and Setup Menus 4 28 Controlling Access to the Console 4 28 Controlling Access to Setup Menus 4 29 Setup Menu Equivalents for the Auto Save Parameters 4 30 Chapter 5 Login and X Session Management XDM s Purpose and Functions 5 1 Specifying the Hosts Offered for Login 5 2 Displaying a Login Banner Only 5 3 Login from a List of Specified Hosts 5 3 Login from One Specific Host 5 3 Login from the First Host to Respond 5 3 Displaying a Login Chooser 5 4 Listing Specific Hosts in the Login Chooser 5 4 Listing All Available Hosts in the Login Chooser 5 5 Windows NT Hosts in the Login Chooser 5 5 Using XDM to Customize the User Environment 5 6 Configuring a System Wide Environment 5 6 Configuring Individual Environments 5 6 Controlling User and Host Connections to Terminals 5 7 Configuring the Host for XDM Access Control 5 8 Configuring the Terminal for XDM Access Control 5 9 Controlling Access When Clients Are Running on Multiple Hosts 5 10 Using xauth Interactively 5 11 Automating xauth 5 11 vii Contents viii Using the NCD Display Manager 5 11 About the NCD Display Manager 5 11 Setting Up the NCD Display Manager 5 13 Configuring NCD Terminal Emulator Login 5 1
210. es 8192 as the default to change the block size use the Boot Monitor s nf size command 18 8 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Boot Failures Table 18 3 Boot Monitor Messages Continued Boot Monitor Message TFTP connection refused or TFTP connection time out Diagnosis and Actions to Take Check for faulty cables or a faulty connection Make sure TFTP is running on the boot host Starting server please wait Explora 400 450 series terminals require the NCDware 5 1 version of the Xncdxpl X server If you attempt to boot your Explora 400 450 series terminals using a previous version of Xncdxpl the terminal displays a misleading message and does not boot You must boot using the NCDware 5 1 server version CRC error 1 2 See Secure TFTP Problems on page 18 12 The X server file is corrupted or was corrupted as it was downloaded Try rebooting Try recopying the X server file from the CD ROM See Network Configuration Problems on page 18 28 If the Terminal Boots from the Wrong Host In the Boot Monitor type the following command gt da The IP address of the terminal the IP address the host from which the X server was loaded and the subnet mask are displayed Booting from the wrong host may be caused by BOOTP or RARP running on hosts other than the desired boot host Removing the terminal from the etc bootptab file on the other host s prevents the termina
211. es an NCDnet license The ctype cterm option specifies a CTERM connection and help lists the available options See the ncdterm 1 man page 7 4 Starting and Configuring Local Clients Summary of Local Clients Table 7 1 Local Client Menu Choices Commands and Functions Continued Command and Console Name amp Location Options Function Terminals gt New Serial term ctype serial On terminals with more than one serial help port displays a Terminal Host Chooser that lists serial connections The ctype serial option specifies a serial connection and help lists the available options On terminals with one serial port displays a serial terminal emulation window See the ncdterm 1 man page Terminals gt New Dialer dialer Lists serial ports and provides a help Communications menu for selecting a serial port mode The help option lists the available options See the ncdterm 1 man page WindowMgr NCD wm Provides OSF Motif style window Window Manager management on the terminal NCD recommends using the host based program ncdrunwm to start the local NCD Window Manager wm NCDware also includes a host based version of the NCD Window Manager ncdwm See the ncdwm 1 and ncdrunwm 1 man pages WindowMer Motif mwm Provides OSF Motif window management Window Manager on the terminal requires a license NCD recommends using the host based program ncdrunwm to start the local Motif Win
212. es the general characteristics of configuration parameters See the Remote Configuration Parameter Quick Reference for a complete description of each remote configuration parameter Read Only and Write Only Parameters Parameter Values Read only parameters and write only parameters passwords and encryption keys are displayed by TELNET with a pound sign before their names and cannot be edited Passwords or encryption keys that you have set have the value lt get protected gt Unset passwords and encryption keys have the value nil In general passwords and encryption keys should not be set in remote configuration files because they will not be encrypted Passwords and encryption keys can be set through the Setup menus and are displayed when set as a series of asterisks Some parameters take integers as values others take strings or Boolean true false values String values containing embedded white spaces must be surrounded by single or double quotes in TELNET sessions and in remote configuration files for example login myhost For parameters that take Boolean values you can use the values true false yes no or on off Boolean parameters are displayed in the Setup menus as toggle buttons The keyword null or nil in TELNET sessions and remote configuration files indicates that no value is set for the parameter This is seen only in parameters for passwords and encryption keys that have no def
213. es to the File Service Table To make Windows NT files available add an entry for each desired share name to the terminal s file service table To add entries to the file service table in the remote configuration file specify the local mount point the NT server s name or IP address the protocol and the share name on the NT server in the file service table parameter Enter the default values for all of the other fields in the entry For example the following command adds an entry to the end of the file service table Note In this release the local mount point must match the NT share name file service table 1 SharedDocuments nil verdi ncd com smb SharedDocuments unknown 3 30 8192 8192 Local mount point NT server Protocol NT share name must match the share name Changes take effect immediately and are not saved in NVRAM User Accounts and Permissions NCD recommends that you specify a username for SMB file access in the remote configuration file because the default username guest may not provide access to the user s files Also it is common for the guest account to be disabled for security reasons If you specify a username in the configuration file a dialog box is displayed requesting the user s password when the client attempts to open the file The parameter for specifying the username is file smb default username To prevent the display of the password dialog box you 12 28 Accessing Windo
214. escribed in Setting the Font Path for the Current X Session on page 6 6 changes the font path for the current session Changing the Font Path Permanently Tip The default font path settings in the X server match the You can use the xserver font path resolution of the terminal s monitor alias table parameter to substitute ae e simple names like misc for the Built in fonts in the default font path provide the correct complete font directory path or font cursors for the NCD terminal Do not remove them from the server names used in parameters default font path Configuring Font Service 6 5 Using Bitmap Fonts Tip If you are using secure TFTP do not include the TFTP home directory name in the names of the directories in the font path it is added automatically The default font path for 100 dpi dots per inch monitors is built ins usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf misc usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf 100dpi usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf dwl00dpi To change the terminal s default font path change the font path defined in xserver default font path Be careful to keep the built in fonts at the top of the font path If you re using a remote configuration file to add a font called MyAppFonts the entry might be similar to the one that follows xserver default font path built ins usr lib X11 NCD fonts pcf misc usr lib X11 NCD fonts pcf 100dpi usr lib X11 NCD fonts pcf dwl100dpi
215. eside on a UNIX host expect to be run from a certain directory For such applications use the D option to set the user dir property to the application directory Java Fonts Setting the User s Home Directory Java Fonts See Chapter 6 for more information on fonts If you are not running the ncddm daemon on your XDM host or not using XDM you should set the user home property to the user s home directory This allows Java to read the user s hotjava properties file See Chapter 5 for information on the ncddm daemon See Java Files and Directories on page 14 2 for a description of the hotjava properties file To provide fonts for Java applications you can use a font server such as the NCD font server or bitmap fonts If you are using bitmap fonts make sure the terminal font path includes the large point size PCF fonts included in the NCDware distribution These fonts are included in the font path for terminals installed by ncdinstall The default font directory for the Java fonts is usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf java Setting the Time of Day For applets and other applications that need the current date and time you can configure the terminal s time parameters as described in Appendix B Setting the Time of Day Setting Environment Variables Tip If you use the NCD Display Manager described in Chapter 5 you need not set the USER and HOME variables in pref environment You can set environment v
216. eters Table 12 7 Setup Menu Fields for Configuring Windows NT Connections Continued When Changes Savedin Parameter Setup Menu Field Take Effect NVRAM wincenter resolution Change Setup Parameters At session No WinCenter gt Window Size startup wincenter resources Change Setup Parameters At session No WinCenter Audio Enabled startup Number of Colors and Window Size xserver keyboard type Change Setup Parameters At boot Yes Input Devices gt Keyboard Type Accessing Windows NT Servers 12 31 Setup Menu Equivalents for Remote Configuration Parameters 12 32 Accessing Windows NT Servers 13 Configuring a Wireless Terminal This chapter describes how to configure an NCD Explora wireless terminal The topics in this chapter are 1 Hardware and software requirements Configuring the terminal for wireless use Displaying wireless information Testing the wireless system O O O O Alternative methods for configuring an Access Point The Wireless Network A wireless network consists of wireless Explora 400 450 terminals and Proxim wireless LAN Access Points attached to an Ethernet network Terminals can use Access Points to boot and to communicate with hosts on the Ethernet network Wireless terminals have the same access to network application software printers e mail and other network services as do terminals connected to the network through Ethernet cabling Hardware and Software Re
217. eters gt Parallel gt Parallel Daemons Table use parallel protocol takes effect immediately all other fields take effect at boot 9 28 Using a Local File System 10 Using Printers with NCD Terminals Tip Procedures in this chapter provide directions for configuring terminals through remote configuration files For system administrators who use the Console for terminal configuration information about Setup menu fields is provided at the end of the chapter Overview This chapter describes how to configure printing from NCD terminals The topics covered in this chapter are 11 Connecting a printer to a terminal 11 Using the command line printing utilities for printers attached to NCD terminals Setting environment variables Using the ncdlp 1 print command Using the nedprint 1 print command 1 Using the terminal s print table to set up printing for the following local clients The NCD VT320 Terminal Emulator The NCD Mosaic Browser The NCD Applet Viewer and other Java applications For information about configuring printing services for the NCD 3270 emulator see Using the 3270 Emulator Terminals can be configured for printing to a local printer or to a remote printer If a local printer is attached to a serial port the port must be configured For printing from XRemote or using a command line for printing two utilities are included with NCDware You can use
218. eters Change Quick Setup Change User Preferences menus the Local File Manager used to manipulate files on PC cards or floppy drives and SNMP variables and commands Click on Enforce Config Passwords Locally and Enforce User Preferences Passwords Locally Otherwise the passwords are requested only when you connect to the terminal from another terminal s Setup menus or from an NCD Terminal Emulator TELNET window Click on Apply to save the password s in NVRAM Terminal Configuration Methods 4 29 Setup Menu Equivalents for the Auto Save Parameters Setup Menu Equivalents for the Auto Save Parameters Table 4 5 lists the remote configuration parameters discussed in this chapter and a description of the corresponding Setup menu field for each This information is provided for system administrators who configure terminals through Setup menus Table 4 5 Setup Menu Fields for Auto Save Parameters Parameters Configuration gt Configuration Daemon Service Auto Saved Info When Changes Saved in Parameter Name Console Setup Menu Field Take Effect NVRAM config auto save file Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters gt Configuration gt Configuration Daemon Service Auto Save File config auto save nvram Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters gt Configuration gt Configuration Daemon Service Auto Save NVRAM config auto saved info Setup Change Setup Immedi
219. eters to specify the IP addresses of alternate hosts to use Preparing Terminals for Booting 3 5 Optional Preparations Before Booting On the boot host you can use the p and 1 bootpd options to specify when a secondary UNIX host should respond to terminal BOOTP requests see the bootpd 8 man page for more information Login Services You can increase the reliability of login service by making sure that users have automatic access to more than one host through the login banner the Login Chooser and Terminal Host Chooser for login through terminal emulation Some suggestions follow for more information see Chapter 5 1 Specify that XDM requests are sent to more than one host and that a login banner is displayed by the first host that responds to the request Use the login local client in the exec startup commands parameter LI Specify that XDM requests are sent to more than one host and that all hosts are listed in the Login Chooser LY Specify that all available hosts are listed in the Login Chooser LY Specify more than one login host for NCD Terminal Emulator connections Font Service To ensure reliable font service you can specify more than one font server in the xserver default font path parameter See Chapter 6 for more information about font servers Name Service ncdinstall ensures that reliable name service is available for translating between hostnames and IP addresses by configuring terminals to u
220. etwork adding terminals modifying terminal setup and deleting terminals from the network Booting terminals The instructions in this chapter assume that your host systems and terminals are physically set up on an operating Ethernet or Token Ring network you used ncdinstall the NCD installation program to install NCDware on a host computer and you are using ncdinstall to add terminals to the network For information about installing NCDware see the NCDware CD insert Preparing Terminals for Booting 3 1 Terminal Boot Actions Terminal Boot Actions NVRAM Non volatile terminal RAM that contains the data required for booting NVRAM contents are initially set at the factory and retained when the terminal is rebooted or powered off DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol a bootstrap protocol that is backwardly compatible with BOOTP and provides dynamic IP address assignments BOOTP Bootstrap protocol that downloads network parameters from a host to a terminal as the terminal boots RARP Reverse Address Resolution Protocol a boot protocol that provides IP addresses only Tip Most booting actions can be modified See Optional Preparations Before Booting on page 3 5 and the Reference Manual Tip You can use remote configuration to change which clients start at log in See Chapter 7 When you power on a terminal the default booting actions performed by the terminal s Boot Monito
221. extended diagnostics parameters take effect immediately and only file extended diagnostics is saved to NVRAM To make the other parameter settings permanent place them in a remote configuration file X Server Messages Displayed in Dialog Boxes See Popup Warning Messages on The X server displays some of its messages in dialog boxes page 19 34 for a description er ine that prompt the user to take action This section describes low on memory popup messages i those dialog boxes Logout Confirmation Dialog Box The logout confirmation box Figure 8 2 appears when the XDMCP connection to the login host is broken The connection is broken when the user selects Logout from the Console s Login menu or when the ncdlogout command is invoked You can configure the terminal to log the user out immediately instead of displaying the dialog box by setting login xdm action on disconnect to logout Ends the X session displays Console and Login Chooser Displays the Show Connections Aborts the logout popup window listing current X process and resumes connections the current X session Figure 8 2 Logout Dialog Box Variations of the logout dialog box appear when the XDMCP connection changes For example if the host XDM process Getting Information About Terminal Operations 8 7 The Console Statistics Menus does not respond to periodic checks made by the X server the following message appears in a dialog b
222. f the Access Point is using a security ID Before you configure the security ID make sure the LAN adapter is installed in the terminal The security ID is stored on the LAN adapter not in the terminal s NVRAM To use Boot Monitor commands reboot the terminal and interrupt the boot by pressing the Escape key when the following message appears on the screen TFTP NFS load lt ESC gt to abort When the Boot Monitor prompt appears gt you can type Boot Monitor commands The following subsections provide directions for changing and displaying wireless parameters 13 2 Configuring a Wireless Terminal Configuring the Terminal Changing the Domain Number Tip Press the Return key after typing commands See Chapter 4 for information on using the Setup menus or TELNET to display configuration data The domain number and security ID determine with which Access Point s the terminal can communicate All hosts that have wireless communications with each other must have the same domain number The domain is a number from 0 to 15 the default is 0 If the Access Point uses domain 0 there is no need to change the domain number on the terminal If you have wireless terminals on multiple subnets each subnet must use a different domain number To change the domain number use the wd command for example gt wd 1 Setting Domain to 1 After you press Return the terminal s NVRAM is updated with the new informa
223. file LY Startup files depend on commands in the login file 1 The last client in the xsession file or in the Xsession file if the user has no xsession file is not started in the foreground LY A font problem is preventing a client from starting To isolate a problem to the xsession file rename the file and log in again To debug a xsession file you can put it in a line setting up a personal error file and log in again XDM Logs Out for No Reason If XDM keeps ending the session for no apparent reason you may need to tune the XDM keepalive parameters login xdm keepalives begin time and login xdm keepalives wait time For more information on these parameters see the Remote Configuration Parameter Quick Reference and the NCDware Reference Manual Clients in Session Files Don t Start 18 16 Troubleshooting Verify that the commands executed in the system wide Xsession file and the user s xsession file are in the user s command search path When in doubt replace simple command names with their full path Troubleshooting XDM Login Failures Other possible causes of the problem m If Xsession does not execute user xsession files verify that at least one non terminating command is run in the foreground in Xsession If Xsession executes user xsession files verify that at least one non terminating command is run in the foreground in xsession The Xsession file must be world readable and world
224. formation about the font path and font aliasing Font Format is Wrong See Chapter 6 for information about converting fonts to a usable format and using the NCD font server To see which fonts are available to the terminal use the xIsfonts 1 utility If the font is not listed the font directory may not be in the terminal s font path Check the font path in the Change Setup Parameters and Change User Preferences menus Add font directories if necessary If you don t have the font required by a client and the client accepts substitutes Use wildcard characters in font requests 1 Add font aliases to the relevant fonts alias files NCD terminals can only read PCF SNF and DWF format bitmap fonts unless you are using a font server If an application requires fonts that are not in one of these formats convert the fonts and add their directories to the font path or use a font server Incorrect Compression Factor Many font files are compressed have a Z file suffix Without a font server terminals can read fonts compressed with 12 bit compression Some systems use fonts compressed with 16 bit compression which the terminal cannot read To solve this problem do one of the following 1 Uncompress the fonts and run mkfontdir in the same directory 4 Uncompress the fonts and recompress them with the b12 option 1 Runa font server on the host to serve these fonts to the terminal New Font Path Doesn t W
225. formation about using the NCD font server Some suggestions follow for increasing the amount of free memory in the terminal By default the font cache uses 100 000 bytes of terminal memory You can reduce the size of the font cache or disable it by reducing its size to zero The parameter to use is xserver font cache max size Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Fonts gt Font Cache Maximum Size If you need to use a number of host based fonts and want to disable the font cache to save memory you can use a font server and outline fonts Reducing the size of the font cache may adversely affect the performance of clients that use large numbers of fonts Discarding X Settings By default the terminal discards X settings when the user starts a new X session in order to reclaim unused memory fragments and recover from the memory leaks caused by some clients The settings discarded are the client resource database and the keyboard mouse and screen saver settings If you have enabled the xserver retain x settings parameter NCD recommends that you set it to false Setup gt Change Setup Parameters X and Graphics gt Retain X Settings Across Sessions Troubleshooting 18 35 Memory Problems Diagnostic Messages Buffer Size By default the diagnostic messages buffer uses 8 192 bytes of memory You can change the size of the buffer using the diag buffer size parameter Setup Change Setup Parameters Diagnos
226. g Alt F12 when the focus is on the PageView window Diagnosing Terminal Crashes If a terminal crashes several messages appear on the screen and the Boot Monitor prompt is displayed For example PANIC End of Diagnostic Log Preliminary Actions to Take After a Crash Before rebooting the terminal d Write down what you or the user were doing just before the terminal crashed Specifically note the window manager you were using the X server the terminal was running and the types and instances of each client including local clients It s very important to write down this information 1 Write down the messages displayed during the crash If you are logging diagnostic messages to a file check the file for messages displayed just before the crash Crashes Caused by Hardware or Network Problems If one terminal out of many is crashing and all the terminals are running the same software the crash may be caused by a hardware problem See your terminal s hardware booklet for information about diagnosing hardware problems Reproducing the Crash Try to reproduce the crash by doing the same things you were doing just before the terminal crashed If the crash is reproducible and you can t figure out what went wrong upload information about the crash as described in the following section and contact Technical Support Troubleshooting 18 41 Diagnosing Terminal Crashes Uploading Files Generated by the Crash
227. g Terminals X server in this way while clients are running may cause unpredictable behavior Table 3 5 Boot Monitor Access Key Combination Keyboard Type Key Combination 101 or 102 key Ctrl Left Alt Setup for the Windows 95 compatible US English and IBM PS 2 versions use Caps Lock Left Alt Setup VT220 compatible Ctrl Compose F3 108 key Ctrl Left Alt F3 97 key Left Alt Caps Lock Setup 107 key Sun Type 4 compatible Stop A L1 A 122 key 3270 compatible Lexmark Alt Rule Home 123 key Sun Type 5 compatible Stop A L1 A 1 NCD keyboard models are identified on the bottom of the keyboard Manual Boot from a Local File System To boot manually from a PC card use the bl command gt bl Manual Boot Using TFTP or NFS To load the server manually using TFTP use the bt command gt bt file terminal_IP host_IP gateway_IP subnet_mask To load the server manually using NFS use the bn command gt bn file terminal_IP host_IP gateway_IP subnet_mask The command line options for both bt and bn are file The name of the X server to load terminal_IP The IP address of the terminal host_IP The IP address of the boot host 3 30 Preparing Terminals for Booting Setup Menu Equivalents for Remote Configuration Parameters gateway_IP The IP address of the gateway subnet_mask The subnet mask specified as an IP address or as a hexadecimal number Examples of ma
228. g a Local File System on a Diskette See the documentation included with the floppy drive for installation instructions You can use DOS compatible floppy disks on a terminal equipped with a floppy drive You can use floppy disks as off line storage for files or to copy files between a floppy disk and your host system ncdfloppy is the hostside utility for managing and using DOS compatible file systems on 720K or 1 44M floppy disks f Caution f CLLELLLELLL Do not use the hostside ncdfloppy utility if you ve already used NFS to access the floppy To avoid damaging files you must reboot the terminal before switching from one method of floppy access to another ae Configuring a Terminal for Floppy Disk Drive Use By default ncdfloppy looks for a floppy drive connected directly to the terminal If you want to access a floppy drive connected to another terminal you can specify the terminal by using the h option see The ncdfloppy Command Line Syntax on page 9 24 for more information To configure the terminal for the floppy disk drive set the use parallel protocol field in the parallel daemons table to true as shown in Figure 9 3 TCP NCDnet LAT LAT port object service service name name rating parallel daemons table 1 true 5964 nil false Port Use parallel Enable LAT number protocol service Figure 9 3 Setting the parallel daemons table for a Floppy Drive Using
229. g boxes 1 Displaying statistics in Console Statistics windows Displaying the Console Tip To change the key sequence for displaying the Console use the pref console key sequence parameter The Console is a local client that provides access to other local clients such as the clients that display terminal statistics and to terminal commands such as the boot command By default the Console is displayed after the terminal boots If the Console is not visible press the Setup key To hide the Console press the Setup key again For keyboards that do not have a Setup key use the relevant key combination in Table 8 1 to display or hide the Console The Console itself or any of the local clients listed in its menus can be disabled to prevent their use For information about disabling local clients see Chapter 7 Access to the Console can be controlled through a password set in Setup Change Setup Parameters Access Control for more information about setting a Console password see Chapter 4 Getting Information About Terminal Operations 8 1 Console Messages Table 8 1 Setup Key Equivalents Keyboard Key Combinations Sun Type 4 compatible Press the Alt Graph key and the Help Setup key simultaneously VT220 style Press the Compose key and the F3 key simultaneously 108 key style Press the Alt key and the F3 key simultaneously 122 key 3270 compatible Press the Alt key and the Alt ExSel ke
230. gin c ica Commands Continued Name Description gleometry widthxheight The maximum size in pixels of the connection window The maximum window size you can achieve is 1280x1024 even though the specified size may be 1600x1200 The default is full screen ti tle window_name The window title which may be displayed by window managers The default title is the hostname of the server na me client_name The client name to use for this connection The client name becomes an environment variable on the server and appears in dialog boxes that list the clients connected to the server The default client name is the hostname or IP address of the terminal This option sets the environment variable to the specified string u sername user_name The user s account name and password on the Windows NT server aplaseword password If you include these values plus the Windows NT domain the user will be automatically logged on Including the password may compromise network security If you specify a published application instead of a server the user logs on to the Windows NT server where the application is located do main domain The Windows NT domain in which the password and user name are valid wo tkingdirectory directory The path to the user s working directory on the Windows NT server If you specify a path applications use the working directory for retrieving and saving files Otherwise the us
231. gure the Terminal Host Chooser in the following ways m To automatically display the Terminal Host Chooser or terminal emulation windows after the terminal is reset list commands in the exec startup commands table For example 5 14 Login and X Session Management Configuring NCD Terminal Emulator Login the following exec startup commands table displays the Terminal Host Chooser at reset exec startup commands term 1 To specify a default list of terminal emulator login hosts list all of the hosts TELNET CTERM hosts and LAT to be displayed in the choosers in the term default hosts table An example table is shown in Figure 5 3 term default hosts telnet walrus home machine cterm eng3100 Jane s machine The client connects tothe Name of the Description of the host using this protocol login host login host Figure 5 3 Listing Hosts in the Terminal Emulator Host Choosers 1 To prevent users from logging into hosts not listed in the choosers set the term restrict host choices parameter to true 1 To reset the timeout for establishing a connection before declaring an error condition use the term default connect timeout parameter Automating Login through the NCD Terminal Emulator Tip To set up a default host for a TELNET or LAT terminal emulation When using XDM to log in session so users do not have to type a hostname or IP address when ee logging in through an NCD Terminal E
232. hapter 1 Information about NCD publications Chapter 2 Understanding NCD software Chapter 3 Adding terminals to the network and preparing them for booting This chapter includes the features most commonly customized by system administrators and how to manage licenses for the options that require licensing Chapter 4 Configuring terminals through remote configuration files Setup menus and TELNET Chapter 5 Configuring terminals for XDM login service configuring users X sessions using the NCD Display Manager and configuring login through the NCD Terminal Emulator Chapter 6 Configuring the basic bitmap font service and using a font server Chapter 7 Starting and configuring local clients This is basic information that applies to all local clients some local clients are described more fully in their own chapters Chapter 8 Using the Console to get information about terminal operations and using the diagnostic message facility Chapter 9 Using a local file system on a PC card or floppy disk Chapter 10 Setting up a printer attached to a terminal and configuring printing services on local or remote printers Chapter 11 Reassigning keyboard functions with the graphical Keymap Editor Chapter 12 Configuring NCDware to connect to Microsoft Windows NT servers and to access files on Windows NT servers Chapter 13 Configuring terminals for wireless use About NCD Manuals m Chapter 14 Configuring Ja
233. hapter provide directions for configuring terminals through remote configuration parameters For system administrators who use the Console for terminal configuration information about corresponding Setup menu fields is provided at the end of the chapter This chapter describes methods for changing the attributes of NCD terminals that have already been added to the network and helps you decide which method to use The major topics in this chapter are 1 An overview of terminal configuration methods how they interact with each other and configuration parameters OQ Configuring terminals through remote configuration files 1 Configuring terminals through Console Setup menus Configuring terminals through TELNET 1 Controlling access to configuration data For information about the remote configuration files on PC cards see Using a PC Card in Your NCD Thin Client Device For information about using SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol to display and set parameters see the NCDware Reference Manual Terminal Configuration Overview See Chapter 3 for instructions on adding terminals When you are adding a new terminal to your network NCD recommends that you use the ncdinstall program ncdinstall is used both to install NCDware and to add terminals to the network The ncdinstall program adds the terminal to network database files and creates standard terminal configuration files for you Terminal Configuration
234. hat lists all hosts or that offers hosts via specific protocols Table 3 1 lists the choices in the Terminals menu and the types of connections listed in each Table 3 1 NCD Terminal Emulator Protocols Console Terminals Menu Item Connections Listed New Terminal TELNET LAT CTERM and serial New Telnet TELNET New LAT LAT New CTerm CTERM New Serial serial Tip By default the Terminal Host Chooser lists connections to local services the Local File Manager the Configuration daemon and the Diagnostic daemon To prevent listing of local services set the showLocal resource to false This setting affects all versions of the Terminal Host Chooser The main Terminal Host Chooser displays all connections and the protocol specific choosers each display a subset of the connections Thus the TELNET chooser displays the TELNET connections the CTERM chooser displays the CTERM connections and the LAT chooser displays the LAT connections If more than one serial port is available a Serial chooser displays the serial connections If there is only one serial port a terminal emulator window opens when you select Terminals gt New Serial See Chapter 7 for the commands for invoking the terminal emulator from a command line and the ncdterm 1 man page for all of the options and X resources For information about using the NCD Terminal Emulator see the User s Guide You can confi
235. he HTTP Proxy Host and Port The browser http proxy host parameter specifies the name or IP address of the host that runs the HTTP proxy service The default is nil The browser http proxy host port parameter specifies the TCP IP port for the HTTP proxy server running on the HTTP proxy host The default is 80 and the range is 0 to 65535 Specifying HTTP Overrides The browser http proxy overrides parameter contains a comma separated list of hosts hostnames or IP addresses Requests for HTTP services directed to these hosts do not go through the proxy server The default value is nil 15 14 Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser Setting Browser Variables and Controlling Preferences Specifying the FTP Proxy Host and Overrides An FTP proxy server enforces access control for traffic that uses the FTP protocol for transferring files If the FTP proxy server is not set up correctly users cannot retrieve files from outside the firewall or transfer files outside the firewall Specifying the FTP Proxy Host and Port The browser ftp proxy host parameter specifies the name or IP address of the host that runs the FTP proxy service The default is nil The browser ftp proxy host port parameter specifies the TCP IP port for the FTP proxy server on the FTP proxy host The default is 80 and the range is 0 to 65535 Specifying FTP Overrides The browser ftp proxy overrides parameter contains a comma separated list of hosts
236. he Windows Access chooser Figure 12 1 shows an example Windows Access dialog box With this method of accessing a Windows NT server the user can have an X session and multiple Windows NT connections running at the same time To start multiple connections through Windows Access a window manager must be running on the terminal Connections through the Windows Access dialog box can use either the ICA Client or WinCenter The two methods are compared in Choosing a Connection Protocol on page 12 2 WAMAN Aiea Deaarieton Sree Conseaten Tepe mT teal aridi CATCP 4 Connnci rew Carr Dririr Proparticn Careri Figure 12 1 Windows Access Chooser Adding Connections Tip To add a new connection There must be at least one 7 Foi i sonneetion inthe Windows 1 Start Windows Access in the Console Utilities Windows Access chooser before the Access on the user s terminal user can start a session using 7 this method 2 Click New The properties dialog box appears Figure 12 2 Accessing Windows NT Servers 12 7 Configuring Connections in the Windows Access Chooser Windows Accar 4 Ceserpien Daner Peblahed Agplcadon Camnaciion Tyee HATO Figure 12 2 Windows Access Connection Properties 3 Fillin the Description field with a description of your choice The description for each connection must be unique 4 Select the protocol from the Connection Type drop down list and specify
237. he browser s help files in HTML format in a directory called help in the same directory as the X servers 15 10 Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser Setting Browser Variables and Controlling Preferences Setting Browser Variables and Controlling Preferences See Specifying Proxy Servers and the Mail Server on page 15 13 for remote configuration parameters controlling preference items that cannot be set by the user See Setting Browser Variables for Special Environments on page 15 16 for information on browser variables that cannot be set as user preferences or remote configuration parameters When it starts the browser reads the nmosaic prefs file in the browser home directory Next the browser checks for preference settings loaded from the terminal s remote configuration file This section describes how to configure the following items 1 The size of the memory cache for temporary storage of documents The maximum number of concurrent TCP IP connections 1 Enabling or disabling automatic image loading JavaScript and applets specifying the default home page If you set these items in Setup gt Change Setup Parameters Browser click on Apply and then start the browser changes take effect immediately Parameters set while the browser is running have no effect Specifying the Size of the Browser Cache The first time a document is requested from a remote server the browser must download
238. he translation is prefaced the translation definition modifier may not be present by an exclamation mark Specifies a case distinction for example a and A are not treated identically The translation is prefaced by a colon Figure 11 6 Keymap Editor Translation Modifiers Creating Translations A translation has three parts 1 Optional modifiers Lb Akey 1 An action or action sequence Use the instructions in Table 11 3 to remap the keyboard in advanced mode Table 11 3 Functions of Keymap Editor Advanced Mode To perform this function Follow these steps Reassigning Keyboard Functions Using the Keymap Editor 11 11 Mapping the Keyboard Advanced Mode Table 11 3 Functions of Keymap Editor Advanced Mode Continued Create a translation 1 2 3 Click on New The translation s is added to the Translations List Select the desired action s from the Action List or type the action s in the Act ion field Select the desired modifier s Figure 11 6 Replace a translation T The translation appears in the Action field A Select a translation from the Translations List Make the desired modifications by editing the Action field or selecting modifiers from the modifiers list Figure 11 6 on page 11 11 and actions from the Action List Click on Replace Delete a translation N e Select a translation from the Translations List Click on Delete
239. he up command line do not include the dump suffix The Boot Monitor provides the suffix The syntax of the up command is up file_specification terminal_IP_address host_IP_address For example gt up tftpboot this_ned 195 12 16 27 195 12 16 2 Using IP address 192 072 016 0027 oo aa a wee Stes 18 42 Troubleshooting Diagnosing Terminal Crashes 3 Ifyou haven t already done so call Technical Support for instructions before sending the dump file to NCD Uploading Files Using NFS To upload files using NFS you must have Boot Monitor 2 9 or later The file system containing the destination file must be exported and must be writable To upload using NFS 1 Prepare a file on the host for uploading the X server image The file must be empty must be writable by others and must have the suffix dump appended to its name chmod 666 tftpboot file dump 2 Use the Boot Monitor un command to upload the X server Make sure you provide a full pathname for the file and resolve links to the file locally to the Boot Monitor The syntax of the un command is un file_specification terminal_IP_address host_IP_address For example gt un tmp this_nced 195 12 16 27 195 12 16 2 Using IP address 192v012 2016 027 sc cee oid es 3 If youhaven t already done so call Technical Support for instructions before sending the dump file to NCD Troubleshooting 18 43 Accessing NCD Support Files and Util
240. helps control colormap flashing see Specifying Window Size Colors and Audio on page 12 26 Colormap flashing does not occur at 16 and 24 bit color depths If xserver color depth is set to 16 or 24 bit color wincenter colors is ignored This is equivalent to setting wincenter colors to disabled To specify colormap usage in the remote configuration file use the wincenter colors parameter Table 12 4 describes the values for this parameter Table 12 4 Values for the wincenter colors Parameter Value disabled Result The setting to use if you are not using WinCenter No Windows colors are pre allocated in the default colormap and there is no colormap flash dampening local clients The default Pseudo color visual becomes the default visual and the 20 Windows standard colors are pre allocated in the default colormap using pixels 0 9 and 246 255 The default local client colors and background color are chosen from the Microsoft standard colors wm_ and local clients The same as local clients except that window managers also allocate colors from the Windows standard colors all clients The same as local clients except that all clients allocate colors from the Windows standard colors and a static color visual is the default visual On HMXpro24 terminals if this parameter is set to anything other than disabled the default local client colors and default backgroun
241. her resource files requires loading resources using xrdb Setting Resource Values through Remote Configuration If you are not using XDM or a session manager you can set X resource values for local clients in the xserver initial x resources parameter When it starts XDM erases resources set in this parameter Type resources as a single string surrounded by single quotes so you can use double quotes in resource settings Use a backslash to escape all special characters for example to escape and n use and n Starting and Configuring Local Clients 7 17 Configuring Local Clients For example to use this method to set some local NCD Window Manager X resources xserver initial x resources ncdwm iconDirection ne v ncdwm activeBackground 000000 ncdwm KeyboardFocusPolicy pointer ncdwm packIcons off ncdwm flashUnmap off Setting Resources in Resource Files If you are using XDM or some other session manager you must use a resource file such as a Xdefaults file instead of using a remote configuration to load resources X resource file Local clients cannot directly read the settings in Xdefaults files A file commonly named Xdefaults or other X resource files You must use xrdb 1 usually run Coe ore from a startup file to load local client resources from the You can use command line options to o a stal p tte carc IE s override resources set through resource file For example the following command
242. hostnames or IP addresses Requests for FTP services directed to these hosts do not go through the proxy server The default value is nil Specifying the Gopher Proxy Host and Overrides A gopher proxy server enforces access control for traffic that uses the gopher protocol Some information on the Internet is offered through gopher servers Tip Specifying the Gopher Proxy Host and Port Gopher is not included in the browser The browser gopher proxy host parameter specifies the name module without encryption it is i included in the other two modules or IP address of the host running the gopher proxy server The default value is nil The browser gopher proxy host port parameter specifies the TCP IP port for the gopher proxy server The default is 80 and the range is 0 to 65535 Specifying Gopher Overrides The browser gopher proxy overrides parameter contains a comma separated list of hosts hostnames or IP addresses Requests for gopher services directed to these hosts do not go through the proxy server The default value is nil Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser 15 15 Setting Browser Variables and Controlling Preferences Specifying the SOCKS Server Host and Port SOCKS is a networking proxy mechanism that allows hosts inside a firewall to access the Internet SOCKS is compiled into applications to allow them to work through a firewall and consists of the SOCKS proxy server and a client library
243. ice Problems 18 38 DPS Applications on Solaris Systems 18 39 Running AnswerBook 18 39 Running ImageTool 18 39 Running PageView 18 40 Diagnosing Terminal Crashes 18 41 Preliminary Actions to Take After a Crash 18 41 Crashes Caused by Hardware or Network Problems 18 42 Reproducing the Crash 18 42 Uploading Files Generated by the Crash 18 42 Uploading Files Using TFTP 18 42 Uploading Files Using NFS 18 43 Accessing NCD Support Files and Utilities 18 44 Using FTP 18 44 Using the World Wide Web 18 45 Contacting Technical Support 18 45 Sending E Mail or Faxes to Technical Support 18 45 Using the Web 18 45 Phoning Technical Support 18 45 Information to Provide 18 46 XXIV Contents Appendix A Using 16 bit and 24 bit Color Setting Color Depth and Monitor Resolution A 2 Effects of Video Memory on Resolution and Color Depth A 2 Effects of Color Depth on Other Configuration Parameters A 2 Setting Monitor Resolution and Color Depth in the Boot Monitor A 3 Setting Color Depth in Remote Configuration Files A 3 Setting Color Depth in the Console A 4 Color Support for Third Party Applications A 7 8 bit Applications in 8 bit Mode A 7 8 bit Applications in 16 bit and 24 bit Modes A 7 16 bit and 24 bit Applications in 16 bit and 24 bit Modes A 7 Appendix B Setting the Time of Day Overview B 1 Using the time zone Parameter B 2 Using the time offset from gmt Parameter B 2 Setup Menu Equivalents for Configuration Parameters B 3 Ap
244. icense File on a Host When you use incompatible license dat files you must run an instance of Imgrd for each of the license files not required for site licenses To do so 1 Make sure the port number on the SERVER line of each license file is unique 1 For floating licenses only start the appropriate version of Imgrd for a license file see Starting the License Management Daemons on page 3 22 Preparing Terminals for Booting 3 21 Optional Preparations Before Booting Place the incompatible license files and their respective Imgrd programs in different directories and start the programs using the following syntax Imgrd c pathname license dat or Rename the incompatible license files and Imgrd programs to product specific names Specify the non standard license file names using the LM_LICENSE_FILE variable To include more than one license file in the LM_LICENSE_FILE variable separate the license file pathnames by colons for example setenv LM _LICENSE_FILE usr local flexlm licenses ncd license dat usr local flexlm licenses misc license dat Using an Options File The syntax and format of options files are described in detail in FLEXlm documents This section outlines the steps required to use an options file To use an options file you must 1 Create the file 2 Place the file in usr local flexlm options 3 Add the file s pathname to the license dat file Place it in the fourth field
245. ick Reference for more information about xserver default visual See Chapter 12 for information about setting WinCenter parameters In remote configuration files use the xserver color depth remote configuration parameter This parameter is saved in NVRAM and takes effect when you boot the terminal The values for this parameter are 8 bit 16 bit and 24 bit If there is insufficient video memory to support 16 bit or 24 bit color depth the setting defaults to 8 bit color depth when you reboot At 16 bit and 24 bit color depths the default visual setting is Pseudo Color To change the default visual set the xserver default visual remote configuration parameter to a different visual The wincenter colors and xserver initialize web palette colors remote configuration parameters reduce or eliminate colormap flashing when you use NCDware and WinCenter together Colormap flashing at 16 bit and 24 bit color depths is not a problem so these parameters do not apply and are disabled automatically Setting Color Depth and Monitor Resolution Setting Color Depth in the Console In the Console the Setup menu field for setting color depth is Setup Change Setup Parameters X and Graphics Color Depth Changes take effect at boot and are saved in NVRAM Table A 2 Monitor Resolution and Color Depth Settings Resolution pixels Color Depth bits per pixel Automatic Detection DDC This selection appears in the Boot Monitor
246. iding VT320 terminal emulation plus support for color terminals Permits connection via LAT TELNET CTERM and serial protocols The host based application launcher that provides application startup and host access services for NCD local clients Network File System A protocol developed by Sun Microsystems that allows computers to access each other s file systems as if they were local Network Interface Module A removable printed circuit board in an NCD terminal base that contains the Boot Monitor PROMs and network connectors Formerly called a Communications Interface Module An individual device on a network Same as host Non volatile RAM in the terminal s base containing the data for booting NVRAM contents are initially set at the factory and retained when the terminal is rebooted or powered off NVRAM utility OSF Motif outline font Parallel daemon PC card PEP board PPP PROM protocol Quick Start PC card A Boot Monitor utility used to set NVRAM parameters The Open Software Foundation graphical user interface Used by the local NCD Window Manager A font that can be scaled to arbitrary sizes and resolutions it is stored as a set of instructions for drawing curves Terminal resident software used to manage communication over a parallel line An integrated circuit card defined by the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association PCMCIA Provides local memory that can be
247. ients with an rsh or remsh command same as execd Terminal resident daemon that controls a terminal s serial port s Serial Line Internet Protocol A de facto standard protocol for transmitting IP datagrams over serial links See also PPP Simple Network Management Protocol A protocol for monitoring and controlling the activity of devices on a network An executable file that prepares the terminal for the user including such actions as setting the DISPLAY variable loading resources and starting a window manager and other clients subnet subnet mask TCP TCP IP TELNET terminal terminal emulator TFTP tftpboot A physical network within a larger IP network A scheme that allows a site to use a single Internet network for multiple physical networks A hexadecimal number with all 1s in the network and subnet portions of a terminal s IP address and all Os in the remaining portion of the host field Indicates which bits in an IP address identify the physical network Transmission Control Protocol An Internet protocol used by the X Window System to provide reliable data communication Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol A common name for the Internet protocol family The Internet standard protocol for remote terminal connection service An intelligent display device that provides access over a network to applications on different types of hosts simultaneously In X a client
248. ight arrow key to highlight the item Network in the menu bar Figure 9 1 on page 9 16 Use the left arrow key to set the value of Get IP Addresses From to NVRAM Use the down arrow key to highlight Terminal IP Address and backspace to erase the current address and enter the terminal s IP address Follow the instructions in the help text displayed at the bottom of the screen Using a Local File System 9 19 Configuring a PC Card for Booting See Booting Terminals Manually on page 3 29 for more information on manual booting 9 20 Using a Local File System 7 10 11 Use the down arrow key to highlight First Boot Host IP Address and backspace to erase the current address Enter the IP address of the terminal equipped with the PC card Use the down arrow key to highlight Gateway IP Address and backspace to erase the current address Enter the gateway address if any for your network Use the down arrow key to highlight Subnet Mask and Broadcast IP Address and change them to the addresses for your network Use the right arrow key to highlight Done Use the down arrow key to highlight Exit Booting the Remote Terminals The remote terminals must be booted manually the first time At the Boot Monitor prompt gt type the Boot Monitor command for manual booting via NFS gt bn The terminal boots and loads its X server from the PC card Using a Local File System on a Diskette Usin
249. iguration information about Setup menu fields is provided at the end of the chapter Overview This chapter describes how to use a terminal s local file system which can be on a PC card or a diskette The major topics in this chapter are 1 An overview of local file system usage 1 Using the Local File Manager to manage the local file system on a PC card or floppy disk 1 Mounting the local file system on UNIX hosts Configuring terminals and preparing PC cards for Booting a terminal from a local PC card Booting terminals from another terminal s PC card Configuring terminals to use a local file system on a diskette 1 Using the floppy drive For information about using a pre configured NCD Quick Start PC card on a LAN or for XRemote over a serial connection see Using a PC Card in Your NCD Thin Client Device This document is included with the Quick Start PC cards NCD terminals can access files located on a local file system The local file system resides on a PC card installed in the terminal or on a diskette in a floppy drive attached to the terminal Local File System on a PC Card You can use the local file system on a PC card to store the X server and support files needed for booting both the local terminal and other terminals on a local area network or for using XRemote over a serial connection to a host Using a Local File System 9 1 Overview To access the files on a PC card you use the
250. iguration file ahead of any parameters that use hostnames 1 Set the tcpip name server protocol parameter to dns or to both if you want terminals to use IEN 116 name service as well Preparing Terminals for Booting 3 11 Optional Preparations Before Booting 2 Enter the IP addresses of the name server hosts into the tcpip name servers table For example tcpip name servers 192 43 150 001 192 43 150 005 Other name servers may be placed automatically in the tcpip name servers table after the terminal boots Name servers stored in NVRAM Name servers specified in the etc bootptab file Set the tcpip dns default domain parameter to the default domain suffix to be appended to hostnames in searches If you set this parameter you do not have to use the complete domain name when specifying hostnames The suffix is not appended to fully qualified names names that contain all the components of the domain name The default domain suffix is the same as the domain name obtained from the Internet authority For example the line specifying NCD s default domain suffix is tcpip dns default domain ncd com Insert an apply command after the name server parameter settings in the remote configuration file to ensure that the name service is in effect for subsequent parameters that use hostnames Placing Required Files in Non Standard Locations After it loads an X server the te
251. ile 4 Add the DPSVM section to the resulting PSres upr file if that section does not already exist If you invoke makepsres in a directory that does not contain an existing PSres upr file you must include information identifying the location of the VM file To do this add DPSVM to the beginning of the PSres upr file where it lists all sections of the file For example Configuring Display PostScript 17 5 Using DPS Support Files PS Resources 1 0 DPSVM FontAFM FontFamily FontOutline Add the DPSVM section to the file for example DPSVM local VM_3_2_beta2 snf master VM_3_2_beta2 snf When you finish modifying this file it should resemble the following example PS Resources 1 0 DPSVM ColorRendering ContextInit FontAFM FontFamily FontOutline FontPrebuilt DPSVM local VM_3_ 2 beta2 snf master VM_3_2 beta2 snf ColorRendering SDefaultCIE CIE dict19c ColorCIE CIE dict19c dat 5 If necessary modify the dps resource path parameter on all terminals using DPS so the DPS module can locate the resource files For information on setting this parameter see Configuring the DPS Resource Path on page 17 10 6 Reboot the affected terminals so they can read the new PSres upr file 17 6 Configuring Display PostScript Using DPS Support Files The Virtual Memory File The virtual memory file VM_3_2 SNF provides information about the VM Virtual Memory space
252. ile Service Table modules load policy Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters gt Loadable Modules Load Policy pref environment Setup Change User Preferences Immediately No Environment Variables 15 22 Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser 16 Setting Up XRemote Tip Procedures in this chapter provide directions for configuring terminals through remote configuration files For system administrators who use the Console for terminal configuration information about Setup menu fields is provided at the end of the chapter Overview XRemote is NCD s software for running X applications over a serial line although you can use it on an Ethernet or Token Ring network This chapter describes XRemote and shows how to set up the physical connection between the terminal and the host prepare the user s environment for XRemote and set up terminals for XRemote use The major topics in this chapter are An overview of XRemote Requirements for using XRemote Setting up the physical connection Setting up the terminal Setting up XRemote hosts Preparing the user s environment Accessing fonts when using XRemote Using XRemote log files CUUCUCCOCC Providing printing from the Dialer XRemote software consists of a module in the X server and two host resident programs The host resident programs are installed on the boot host when you run ncdinstall The Xremote 1 helper program handles co
253. ile try all matches on open problems accessing files 18 13 FLEXIm see license server floppy drive access via NFS mount 9 8 disk size and format required 9 1 file and directory naming conventions 9 25 hardware installation 9 21 Local File Manager 9 3 to 9 6 ncdfloppy floppy management utility command and options 9 22 to 9 26 defined 9 21 terminal configuration for 9 21 usage 9 22 to 9 26 font management files see fonts alias fonts dir and fonts scale font path see fonts path font server font server adding font servers to the font path 6 11 to 6 12 configuration file defined 6 9 location 6 8 parameters 6 9 to 6 11 configuration parameters 6 9 debug mode 18 21 defined 6 2 directory default 6 8 fonts scale file 6 13 formats recognized by NCD terminals 6 8 installation 6 8 other vendors 6 8 Index 7 Index font server continued outline fonts adding 6 13 defined 6 8 starting 6 11 troubleshooting 18 18 to 18 21 font extended diagnostics 18 11 fonts bitmap adding 6 3 to 6 4 defined 6 1 deleting 6 5 built in defined 6 1 in font path 6 5 purpose 6 5 cache changing size 18 35 disabling 18 35 status information 8 12 CDE requirements 6 7 6 12 DECwindows requirements 18 20 diagnostics 8 6 directories causing X server to read 6 4 deleting 6 5 in font path 4 10 location of 6 2 6 3 location problems 18 11 required permission settings 6 3 DPS fonts 17 8 17 11 files required formats 6 2 6 3 required
254. iles for example usr lib X11 ncd configs Troubleshooting 18 3 Troubleshooting Boot Failures Booting Manually See Chapter 3 for more information about using the manual boot commands including definitions of the options bt file bn file To boot the terminal without changing any of its parameters you can use one of the following manual boot commands Manual Boot from the Local File System To manually boot from the local file system on the PC card gt bl filename where filename is the name of the X server file If you are booting a compressed server be sure to include the bl filename extension Manual Boot Using TFTP or NFS To boot from a host computer using TFTP use the bt command The syntax for this command is terminal_IP host_IP gateway_IP subnet_mask To boot from a host computer using NFS use the bn command The syntax is terminal_IP host_IP gateway_IP subnet_mask You may need to specify the directory name for example tftpboot file Loopback Failure When Booting Manually 18 4 Troubleshooting If the bt command fails and the terminal displays the message external loopback failure there is either an incorrect setting on the interface board a wiring problem in the network or a hardware problem on the interface board The probable causes are described in the following subsections Wrong Switch Setting on the Interface Board If your ter
255. in usr lib X11 ncd dps and then in the default system location path path path The X server looks in the specified directory or directories when loading DPS resource files Configuring DPS Font Access by X Clients To configure your environment so that X clients can access DPS outline fonts complete the following steps Note Ifyou add new outline fonts you must complete all of the following steps If you use only the outline fonts included with the NCDware distribution you need only complete Step 5 Set your current working directory to the directory in which the DPS outline fonts reside by default usr lib X11 ncd dps fonts Make sure that each outline font file has a pfa PostScript Font ASCII extension Use the ncdmkfdir 1 utility to add an entry to the fonts scale file for each link or file created in the previous step nedmkfdir currentworkingdir The fonts scale file which resides in the font directory has an entry for each font file that pairs the file with its XLFD name such as Symbol pfa adobe Symbol Medium r normal 0 0 0 0 P 0 adobe fontspecific ncdmkfdir works well with Adobe outline fonts If you use it on fonts from other sources in which the key values may be Configuring Display PostScript 17 11 Freeing the DPS Cache inaccurate You may have to correct resulting fonts scale file by hand 4 While still in the font directory invoke the ncdmkfontdir utility
256. in the DAEMON line for ncdlmd For example DAEMON ncdlimd etc ncdlmd usr local flexlm options ncdlm opt Starting the License Management Daemons See the Imgrd 1 and nedlicense 1 The ncdinstall program starts the ncdlicense and Imgrd man Pages for Informiation about daemons If you need to start them manually use the command options 5 g commands described in this section The following commands assume the default locations for the daemons 1 For floating licenses and site licenses start ncdlicense fusr bin X11 ned nedlicense c pathname license dat 3 22 Preparing Terminals for Booting Optional Preparations Before Booting For floating licenses only start Imgrd fusr bin X11 ned 1mgrd c pathname license dat If you put the license dat file in a location other than the default you must either set the LM_LICENSE_FILE environment variable to name the location or use the c option and the full pathname of the license dat file to start both daemons The ncdinstall program adds startup line s for the daemon s to your system startup files such as etc re boot or etc re local When you reboot the license server the daemons start automatically If you did not choose to prepare system services while running ncdinstall or you did not use ncdinstall add the relevant startup lines shown in this section to your system startup file Setting Up License Management on WinCenter Hosts This section c
257. inals type q to exit from ncdinstall Modifying Information about Terminals in System Files To modify terminal information in the etc hosts and etc bootptab system files run ncdinstall on the host on which you installed NCDware Tip You cannot use nedinstall to modify system file information about terminals that were added to the network without nedinstall You must modify the files manually Tip You can press Return at most ncdinstall prompts to select the default which appears in brackets following the prompt To modify information 1 Log in as root on the host on which you used ncdinstall to install NCDware In the installation directory type nedinstall From the Main menu select 3 Configure NCD Terminals From the Configure NCD Terminals menu select 3 Modify NCD Terminal To view a list of the terminals that ncdinstall can modify press Return Enter the hostname of the terminal for which you want to modify information ncdinstall displays the current information in the databases for the terminal that you selected and permits you to supply anew model IP address Ethernet address hostname subnet mask gateway NFS server status local file system to export or node license For fields that are Preparing Terminals for Booting 3 27 Configuring Terminals for the Network 10 correct just press Return ncdinstall prompts you for the next field Verify your input and cor
258. ing Reliability 3 5 Booting 3 5 Login Services 3 6 Font Service 3 6 Name Service 3 6 License Service 3 7 Address Discovery Using DHCP and BOOTP 3 7 Supported Option Tags 3 7 Dynamic IP Address Allocation using BOOTP 3 8 The bootptab cfg File 3 8 The bootptab ip File 3 10 Setting Up Domain Name Service for the Terminal 3 11 Verify that DNS Is Enabled on the Host 3 11 Configure the Terminal to Use DNS 3 11 Placing Required Files in Non Standard Locations 3 12 Changing X Server Module Load Policy 3 14 About Module Load Policies 3 14 Changing Module Load Policies 3 15 Putting Modules in a Non Standard Location 3 15 Licensed Features and Types of Licenses 3 16 Managing Node Licenses 3 17 Managing Floating and Site Licenses 3 17 License Management Binaries and Files 3 18 Installing License Management Software 3 19 Specifying License Server Hosts 3 20 Setting Up the license dat File 3 20 Using an Options File 3 22 Contents Starting the License Management Daemons 3 22 Setting Up License Management on WinCenter Hosts 3 23 Configuring Terminals for the Network 3 25 Adding Terminals to the Network 3 25 Modifying Information about Terminals in System Files 3 27 Deleting Terminals from System Files 3 28 Booting Terminals 3 29 Booting from a PC Card 3 29 Rebooting 3 29 Booting Terminals Manually 3 29 Manual Boot from a Local File System 3 30 Manual Boot Using TFTP or NFS 3 30 Setup Menu Equivalents for Remote Configuration Parameters 3 31
259. ing Terminals Using TELNET Tip Passwords are saved in a limited area in NVRAM reserved for saving various strings To conserve space you may want to use a global password SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol A protocol for monitoring and controlling the activity of devices on a network See the NCDware Reference Manual for more information about SNMP To set passwords for accessing a terminal s onfiguration data and User Preferences data 1 Display the Access Control hide box in Setup Change Setup Parameters 2 To set passwords for controlling access to terminal configuration data type passwords in either or both of these fields Config Read Only Password Config Read Write Password 3 To set passwords for controlling access to user preferences data type passwords in either or both of these fields User Preferences Read Only Password User Preferences Read Write Password 4 Toseta global password type a password in the Unit Global Password field The global password applies to terminal configuration and user preference data the Local File Manager which allows you to manipulate files on PC cards and SNMP data and commands 5 Click on Apply at the bottom of the Setup Parameters window to save the password s in NVRAM When viewing parameters through TELNET an unset password has the value nil When set the password is not displayed Instead the value is shown as
260. ing the PC Card for Booting The files needed for local booting from a PC card are 1 A uncompressed or compressed X server with the filename extension bl Compressed servers are recommended for the 4 MB cards uncompressed servers are required if you are using the card to boot remote terminals The ncdinstall installation program automatically installs both compressed and uncompressed X servers on the boot host 1 The loadable modules you need 1 Fonts and font aliases for the user interface and applications Terminal configuration files 4 Acolor database file See the NCDware Release Notes for a complete list of X servers and support files available for your terminal 9 10 Using a Local File System Configuring a PC Card for Booting To install the files 1 On the host prepare remote configuration files for the PC card NCD recommends using ncd_std and ncd_std stp files ncd_std stp is an initially empty file which is used for saving parameter settings from the Setup menus The parameter settings recommended in the ncd_std file are boot desired source local Boot from the PC card config unix directory local configs Use the remote configuration files on the PC card xserver default font path xserver rgb fil local rgb txt read local ncd_std stp 1 local fonts Use the fonts on the PC card Use the color database on the PC card Read the configuration file that incl
261. ing the exec startup commands parameter Starting and Configuring Local Clients 7 9 Starting Local Clients Starting Local Clients You can configure the following ways to start local clients LI Setting up remote configuration files to start local clients automatically at boot time LY Adding local clients to root menus including the default root menu I Configuring XDM session files to start local clients automatically when the X session starts Without configuring anything users can start local clients by I Selecting local client items from Console menus LY Entering local client commands in the dialog displayed by the Start Local Command item in the Console s Utilities menu Some local clients can also be started in other ways For example the Keymap Editor can be started from menu items in the VT320 or 3270 terminal emulator clients Starting Clients Automatically at Boot Time To configure local clients to start automatically at boot time use the exec startup commands parameter in a remote configuration file Tip The commands permitted in the exec startup commands By default exec startup commands parameter are the local client commands listed in Table 7 1 includes the console and login Y d i tons te Gene client behayi clients which start automatically OU cAn USE COMMANA ME OP HONS TO CEINE Ser eave when the terminal boots If exec and appearance by enclosing the command and its options in startup comman
262. inter an HP DeskJet or an HP LaserJet or other PostScript compatible printer ncdprint Use if you are not using a simple ASCII printer an HP DeskJet an HP LaserJet or a PostScript printer 10 4 Using Printers with NCD Terminals Using the Command Line Printing Utilities Setting Environment Variables After installing the printing binaries make sure the directory in which they reside is included in the user s PATH environment variable Make sure the DISPLAY variable is set If you do not set this variable in a startup file users can set the variable in the print utility s command line Using the ncdlp Printing Utility See Chapter 16 for more information about XRemote connections The ncdlp command sends a file to a printer connected to an NCD terminal It does not use the system print spooler nor does it queue printing jobs You can use ncdlp over an XRemote Ethernet or Token Ring connection to a UNIX host Use ncdlp if you are using a simple ASCII printer an HP DeskJet HP LaserJet or a PostScript printer For example to send a file called report to a PostScript printer connected to the terminal on serial port 1 over TCP IP type o ncdlp T ps report When you are using a PostScript printer ncdlp automatically detects whether the file contains PostScript or ASCII data and converts ASCII data to PostScript before sending it to the printer When communicating with the host ove
263. ion gt Auto Save File Name Accessing Windows NT Servers 12 29 Setup Menu Equivalents for Remote Configuration Parameters Table 12 7 Setup Menu Fields for Configuring Windows NT Connections Continued i When Changes Savedin Parameter Setup Menu Field Take Effect NVRAM exec command menu Change Setup Parameters Immediately No Commands and Startup Command Menu exec startup commands Change Setup Parameters Immediately No Commands and Startup Startup Commands ica enable chooser editing None At session No startup ica extended diagnostics Change Setup Parameters Immediately No ICA gt Extended ICA Diagnostics ica retry attempts Change Setup Parameters Immediately No ICA gt Retry Attempts ica wait time Change Setup Parameters Immediately No ICA gt ICA Browser Wait Timeout login default hosts Change Setup Parameters gt Immediately No Login gt Default Hosts login ica enabled Change Setup Parameters gt Immediately No Login ICA section Enable ICA Broadcast wincenter audio Change Setup Parameters gt At session No WinCenter gt Audio Enabled startup wincenter colors Change Setup Parameters gt At session No WinCenter Use WinCenter startup Colors wincenter numcolors Change Setup Parameters gt At session No WinCenter Number of Colors startup 12 30 Accessing Windows NT Servers Setup Menu Equivalents for Remote Configuration Param
264. ion create an ASCII file called etc bootptab cfg that lists Ethernet ranges and IP address ranges for dynamic allocation bootpd reads this file at startup If your network has more than one boot host you should install an etc booptab cfg file on only one of them 3 8 Preparing Terminals for Booting Optional Preparations Before Booting See the bootptab cfg 5 man page for other ether and ip formats The bootptab cfg file contains two types of entries 1 An ether line defines A symbolic name for the range of Ethernet addresses The range of physical Ethernet addresses for which IP addresses can be allocated L An ip line defines The range of IP addresses for automatic allocation Optionally a bootptab format string You must begin each ether and ip line ona separate line and end each with a newline character Separate the fields in each line with either a space or a tab The simplest syntax of the ether line is ether ether_name ethernet1 to ethernet2 neti netn where ether_name Is the symbolic name for the Ethernet range defined in this entry ethernet1 Are the lower and upper limits of ethernet2 Ethernet addresses for which IP addresses are allocated automatically net1 netn Are the symbolic names given to the IP addresses associated with the Ethernet range defined in this ether line The simplest syntax of the ip line is ip netn dns ip1 to ip2 string where netn Is
265. ion Parameters Table 5 1 Setup Menu Fields for Configuring Login Continued When Changes Savedin Parameter Name Console Setup Menu Field Take Effect NVRAM login xdm authentication Setup Change Setup At the start of Yes key Parameters Access Control the X session X Server section XDM Authentication Key login xdm broadcast wait Setup Change Setup Immediately No time Parameters Login Wait for Broadcasts for seconds login xdm broadcasts Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters Login gt What to do with XDMCP Broadcasts term default hosts Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters VT320 Terminal Emulation gt Default Hosts term restrict host choices Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters VT320 Terminal Emulation gt Restrict Host Choices xserver access control Setup Change Setup Immediately No enabled Parameters Access Control gt X Server section Enable X Access Control xserver access control Setup Change Setup At the start of No enabled default Parameters Access Control the X session X Server section Default for Enable X Access Control xserver access control list Not available through Setup Immediately No menus xserver initial x resources Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters X and Graphics gt Initial X Resources Login and X Session Management 5 19 Setup Menu Equivalents for Remote Configuration Paramete
266. ion described configuring Windows NT connections in the Windows Access utility This section describes how to use ICA and WinCenter commands to configure Windows NT connections Summary of Commands for Starting Connections This section describes the commands for starting ICA TCP and WinCenter sessions Some commands reset the X session and some do not It is important to use the correct command for each situation to prevent the user from being left with a blank screen after logging out The directions in the following sections show example commands and which command to use for each method Commands for Starting ICA Connections The commands for starting ICA connections are 1 icaclnt Local client for starting ICA connections Does not reset the X server when the user ends the connection This command is used by Windows Access and should be used whenever the ICA Client is started from an X session The command line options are listed in Table 12 3 Accessing Windows NT Servers 12 13 Other Methods of Starting Windows NT Connections m login c ica Local client for starting automatic ICA connections Resets the X server when the user ends the connection After the terminal boots or the user logs out a new ICA session starts on the specified host If the NCD Window Manager is running a logout dialog box confirms that the user wants to log out If the Window Manager is not running the user is logged out without requesting c
267. ion from one key to another 1 Click on the action 2 While holding down the mouse button drag the action to the desired section of another key 3 Release the mouse button Reassigning Keyboard Functions Using the Keymap Editor 11 5 Writing a Keymap to a File and Applying a Keymap Table 11 1 Functions of Keymap Editor Basic Mode Continued To perform this function Follow these steps Assign an action from 1 Click on the desired action in the Action List the Action List 2 While holding down the mouse button drag the action to the destination key and section 3 Release the mouse button Copy an action from 1 Press the Shift key while clicking on the action one key to another so_ 2 While holding down the mouse button drag the action to a key that both keys have j 3 Release the mouse button the same action Writing a Keymap to a File and Applying a Keymap You can write keymaps to a file and apply keymaps to a window from the Write Translations window These functions are available in both basic and advanced modes Displaying the Write Translations Window To display the Write Translations window 1 Start the Keymap Editor using a method described in Starting the Keymap Editor on page 11 2 2 Select File Write Translations The Write Translations window Figure 11 3 appears 11 6 Reassigning Keyboard Functions Using the Keymap Editor Writing a Keymap to a
268. ions through the NCDware wincenter parameters The attributes you can configure are colormap usage initial window size color depth and whether audio is enabled For more information on the wincenter parameters see About the WinCenter Configuration Parameters on page 12 24 1 Windows NT servers that offer login services These entries result from queries sent by the ICA Client to the master browser and other Windows NT servers For more information see Configuring NCDware for ICA Master Browser Connectivity on page 12 22 4 Temporary connections started manually from the Login Chooser as described in the NCDware User s Guide For Windows NT connections select ICA or WinCenter from the drop down Protocol list 1 Connections listed in the login default hosts parameter For Windows NT connections specify the protocol as ica or wincenter Accessing Windows NT Servers 12 19 Specifying the Keymap For example login default hosts ica pubsnt Technical Publications wincenter eagle General Purpose Server This parameter takes effect immediately and is not saved in NVRAM For more information about the Login Chooser see Chapter 5 Changes to the Login Chooser The following changes were made to the Login Chooser to support Windows NT connections _ Two items were added to the View menu ICA Hosts and WinCenter Hosts 1 Two items were added to the Protocol drop
269. isc usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf 100dpi usr lib X11 fonts pcf dwl100dpi tcp fontsys 7100 Using the NCD Font Server Adding Outline Fonts fonts scale A font directory file that correlates outline fonts with their XLFD name used with the Display PostScript extension Tip A well formed name contains all 14 hyphens and an entry for each field If you do not know what to enter for a field use an asterisk to indicate a wildcard value Try to be as specific as possible to avoid getting unsuitable fonts For details on font names see the Reference Manual To add supplemental outline fonts 1 If you don t already have a font directory for the new fonts use the UNIX mkdir 1 command to create one Make sure that the font directory is on either the boot host or an initial file server If not map the directory to the terminal s default font directory see Putting Fonts on a Non Standard Host on page 6 2 Use the UNIX chmod 1 command to make font files readable by the UID under which the font server is running Copy or move the font files into the font directory Edit the fonts scale file to add the new outline fonts Each field and character must be entered accurately Outline font names must be well formed In addition outline font names must have five zeros in the XLFD fields for pixel size point size horizontal and vertical resolution and width If you are adding fo
270. ities Accessing NCD Support Files and Utilities NCD maintains an archive of utilities that are not included on the NCDware CD ROM and technical tips on numerous subjects related to terminal use To view and retrieve these utilities and articles you can connect to the archive through FTP or NCD s World Wide Web server Using FTP To connect to the archive using FTP 1 Type the command ftp ftp ncd com The following prompt appears Name ftp ncd com your login name After the prompt type the word anonymous or ftp and press Return to display the following prompt Password After the password prompt type your complete e mail address press Return The following prompt appears and you can type FTP commands including help for a list of commands ftp gt Go to the pub ncd Archive directory For a list of files on the server get the Is IR file Depending on the version of UNIX on your host you may need to type a backslash before the IR portion of the filename Using the World Wide Web When connecting through the Web use the URL http www ncd com 18 44 Troubleshooting For utilities and technical tips go to the Service and Support page Contacting Technical Support Contacting Technical Support If you encounter difficulties you can send e mail or a fax to NCD Technical Support or contact them by phone For information about services available from NCD Technical Support contact your NCD
271. l s serial port for printing when the terminal reboots use either printer or serial daemon as the value for the mode field which controls the function of the port at boot time To enable a terminal s serial port for printing immediately use either printer or serial daemon for the current mode which controls how the port is currently being used 10 2 Using Printers with NCD Terminals Connecting a Printer to a Terminal 2 Set the other parameters in the table baud rate data bits stop bits parity handshake and hangup to match the characteristics of the printer The example serial interfaces table in Figure 10 1 enables serial port 1 for printing after the terminal reboots Data bits Handshake serial interfaces table 1 printer printer 9600 8 1 none none none ea tees lk dle Port Baud Current Stop Parity Hangup number rate mode bits Figure 10 1 The serial interfaces table Parameter for Printing The serial daemons table parameter configures the terminal s serial daemon In most cases you do not need to change the defaults Figure 10 2 shows the default table for a terminal with one serial port Make sure that the use serial protocol field is set to false TCP LAT LAT port service service name rating serial daemons table 1 false 87 ERIALD false nil 50 Use serial NCDnet Enable LAT protocol objectname service Figure 10 2 The seri
272. l from booting from these hosts Troubleshooting 18 9 Troubleshooting Boot Failures If X Server Modules Fail to Load ole ole If the Console appears after booting but you cannot start any clients from the Console menu bar the terminal could not find the X server modules Messages resembling the following appear D E ERROPEN error opening tftpboot modshmx wm hmx LD E ERROPEN unable to open module wm NFS or TFTP Problems on the Host If you are using NFS to boot the file system containing the modules may not be exported If you are using NFS as the file service during installation the ncdinstall utility does not configure the TFTP file service If you are using TFTP to boot the TFTP daemon may not be running or the host may be running secure TFTP that is not set up properly Terminal Configuration Problems 18 10 Troubleshooting If the problem is not in NFS or TFTP on the host check the modules directory parameter 1 Make sure that the modules directory parameter is set to the directory that contains the X server modules Setup Change Setup Parameters Loadable Modules gt Loadable Modules Directory or Setup Change Quick Setup Files Loadable Modules Directory 2 Edit the terminal s remote configuration file to correct the parameter 3 Reboot the terminal Terminal Can t Find Other Files Terminal Can t Find Other Files The terminal may boot correctly
273. lay name used by the XRemote helper process Printing from Local Client Menus Several NCD local clients the NCD Terminal Emulator the 3270 terminal emulator the Mosaic Browser and the Applet Viewer use the NCD print APIs application programming interfaces to print via a terminal s serial or parallel port or to a remote host running the LPD print protocol To configure a terminal s print services for local clients you set up a table of available printers in the print lpr servers parameter Each of the local clients that use the print APIs have items in their menus for users to select a printer and send print jobs to the printer queue A local printer does not have to be available in order to accept print jobs The print job is kept in buffers until the printer Using Printers with NCD Terminals 10 9 Printing from Local Client Menus becomes available or the print job is cleared by selecting the appropriate Abort command from the Console for example Abort Parallel Port 1 if the printer is on parallel port 1 There is a limited amount of space in the buffers if that space is used up print requests fail Remote printers on UNIX and Microsoft Windows NT hosts must be available through the LPD protocol For printers on Windows NT systems LPD must be enabled For remote printers on UNIX hosts the terminal must have permission to access the printer server This is usually accomplished by adding the terminal
274. le Host resident configuration files are created when you add terminals using the ncdinstall program Quick Start PC cards purchased from NCD have default configuration files on them To edit configuration files on the PC card make the changes in the Setup menus and write them to the file from the Setup menus By default terminals are set up to write from the Setup Parameters window to the user s configuration file and to the terminal s NVRAM when you click on the Apply button Serial Port Numbers in Parameters 16 10 Setting Up XRemote The parameters used to configure the serial port for XRemote are tables containing one row for each serial port On terminals with only one serial port the port is numbered Port 1 An HMxX terminal may have one two or three serial ports Port 1 is the connector labelled AUXILIARY on the terminal s back panel On terminals with an ESP board the serial Setting Up the Terminal connector on the board is Port 2 If there is a Y connector on the ESP board the A connector is Port 2 and the B connector is Port 3 Configuring the Serial Port Tip The serial interfaces table is saved in NVRAM You may need to reconfigure the following characteristics of the terminal s serial port J The handshake mode should match that of the modem none or rts cts 1 The baud rate should be as high as possible For a direct serial connection set the baud rate as high a
275. le are shown in the following sections Using xauth Interactively The following example shows an interactive session with xauth 1 On the login host use the xauth command to list the authorization keys in use extract the key for the user s terminal and place it in a holding file For example ed HOME xauth Using authority file u JRuser Xauthority xauth gt list ncd5 0 MIT MAGIC COOKIE 4b7641306f456dqd5a7794c6d ncd6 0 MIT MAGIC COOKIE 522e6853394958444652456 xauth gt extract cookie file ncd5 0 1 entries written to cookie file xauth gt q 2 On the other hosts from which the user needs to run clients merge the extracted key into the Xauthority file xauth xauth gt merge cookie file Automating xauth To automate xauth use a command like the following which extracts the authorization key from the current host and merges it into a Xauthority file on another host host2 in this example xauth extract SDISPLAY rsh host2 xauth merge Login and X Session Management 5 11 Using the NCD Display Manager Using the NCD Display Manager This section describes how to use the NCD Display Manager ncddm About the NCD Display Manager The NCD Display Manager is a host based daemon that LJ Enhances terminal security for NFS file access LY Provides environment variables required by local clients such as java and the NCD Mosaic Browser 1 Makes it possible to prevent anyone but the l
276. les ncdinstall creates copies of the original files adding a _O extension to the filename In addition ncdinstall creates two remote configuration files for each terminal See Chapter 4 for information on these files To add terminals to the network 1 Login as root on the host on which you used ncdinstall to install NCDware 2 In the installation directory type nedinstall Preparing Terminals for Booting 3 25 Configuring Terminals for the Network Table 3 4 Information Required to Add a Terminal Data Description Model The terminal model HMX Explora Explora Pro Explora 400 450 or Explora 700 IP address The terminal s Internet address for example 139 43 193 93 Ethernet A physical address set in NVRAM in the factory and printed on a sticker on the address bottom of the terminal base or on the outside of the carton containing the base The Ethernet address is a 12 character string beginning with 0000A7 for example 0000A7123608 Name The terminal s hostname which is a unique name consisting of alphanumeric hostname characters that you assign to the terminal to correspond with its IP address Subnet A 4 part 32 bit mask used to distinguish the subnet from the rest of the IP address mask such as 255 255 255 0 Gateway The IP address of the gateway device You only need to supply a gateway address if the terminal is on a different subnet from the host computer Node If
277. licensed via FLEXIm software use the license dat file supplied by NCD See the following section Using the license dat File from NCD d If you have applications from a vendor other than NCD that use FLEXIm software and you can combine the license dat files see Combining an Existing license dat File with NCD s license dat on page 3 21 1 If you have applications from a vendor other than NCD that use FLEXIm software but the license dat files are incompatible because of differences in how you configure the license software you must install a separate license dat file and run a separate Imgrd for each file on each license server host See Installing More than One License File on a Host on page 3 21 Using the license dat File from NCD For UNIX hosts ncdinstall puts the license dat file in the usr local flexlm licenses directory on the boot host If you change the location of the license dat file you must set the LM_LICENSE_FILE environment variable to the new location For Windows NT hosts copy the license dat file that you obtain from Sales Support to c flexlm See Setting Up License 3 20 Preparing Terminals for Booting Optional Preparations Before Booting See the Imreread 1 man page for more information about using Imreread Tip Always use the newest versions of Imgrd vendor daemons and FLEXIm utilities See the Imreread 1 man page for more information about using Imrere
278. lient command line options 7 7 see also Setup menus Change Setup Parameters Setup key keyboards without a Setup key label 4 14 redefining 7 15 Setup menus Boot Monitor 9 14 18 2 to 18 3 Setup menus Console stp file 4 18 access control 4 28 to 4 29 Setup menus continued Change Quick Setup command and options 7 7 purpose 4 15 Change Setup Parameters command and options 7 7 purpose 4 15 Change User Preferences command and options 7 7 purpose 4 15 changing parameter values 4 16 configuring a remote terminal 4 19 defined 4 2 disabling 4 28 displaying 4 14 field types 4 16 purpose 4 2 saving changes in a file 4 18 saving changes in NVRAM 4 17 see also remote configuration files setup exe 3 19 show connections see Show X Connections Show Memory Console command 7 7 controls 8 10 defined 7 7 8 10 disabling 7 16 information displayed 8 10 show memory see Show Memory Show Statistics Console command and options 7 8 defined 7 8 8 11 disabling 7 16 displaying from a remote terminal 8 13 getting information about statistics displayed 8 11 Show Version Console command 7 7 cutting and pasting 8 9 defined 7 7 disabling 7 16 Index 19 Index Show Version continued information displayed 8 9 purpose 8 8 show version see Show Version Show Wireless Console 13 6 Show X Connections Console command 7 8 defined 7 8 8 11 disabling 7 16 showLocal resource 5 14 SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol for X
279. limitations when using TFTP for file access The tasks required to provide as much functionality as possible for the user are Ly Ly Setting environment variables Setting up browser home directories and user preference files Setting the Environment Variables The environment variables that affect the browser s ability to access user preference files are Tip The USER variable is not set it defaults to nobody and the browser looks for preferences files in usr lib X11 ned users nobody ncdinstall installs empty preferences files in this directory Ly Ly Ly HOME the user s home directory USER the user s login name BROWSER_HOME the browser home directory where the browser looks for its user preference files To set environment variables J USER and HOME environment variables These variables can be set automatically using the NCD Display Manager ncddm See Chapter 5 for information about using ncddm If you are not running the NCD Display Manager you can set these variables in the pref environment parameter BROWSER_HOME variable The default value of this variable is ust lib X11 ncd users USER For example if USER is set to bob the value of BROWSER_HOME becomes usr lib X11 ncd users bob To store browser preference files in the user s home directory set BROWSER_HOME to HOME To store the files in some other location set BROWSER_HOME accordingly 15 8
280. lora 400 450 and Explora 700 terminals are able to sense the network s speed and set this parameter automatically You must reset the Token Ring speed on HMxX terminals if the network speed changes or the terminal s NVRAM is reset to default values The message described in the following Preparing Terminals for Booting 3 3 Setting the Token Ring Network Speed HMX Terminals procedure appears whenever the Token Ring speed is not set or not set to the correct speed W Caution 4 Caution SIIDIDS I Booting a terminal that has an incorrect Token Ring speed setting may disrupt Token Ring network activity To set the Token Ring speed on an HMX terminal 1 3 4 Preparing Terminals for Booting Make sure the terminal is attached to the Token Ring network Power on the terminal The terminal displays a message followed by the Boot Monitor prompt Warning You must use the tr 4 or tr 16 command to specify the token ring speed to be 4 or 16 Mbps The wrong speed may disrupt ring communications gt Type the appropriate tr command to set the Token Ring speed to the speed of the network gt tr 4 or gt tr 16 This command sets the Token Ring speed in NVRAM so you do not need to type the command again unless the network speed changes or you load NVRAM defaults To continue booting type a boot command for example to boot using TFTP gt bt Optional Preparations Before Booting Optional
281. main domain name downloading Two passwords used to control access to the Configuration daemon through TELNET The two passwords control read only and read write access and can be set through options in the Console Digital Equipment Corp s networking software that runs over Ethernet in local and wide area networks Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol an enhanced bootstrap protocol backwardly compatible with BOOTP that provides dynamic IP address assignments without additional terminal configuration The NCDware Diagnostic daemon software that collects NCDware messages and stores them in an internal buffer Messages can be logged to a file or displayed in the Console Messages hide box The screen driven by a single X server The environment variable that tells clients to which display to connect For NCD terminals the DISPLAY variable consists of the terminal hostname followed by 0 Domain Name System A name service in which programs use remote name servers to resolve hostnames into Internet addresses Part of the Internet naming hierarchy that provides each host with a unique name The complete hierarchical name of a host on an Internet network For example bigmachine ncd com See domain The process of transferring files from a host computer to the terminal s memory Glossary 3 Glossary 4 DPS DRCS ESP board Ethernet Ethernet address file service firmware font cache font
282. mand terminals Cu Woes user logs line arguments for ncddm and ncdloguser to specify the in even if the terminal is not th fthe los direct th for th running the current telese l pathname of the log directory see the man pages for the NCDware relevant arguments 3 ncdinstall starts ncddm and runs it in the background For ncddm to start automatically when the host is rebooted put a command line in a system startup script 4 To enable the terminal to query ncddm set the login ncddm enabled parameter to true in a remote configuration file 5 If desired use the login ncddm tcp port parameter to change the TCP port used by ncddm from its default value of 677 6 To implement user based access control which prevents anyone but the user from using rsh to start local clients on the terminal set the exec user access control parameter to true When the user logs in the username home directory UID and GID are retrieved by the terminal Login and X Session Management 5 13 Configuring NCD Terminal Emulator Login Configuring NCD Terminal Emulator Login NCD Terminal Emulator ncdterm The local NCD VT320 terminal emulator which supports color terminals and permits connection via LAT TELNET CTERM and serial protocols Users working on systems that are not running XDM can log in to hosts through the Terminal Host Chooser in the Console Terminals New Terminal Users can display a Terminal Host Chooser t
283. mber and size of the other files stored on the card you may only be able to store a limited number of fonts A minimal set of fonts is built into the X server They allow the terminal to boot and the local clients to run The built in fonts are not usually sufficient to support host based applications To avoid downloading fonts from a host the minimum set of fonts you need are the fonts in the 100dpi and dw100dpi font directories and the following fonts from the misc font directory 10x20 pcf 7x13 pcf 8x16 pcf 6x10 pcf 7x13B pcf 9x15 pcf 6x12 pcf 7x14 pcf 9x15B pcf 6x13 pcf 7x14B pcf olgl10 snf Z 6x13B pcf 8x13 pcf olgl12 snf Z 6x9 pcf 8x13B pcf olgl14 snf Z olgl19 snf Z Tip To place font files on a PC card NCD recommends compressing the fonts yo store on the PC card a Copy all the font files that you want to put on the card Compressed fonts take up less room into one directory on the host From within that on the PC card but load more slowly directory use the UNIX compress command to than uncompressed fonts compress them compress b 12 9 12 Using a Local File System Configuring a PC Card for Booting b Create a fonts dir file by running the following command from within the font directory on the host nedmkfontdir c If you are using font aliases create a fonts alias file in the font directory on the host See Chapter 6 for information about creating this file d Create a directory called font
284. me 3 X Window System User s Guide Valerie Quercia and Tim O Reilly O Reilly amp Associates Inc d Volume 4 X Toolkit Intrinsics Programming Manual Adrian Nye and Tim O Reilly O Reilly amp Associates Inc Contains information about key translations I Volume 8 X Window System Administrator s Guide Linda Mui and Eric Pearce O Reilly amp Associates Inc Biblio 1 Bibliography Biblio 2 Glossary This glossary contains definitions of terms used in this Guide applet ARP ARP cache ASCII AUI cable Auxiliary serial port bitmap font Boot Monitor PROMs A small Java application that can be embedded in another application such as an applet viewer or a Web page Address Resolution Protocol The Internet protocol for translating IP addresses to Ethernet addresses Configurable cache used by NCD terminals to store information about addresses obtained by ARP American Standard Code for Information Interchange Attachment Unit Interface cable Used to connect an NCD terminal s DB 15 Ethernet connector to thick thin or twisted pair or fiber optic Ethernet through a transceiver Serial port located on terminals in the HMX family For attaching a modem printer or other serial device A collection of pre rendered characters in a particular style and size Each bitmap font is stored in a separate file Flash PROMs containing the Boot Monitor in the terminal base Glossary 1
285. memory you can install which kind of SIMMs to use and how to install memory NCD Mosaic Browser Java For information about reducing the amount of memory used by the browser see Changing the Size of the Image and Document Caches on page 15 17 You may need to increase the net minimum data buffers parameter value if you are running Java or running the NCD Mosaic Browser with Java and the NCD Console displays messages like the following TERM F DISPLAY Can t open the display connection UI F NOCONN Unable to connect to display 0 Possible low memory condition Video Player You may need to increase the size of net minimum data buffers if you are running the NCD Mosaic Browser with Java and the Video Player at the same time and the NCD Console displays messages like the following vp error in NCDlibvideo Connect call Connection timed out videoConnect call has failed rc 2 errmsg Can t get connection to 127 0 0 1 on port 6745 exiting Troubleshooting Display PostScript If the DPS Extension Fails to Start If the DPS extension fails to start on a licensed terminal the X server generates an error message and displays it in the Console Messages hide box If the DPS extension fails to start because no license key has been entered no error messages appear the application simply does not access the DPS extension Check Statistics Show Version gt Licensable Features to see if DPS is listed Troubleshooting
286. minal has a NIM Network Interface Module board the network selection button may be in the wrong position It should be pressed in for thin Ethernet and out for AUI Problem in the Wiring or Physical Setup of the Network Use the terminal s network controller chip as follows to test Ethernet transmissions Troubleshooting Boot Failures external loopback test Transmits a test packet on the network If the packet is not successfully transmitted the test reports an error To run this test your terminal must be connected to a properly terminated network 4 5 At the Boot Monitor prompt type ex and press Return The Boot Monitor displays a list of tests it can run To run the external loopback test type 1 and press Return A numbered list of network controller tests appears on the screen Type the appropriate number and press Return If a message other than Pass 00000001 appears on the screen replace network wires replace the external transceiver or move the terminal to another location It s possible that a loose connection somewhere is preventing the packet from being transmitted successfully To return to the Boot Monitor prompt type q and press Return To reset the server type rs and press Return Problems in the Network Interface Board If you find no problem in Ethernet transmissions swap the interface board with another terminal swap the terminal for another to see if the problem is in
287. mmunication between the X server running in the terminal and host resident clients d The xinitremote 1 program is a user command for starting the helper and clients from a startup file Setting Up XRemote 16 1 Overview XRemote can be used LI Over a serial line either a direct connection or through a modem LY Over an Ethernet or Token Ring local area network LAN Figure 16 1 shows a representative XRemote system Printer Ethernet or Token Ring K a a S r Host with XRemote f XRemote X server helper program Figure 16 1 A Local Area Network With XRemote XRemote Over a Serial Connection Tip NCD does not supply PPP or SLIP software for hosts Contact your host XRemote runs in two modes over a serial connection LI Using PPP Point to Point Protocol or SLIP Serial Line or communication server vendor for Internet Protocol either direct or through a modem this software LY Using the proprietary XRemote protocol either through a direct connection or a modem To use XRemote over a serial line the terminal must have an X server on a PC card Quick Start card installed in the terminal base The X server cannot be downloaded over the serial line from a network host 16 2 Setting Up XRemote Overview For information about configuring terminals for use with QuickStart cards see Using a PC Card in Your Thin Client De
288. mulator window you can initial x resources are 08818 ug ike u OW vA erased Instead use xrdb 1 set resources in the xserver initial x resources parameter or in in a session management file resource files For example to load resources after the X session starts xserver initial x resources NCDterm defaultHost lakota If you specify a default host you can set the following resources to further customize the window The autoConnect resource automatically connects the user to the default host Only the login prompt appears in the window no hostname prompt appears For example xserver initial x resources NCDterm defaultHost lakota NCDterm autoConnect true Login and X Session Management 5 15 Configuring NCD Terminal Emulator Login The autoReconnect and exitOnDisconnect resources determine the behavior of the terminal emulator when the user exits L If autoReconnect is true the emulator reconnects to the default host after disconnecting The default value is true L If exitOnDisconnect is true the emulator exits after disconnecting The default value is false Configuring NCD Terminal Emulator Sessions without Login The host based ncdrunterm program opens an NCD Terminal Emulator window on an NCD terminal without requiring login to the UNIX host ncdrunterm starts an NCD Terminal Emulator connection via TELNET to a shell on the UNIX host The host to which the emulator connects is the ho
289. n the requirements of your site you may not want users to change terminal configuration data This section describes the following methods for controlling access to this data I Disabling the Setup menus I Controlling access to the Console and Setup menus through passwords Disabling the Setup Menus See Chapter 7 for details on disabling The easiest way to prevent access to configuration data is to Setup menus and other local clients disable any or all of the Setup menus so that no one can use this method of displaying or changing terminal configuration values The command names to use when disabling the Setup menus are quicksetup setup and pref Controlling Access to the Console and Setup Menus You can require passwords for displaying the Console and for reading or writing a terminal s configuration data through the Setup menus You can set separate passwords for each local client or set a single global password for controlling access to all of them Although you can set passwords directly in remote configuration files it is preferable to set them through the Setup menus Passwords set directly in remote configuration files are not encrypted Controlling Access to the Console To set the Console password 1 Click on the Access Control hide box in the Change Setup Parameters window 2 Type a password in the Console Display Password field 3 Click on Enforce Console Password Locally 4 Click on Apply to sav
290. n the screen Other keys perform a function instead of displaying a character For example an IBM 3270 keyboard has keys labeled with actions such as Clear and Insert The Keymap Editor local client displays a layout of a keyboard and allows you to change the actions or translations assigned to keys For example on the UNIX style 97 key keyboard the Cut action occurs when you press the PF3 key Using the Keymap Editor you can assign this action to another key by simply clicking on the word Cut on the keyboard layout on the screen and dragging it to another key Reassigning Keyboard Functions Using the Keymap Editor 11 1 Starting the Keymap Editor The Keymap Editor provides two modes of operation Qj Basic mode Allows you to reassign actions associated with 3270 or VT320 terminal emulation For example in a VT320 window you can assign the terminal bell to a key so that pressing that key rings the bell Advanced mode Allows you to assign the full set of X keyboard translations for 3270 or VT320 terminal emulation windows In advanced mode for example you can assign multiple actions to a single key Starting the Keymap Editor To start the Keymap Editor Ly Ly See the keymap_editor 1 man page for information on options m From the Console select Terminals gt Keymap Editor From a terminal emulator window select Keys Keymap Editor From a command line use the rsh or remsh command ina UN
291. nager ncddm which can be started by ncdinstall See Chapter 5 for more information about ncddm Table 15 1 lists the setup tasks and indicates whether the task can be done automatically Table 15 2 lists the files for storing user preferences and other information for users 15 4 Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser Setting Up the User s Environment NFS Table 15 1 Browser Setup Tasks NFS Task Done Automatically Setting the environment variables HOME USER and Yes By ncdinstall BROWSER_HOME and ncddm Mounting the browser home directory or user home directory Yes By ncdinstall and ncddm Exporting the browser home directory Yes By ncdinstall Creating individual user directories in the browser home directory No Mounting a directory for temporary storage of helper files No Setting the UID and GID Yes By ncddm Creating preference files for each user Yes By the browser 1 If the browser home directory is the user s home directory or the default usr lib X11 ncd users 2 If the browser home directory is the default usr lib X11 ncd users Table 15 2 Browser Preference Files Preferences File Description nmosaic viewers default Definitions of how to display files such as graphics or word processor files nmosaic hotlist default html The hotlist which is a list of frequently accessed files nmosaic global history html The history list which allows th
292. nd press Alt F12 OPENWINHOME Variable If OPENWINHOME is not set or is set incorrectly 1 When you try to open an image from the ImageTool File Open menu the following error message appears File format not found Use Open As option to choose file 1 If you use Open As to choose a file the following error message appears Error opening usr openwin share images PostScript file ps To solve this problem exit from ImageTool and set the OPENWINHOME variable Restart the application Running PageView 18 40 Troubleshooting Problems with PageView are described in the following subsections No special fonts are required for PageView and you need not set the OPENWINHOME variable Displaying the Images Run PageView from the usr openwin bin directory When prompted by a goto request enter the path to the images for example usr openwin share images PostScript Support Files If the proper support files are not installed images are not displayed Make sure the following files are in the NCD PostScript directory the default directory is usr lib X11 ncd dps CIE dict19c dat InitProc dat NCDFILE MAP PSres upr VM_3_2 snf fonts prebuilts If any of the files are not installed copy them from the NCDware distribution CD ROM Diagnosing Terminal Crashes Colormap Flash You can fix colormap flash problems by clicking in another window and then clicking in the PageView main Window Also try pressin
293. nd remote configuration parameter contains the java command line arguments supplied when appletviewer is invoked The default value of this parameter is java ncd applet NCDAppletViewer You can configure this command line to specify any of the Java command line options listed in Table 14 2 on page 14 6 The string ncd applet NCDAppletViewer is an example of package and class names The package is ncd applet and the class is NCDAppletViewer This string corresponds to the pathname ncd applet NCDAppletViewer Configuring the Properties File 14 4 Configuring and Using Java You can configure appletviewer by creating or editing the hotjava properties file in a user s home directory If the user s home directory is unknown appletviewer looks for a properties file in the java hotjava directory created by ncdinstall Using Java Commands The default properties file contains the following lines Lines beginning with are comments AppletViewer appletviewer version 1 0 firewallSet fals firewallHost firewallPort proxySet false proxyHost proxyPort For example if you are using a firewall uncomment and supply values as follows firewallSet tru firewallHost firewall_host firewallPort firewall_TCP_port If you are using an HTTP proxy instead of a firewall uncomment the appropriate lines and set the following proxyset true proxyHost proxy_host proxyPort proxy_TCP_port Using the
294. nd to reset the terminal when the user logs out Login and X Session Management 5 1 XDM s Purpose and Functions Host resident XDM configuration files control the functions of XDM The most commonly used files are 1 Xsession The systemwide startup script for managing the X session you can also use an individual session management script called xsession I xdm config Resources for the xdm program including pointers to other configuration files such as Xresources 1 Xaccess A configuration file that determines how XDM responds to login queries from the terminal and affects the Login Chooser 1 Xresources A resource file for configuring the login banner Xstartup and Xreset Optional scripts Xstartup executes just before the user s session begins and Xreset executes just before the session ends If you activate the NCD Display Manager while you are installing software with ncdinstall a line is added to each of these files For more information about the NCD Display Manager and the lines added to these files see Using the NCD Display Manager on page 5 12 On terminals installed using ncdinstall XDM displays a login banner from the boot host requesting a username and password for logging in to the host You can configure the terminal to display a Login Chooser for the user to choose a login host After the user chooses a host from the Login Chooser a login banner is displayed 5 2 Login
295. net Engineering Notes name service that provides translation from IP addresses to hostnames One of two hosts that can be specified for downloading a terminal s remote configuration file at boot time The collection of networks and gateways that use the TCP IP protocol family and function as a single cooperative virtual network and connects many businesses universities and government facilities Internet Protocol Part of the TCP IP family of protocols Responsible for network level addressing and routing of datagrams Internet Protocol address The 4 part 32 bit address assigned to hosts so they can participate in the Internet using the TCP IP protocols An Internet address consists of a network portion and a host portion A network programming environment for creating and running embeddable Java applets and standalone applications The label on a keyboard key The assignments of client 3270 or NCD Terminal Emulator actions to keysyms actions are functions specific to each client Key press release events LAT launcher LED local area network LAN Local File Manager local file system login banner low memory threshold magic cookie modifier keys name server Local Area Transport protocol A Digital Equipment Corp communication protocol used in a local area network Used by NCDware for connecting to non X applications A client that provides application startup menus for NCD window
296. net requirement 13 2 terminal configuration 13 2 to 13 5 testing the network 13 8 wireless network 13 1 wm see NCD Window Manager local version World Wide Web browser see NCD Mosaic Browser NCD technical archive 18 44 wr command Boot Monitor 13 4 ws command Boot Monitor 13 5 Index 24 X X extensions color depth A 5 in NCDware 2 4 X resources see resources X X server access control enabling 5 9 to 5 10 actions during booting 3 2 components 2 4 crashes 18 41 to 18 43 defined 2 2 host resident defined 2 4 local defined 2 4 messages see messages X server modules color depth A 1 defined 2 4 directory location 3 15 disabling 3 15 18 36 list of modules where to find 3 14 load policy changing 3 15 load policy defined 3 14 loading at boot time 3 14 loading failure solving 3 16 18 10 loading on demand 3 14 relocating modules 3 16 status information 8 12 name how to determine 8 9 specifying through BOOTP DHCP 3 7 uploading 18 42 see also booting 2 1 Xaccess file defined 5 2 Xauthority file defined 5 10 Xdefaults file 7 18 XDM X Display Manager xsession file 5 6 to 5 7 access control 5 8 to 5 11 broadcast queries 5 4 configuration files 5 2 Index XDM continued configuring login actions 5 3 to 5 5 non standard environment 5 6 standard environment 5 6 debug mode 18 14 defined 5 1 encryption key 5 9 5 10 error messages 18 14 login banner defined 5 2 specifying login hosts 5 3 specifying
297. ng 18 1 Troubleshooting Boot Failures Tip Press Return after each Boot Monitor command Before you reset NVRAM make a note of the following information so you can re enter it in NVRAM if necessary _ The terminal s IP address _ The boot host s IP address The gateway IP address E The name of the X server file and the directory in which it resides To reset NVRAM start the NVRAM utility and type the following commands gt nv NVRAM Utility C adr change location adr D start end display contents load defaults X server return to monitor reload NVRAM values save new values gt gt 1 Load defaults gt gt s Save configuration values Are you sure y gt q Quit the NVRAM utility gt NWO Using the Boot Monitor Setup Menus Tip To boot via NFS in the NVRAM Setup menus you must specify the boot directory with a trailing slash Tip In some cases the terminal does not boot correctly if you insert a leading space in the X server filename 18 2 Troubleshooting The Boot Monitor Setup menus offer a method of quickly configuring the essential parameters for booting and saving them in NVRAM Using these menus is one way of making sure the terminal boots and reads a configuration file if desired 1 In the Boot Monitor press the Setup key or type gt se 2 The initial screen is displayed with names of other screens across
298. ng methods which require no configuration 1 Downloading fonts by the XRemote helper L Ifthe terminal has a PC card installed loading fonts from the card Quick Start PC cards provided by NCD have a large selection of fonts installed on them QO Using built in fonts If the terminal is connected to a LAN or is using PPP or SLIP over a serial line the terminal can access fonts using the following additional methods See Chapter 6 for information on 1 Downloading fonts using NFS or TFTP Terminals downloading ionts UslngiNES oF TETP connected to a LAN or using PPP or SLIP automatically SOEs try this method before trying to download fonts using the XRemote helper If you need to use a special font path 16 16 Setting Up XRemote XRemote Log Files XRemote Log Files for XRemote you can add an xset command to the user s xinitremote file 1 Downloading fonts using a font server Using a font server requires configuration Both the XRemote helper and the clients run by the xinitremoterc startup file send messages to a log file By default the output goes to a log file in the usr tmp directory Log files are named Xremoten where n is a display number assigned by XRemote For example the first terminal to start an XRemote session creates a log file called Xremote1 Two environment variables can be used to redefine the log file directory XRemote first consults the XREMOTETMPDIR environment variable for the n
299. ng the NCD Keymapper Utility See Chapter 11 for information on using the NCD Keymap Editor Using the xmodmap Client keymap The assignments of keysyms to keycodes Keycodes are the codes assigned to the physical keys Keysyms are the actions taken when keys are pressed The xmodmap 1 client remaps keyboards and displays the current keymap If the result of pressing keyboard keys doesn t seem to match the legends on the keycaps you can C1 Check the login scripts for example Xsession or xsession to see if there is an xmodmap command reading in a custom keymap 1 Use xmodmap to display the current keymap table for the keyboard attached to the terminal both alphanumeric and modifier keys Sxmodmap pm pk To check that keycodes are correctly mapped for this keyboard compare the keycode values to those given on a keycode map of the keyboard Troubleshooting 18 23 Window Manager Problems Using the xev Client The xev 1 client displays the X events that occur when you press a key or mouse button To invoke xev enter the following command xev The xev client displays an Event Tester window If you place the pointer in the window and type click the mouse or move or resize the window the corresponding events are displayed in the terminal emulator window When you press a key while the pointer is in the Event Tester window xev displays both key press and key release events including keycode an
300. ning you can start it immediately for example usr bin X11 xdm If the Host is on a Different Subnet If the host is on a different subnet add the host to the login default hosts table in the remote configuration file Check XDM on the Host 18 14 Troubleshooting If XDM is running and the login host is not on a different subnet from the terminal run XDM in debug mode to see XDM error messages usr bin X11 xdm debug 2 Troubleshooting XDM Login Failures Host Is Listed But XDMCP Message Appears If the message No such XDMCP host appears in the Login Chooser when the user attempts to select the host the terminal is not configured to use a name service Possible solutions are m m m The user can type the host s IP address instead of the hostname in the Login Chooser s Host field Configure the terminal for name service see Chapter 3 Add the login host to the terminal s local name cache table tcpip name local cache in the remote configuration file Setup Change Setup Parameters TCP IP Name Service Local Name Cache Host Does Not Respond If the user selected a host in the Login Chooser or typed a host name or IP address in the Host field and the message Asking for host login host not responding appears in the Login Chooser message area the problem is one of the following m See Network Configuration m Problems on page 18 28 if you can t TELNET to the host
301. notices The none methods are L None use stderr L File use the file that is named in error file 1 Syslog use syslogd 8 on systems that support it LI Off no messages and warnings are sent port Integer The TCP port on which the font server listens for 7100 connections 6 10 Configuring Font Service Using the NCD Font Server Table 6 1 Font Server Configuration Parameters Continued Value Type ot Parameter and Default Description scaled bitmaps Boolean Whether the font server should scale bitmaps when an yes application requests it snf format Bit endian How to read SNF format fonts byte endian glyph pad scanline pad msb msb 4 4 NCD format transport String The network protocol Permissible entries are tcpip or tcpip decnet trusted clients List of strings Clients from which the font server can accept nil connections If none are listed the font server accepts any connection Enabling the Font Server To enable the font server add the following line to a host startup file such as ete re local if f usr lib X11 ncd fs config then usr bin Xll ncdfs amp echo n Starting ncdfs fi The font server starts when the host is rebooted Adding Font Servers to the Font Path The terminal accesses font servers through its font path To add one or more font servers to the font path specify the font path using the xserver default font path
302. nsole window can be helpful in solving the problem These following example messages of differing severity levels were issued by the Configuration daemon 1 Informational message The module has performed the activity successfully CONFIGD I IPADDR IP address for this unit 192 40 50 12 1 Warning message The module may have completed some but not all of the requested activity SCONFIGD W BADPASSWD incorrect password entered 1 Error message The module did not complete the requested activity but is attempting to continue CONFIGD E GATEWAYBADNET gateway 89 0 0 1 is not on local net 1 Fatal message The module did not complete the requested activity and cannot continue SCONFIGD F INITUI unable to initialize user interface Getting Information About Terminal Operations 8 3 Console Messages Format of Console Messages See the NCDware Reference Manual X server messages follow the format for explanations of all the X server MODULE L ABBREY full message text messages where MODULE Is the NCDware module issuing the message such as CONFIGD or FILE L Is the message s level of severity I An informational message The module completed its activities successfully W A warning message The module may not have completed all of its activities You should verify the results to see if they were completed correctly E Anerror The module did not complete its activities
303. nt server Binaries for software are provided on the NCDware CD ROM for the supported host systems See the 2 4 Introduction to Thin Client Devices and NCDware NCDware Software NCDware Release Notes for a list of supported hosts and binaries Source code for NCD host software is available at the NCD FTP site For information about downloading files from the FTP site see Using FTP on page 18 44 Introduction to Thin Client Devices and NCDware 2 5 NCDware Software 2 6 Introduction to Thin Client Devices and NCDware 3 Preparing Terminals for Booting Tip This chapter provides directions for configuring terminals through remote configuration files For system administrators who use the Console for terminal configuration information about Setup menu fields is provided at the end of the chapter This chapter describes how to add a terminal to an existing network and prepare the terminal to boot that is to load and execute an X server The major topics in this chapter are m O C O m A description of terminal boot actions Boot preparations performed by ncdinstall Setting the Token Ring speed of HMX terminals Optional boot preparations improving reliability using BOOTP DHCP using NCD s BOOTP dynamic address allocation setting up domain name service relocating required files configuring X server module loading and relocating modules and managing licenses Configuring terminals for the n
304. nts AGD pfa AvantGarde DemiOblique fonts AGDO pfa 17 4 Configuring Display PostScript Using DPS Support Files LJ FontPrebuilt This section identifies the locations of the available hand tuned bitmap fonts It lists each font name and the font location For example FontPrebuilt Courier BoldOblique prebuilts COBO bepf Courier Bold prebuilts COB bepf Courier prebuilts COM bepf Courier Oblique prebuilts Coo bept Creating or Updating the PostScript Resource File The makepsres utility allows you to make a new PostScript resource file or update an existing file The following example shows how to use this utility to update the PSres upr file so that DPS servers can access more fonts 1 Change to the directory to which you will be adding fonts Note NCD recommends that you use a directory under usr lib X11 ncd Otherwise the DPS module may not be able to locate the PostScript resource file If you must place the fonts in another location make sure that each terminal can access the new fonts through its file service table 2 Add the desired fonts to the directory 3 While in the directory invoke makepsres usr lib X11 makepsres makepsres creates a new PostScript resource file in the current directory If the current directory contains an existing PostScript resource file makepsres merges the contents of the existing file with the information from the new fonts and produces a new PSres upr f
305. nts to an existing directory use the Rescan Font Path command in the Console Utilities gt Rescan Font Path to direct the terminal to reread the font directory Configuring Font Service 6 13 Setup Menu Equivalents for the Font Parameters Setup Menu Equivalents for the Font Parameters Table 6 2 lists the remote configuration parameters discussed in this chapter and the corresponding Setup menu field for each This information is provided for system administrators who configure terminals through Setup menus Table 6 2 Setup Menu Fields for Fonts When Changes Saved in Parameter Name Console Setup Menu Field Take Effect NVRAM file service table Setup Change Setup Parameters Immediately No gt File Service gt File Service Table pref font path Setup Change User Preferences Immediately No Fonts gt Current Font Path xserver default font path Setup Change Setup Parameters Immediately No Fonts gt Default Font Path xserver retain font path Setup Change Setup Parameters Immediately No Fonts gt Retain Font Path Across Sessions 6 14 Configuring Font Service 7 Starting and Configuring Local Clients Tip Procedures in this chapter provide directions for configuring terminals through remote configuration files For system administrators who use the Console for terminal configuration information about Setup menu fields is provided at the end of the ch
306. nual boot commands follow gt bt gt bt Xncdhmx gt bn Xnedhmx 192 43 153 226 192 43 153 24 Setup Menu Equivalents for Remote Configuration Parameters Table 3 6 Setup Menu Fields for Preparing Terminals for Booting Table 3 6 lists the remote configuration parameters discussed in this chapter and the corresponding Setup menu field for each This information is provided for system administrators who use the Console to configure terminals bea Saved in Parameter Name Console Setup Menu Field Changes NVRAM Take Effect boot second source Setup Change Setup Parameters gt At boot time Yes Booting Secondary Boot Source boot tcpip second server Setup Change Setup Parameters gt At boot time Yes Booting gt TCP IP Boot Options section Secondary TCP IP Server boot tcpip third server Setup Change Setup Parameters gt At boot time Yes Booting TCP IP Boot Options section Tertiary TCP IP Server boot third source Setup Change Setup Parameters gt At boot time Yes Booting gt Tertiary Boot Source Preparing Terminals for Booting 3 31 Setup Menu Equivalents for Remote Configuration Parameters Table 3 6 Setup Menu Fields for Preparing Terminals for Booting Continued Parameter Name exec startup commands Console Setup Menu Field Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Commands and Startup Startup Commands or Setup Change Quick Setup Session gt XSession T
307. nus TELNET shows the current configuration of a terminal and is most useful for making immediate changes to the current configuration or experimenting with parameter changes You can use TELNET to configure the terminal you are using or another terminal on the network A password is required and users cannot configure terminals through TELNET unless they know the password Boot Monitor Setup Menus Interactive Configuration See Chapter 18 for information on using the Boot Monitor Setup menus The essential parameters for booting a terminal can be set in the Boot Monitor s Setup menus and saved in NVRAM Interaction of Configuration Methods When the terminal boots it reads its configuration data from the following sources and loads the data into its memory 1 First configuration data is loaded from the terminal s NVRAM 2 Information from the BOOTP DHCP configuration file etc bootptab is downloaded to the terminal Much of Terminal Configuration Methods 4 3 Terminal Configuration Overview the data in this file corresponds to terminal configuration parameters 3 Finally the remote configuration file is downloaded Data from the last source to be loaded takes precedence for example data in the remote configuration file takes precedence over data in the bootptab file and data in NVRAM While the terminal is running you can change the terminal s current configuration using the Setup menus or TEL
308. ocation of the DPS resource files By default the files reside in usr lib X11 ncd dps Because the dps resource path parameter recognizes colons as significant characters adhere to the following conventions when assigning values to this parameter 11 Use one colon to separate directory specifications in which DPS resource files reside For example the assignment dps resource path usr coe ps usr lib X11 ncd dps indicates that the DPS module should look first in usr coe ps for a DPS resource file and then in usr lib X11 ncd dps 11 Use two colons to indicate that the DPS extension should look at the system default location for the DPS resource file For example the default entry dps resource path usr lib X11 ncd dps indicates that the DPS module should look first in usr lib X11 ncd dps for a DPS resource file and then in the system default location If you modify this parameter 1 Make sure the file service table equates the directories specified with this parameter with the mount points on the host system m Reboot the terminal so the new values can take effect The dps resource path parameter is not saved in NVRAM 17 10 Configuring Display PostScript Configuring DPS Font Access by X Clients Table 17 4 dps resource path Parameter Possible Values Results default usr lib X11 ncd dps usr lib X11 ncd dps When attempting to locate DPS resource files the X server looks first
309. of the host you want offered for login For example indefinitely to log in to the specified host use the exec startup commands login eagle persist option to the login A x i omand 2 Log out then log in again The terminal displays a login banner from the specified host Login and X Session Management 5 3 Specifying the Hosts Offered for Login Login from the First Host to Respond broadcast query The terminal sends a general query to the network for any host running XDM The other types of queries are direct and indirect which request a response from a specific host An indirect query may also be passed on to another host or result in a list of available hosts To configure a terminal to display a login banner from the first host to respond to an XDM broadcast query 1 In the exec startup commands parameter include login For example exec startup commands login Set the login xdm broadcasts parameter to use the first host that responds For example login xdm broadcasts use first 3 Log out then log in again The first host to answer the terminal s broadcast request displays a login banner Displaying a Login Chooser There are two ways to display a Login Chooser before displaying a login banner Listing Specific Hosts in the Login Chooser for users login default hosts tcp eagle Mktg Sun ncdnet hawk Engr VAX T ep falcon Engr VAX
310. og in on the system console the console may not work properly once you install and configure XDM for the NCD terminals In that case check the Xservers file for a line that begins with 0 and comment the line out Font and Font Server Problems See Chapter 8 for information about configuring messages See Chapter 3 for information about making file systems accessible to the terminal Clients usually print a message if they cannot find a font If it is a warning message the client uses another font Some clients however cannot run without the proper fonts If you are having font problems make sure that the terminal is generating extended font messages and extended file service messages and log the messages to a file The most common font problem is that font directories are not in a file system that is listed in the terminal s file service table file service table parameter Fonts are not accessible unless the font directories are available through the file service table Besides the problem solving information in this section other reasons the terminal may not be loading fonts as it boots are described in Terminal Can t Find Other Files on page 18 11 Terminal Cannot Find Specific Fonts 18 18 Troubleshooting If a client requests a font not known to the terminal the terminal issues the following message unable to open font fontname Font and Font Server Problems See Chapter 6 for more in
311. ogged in user from starting local clients using the remote shell command provided the user logs in through a login service such as XDM ncddm 1 and a helper utility ncdloguser 1 are installed and started on the login host when you use ncdinstall to install NCDware and you select NFS as the file access method ncdloguser records information in a log file for use by ncddm By default the log files are located in the usr lib X11 xdm ncd directory and the name of a log file is the value of the DISPLAY variable without the 0 suffix If ncddm is enabled on the terminal the terminal queries ncddm for the user s name USER home directory HOME and the UID user identification and GID group identification The user s home directory is added to the terminal s file service table but you must arrange to export it from the host The terminal uses this information as follows m The username can be used to prevent anyone but the user who is logged in on the terminal from using rsh and remsh to start local clients Otherwise there is nothing to prevent individual users from doing so although you can use host based access control m The appletviewer command uses the pathname of the user s home directory to find the hotjava properties file The NCD Mosaic Browser needs the user name and home directory to access browser preference files and other files such as the history file and hot list 5 12 Login and X Session Management U
312. omatically Using the time zone Parameter To use the time zone parameter set it to the timezone file for your area By default time zone files are installed in ust lib X11 ncd zoneinfo when you install NCDware using ncdinstall If the files are not in the default location you must specify an absolute path to the timezone file Otherwise you need only specify a relative path Each time zone is represented by a city so you just select the city in your time zone For example in the Pacific Standard Time zone you would specify time zone America Los_Angeles For the US the following files are available in addition to the files for cities America EST5EDT America CST6CDT America MST7MDT America PST8PDT Using the time offset from gmt Parameter B 2 The time offset from gmt parameter specifies the offset in minutes from Greenwich mean time for your time zone To specify a location east of GMT specify the offset as a positive value To specify a location west of GMT specify the offset as a negative value You can also specify this value using BOOTP DHCP Setup Menu Equivalents for Configuration Parameters Setup Menu Equivalents for Configuration Parameters Table B 1 lists the remote configuration parameters discussed in this chapter and the corresponding Setup menu field for each This information is provided for system administrators who use Setup menus to configuration terminals Table B 1 Setup Menu Fields fo
313. on a Diskette Table 9 3 ncdfloppy Commands and Options Continued This command dir w filename 1s w filename Performs this function Displays a DOS like directory listing of the floppy disk files If you omit the filename a listing of the current floppy disk directory appears The w option displays only the filename and omits the size and creation dates exit quit Terminates the ncdfloppy session format f 720 1 label q Creates a new DOS file system on the floppy disk By default this command creates a file system for a 1 44M floppy use the 720 option to format a 720K floppy disk The 1 option specifies a volume label The q option formats more quickly but should be used only if the disk has already been completely formatted and only if you are sure the disk is in perfect condition containing no bad sectors get n m flop file local file get n m flop file local dir Copies a file from the floppy disk onto the local UNIX file system The n option suppresses warning messages about overwriting existing files The m option preserves the original file s modification time help 2 Displays a list of ncdfloppy commands md v directory mkdir v directory Creates floppy disk directories The v option displays a message if you must modify the directory name to fit DOS directory naming requirement
314. on the boot host In the file setup created by ncdinstall the terminal reads both the individual and generic files The generic file contains data that pertains to all terminals on the network Values in a downloaded configuration file override the default values in NVRAM and the X server Terminal Configuration Methods 4 5 Configuring Terminals Using Remote Configuration Files Terminals automatically try to load a terminal specific file If a terminal does not find its specific file it tries to download a generic file Terminals that boot from a network host automatically attempt to load their configuration files from the same host Terminals that boot from a PC card automatically attempt to load a configuration file from the card By default a terminal boots whether or not it can find a configuration file If a configuration file is not found the terminal uses configuration information found in the terminal s NVRAM and the default settings in the X server Host Resident Configuration Files Created by ncdinstall When you use nedinstall to add terminals the following files are created 1 Two terminal specific files The name of the terminal specific file controlled by the system administrator is the terminal s IP address converted to hexadecimal format For example the terminal with IP address 192 40 150 4 has a configuration file named C0289604 The name of the file for the user s configuration data is
315. onding Console Setup menu field for each This information is provided for system administrators who configure terminals through the Setup menus If you change browser preferences or variables click on Apply then start the browser the changes take effect Changes made while the browser is running have no effect Table 15 3 Setup Menu Fields for Browser Parameters When Changes Saved in Parameter Name Setup Menu Field take Effect NVRAM browser auto load Setup Change Setup When the No images Parameters Browser User browser starts Preferences Overrides section Automatically load images browser cache size Setup Change Setup When the No Parameters Browser browser starts General section Cache Size Limit KB browser environment Setup Change Setup When the No Parameters Browser browser starts General section Environment Variables browser ftp proxy host Setup Change Setup When the No Parameters Browser browser starts Network Proxy Settings section FTP Proxy Host Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser 15 19 Setup Menu Equivalents for Browser Configuration Parameters Table 15 3 Setup Menu Fields for Browser Parameters Continued port Parameters Browser gt Network Proxy Settings section HTTP Proxy Host Port browser starts When Changes Saved in Parameter Name Setup Menu Field take Effect NVRAM browser ftp proxy host
316. onfirmation You can use all of the options of the icaclnt command put the options after c ica Other options for the login command are ignored Table 12 3 explains all of the options for the login c ica and icaclnt commands Note that all options have short forms for example title can be written as ti The only required option is the name or IP address of the server Table 12 3 Command Options for the icacint and login c ica Commands Name h ost nt_server Description The name or IP address of the Windows NT server or the name of the published application To use a name instead of an IP address the server must have DNS Domain Name System enabled The host option is optional you can simply supply the server hostname or IP address help Causes the command to print out a message describing its options in the Console Message area ca che kilobytes The size of the cache used for video display If the terminal does not have enough memory to run the ICA Client decrease the cache size The default value is 2048 KB the range is from 0 to 8192 KB c olor 16 c olor 256 The desired number of colors Note that number of colors is controlled by the NT server Even though you specify 256 colors the server may use 16 The default is 256 12 14 Accessing Windows NT Servers Other Methods of Starting Windows NT Connections Table 12 3 Command Options for the icaclInt and lo
317. ontains directions for setting up the WinCenter host as a license server for floating and site licenses The FLEXIm License Server and the NCD License Proxy Server executables are installed in c winnt system32 when you install NCDware This section contains directions for uninstalling the executables Setting Up the WinCenter Host To set up the WinCenter host 1 Install the IPX protocol if it is not already installed This is required for Step 2 a In the Control Panel select Network b Select Protocols and add IPX c When prompted restart the computer 2 Get the host ID of the WinCenter host a Open a DOS prompt window b Run the following command lmutil lmhostid Preparing Terminals for Booting 3 23 Optional Preparations Before Booting If the IPX protocol is not installed this command reports a host ID of ffffffff which is not valid 3 Give the host ID and hostname to NCD Sales Support 650 694 0650 Sales Support will generate a license dat file and e mail it to you 4 Copy the license dat file to c flexlm license dat If you put the license dat file somewhere else you must create a system environment variable for it as follows a b c d e In the Control Panel select System On the Environment tab select any system variable Enter LM_LICENSE_FILE in the variable field Enter the absolute path to the license dat file in the Value field Click oK 5 Restart the WinC
318. ontrol enabled Setup Change Setup Parameters Access Control File Manager section gt Enable File Manager Access Control Immediately file manager access control list Setup Change Setup Parameters Access Control File Manager section gt File Manager Access Control List Immediately file manager password Setup Change Setup Parameters Access Control File Manager section Password Immediately Yes Using a Local File System 9 27 Setup Menu Equivalents for Local File System Parameters Table 9 4 Setup Menu Fields for Configuring a Local File System Continued Parameter file manager tcp port Setup Menu Field Setup Change Setup Parameters gt File Manager gt TCP Port Number When Changes Take Effect At boot Saved in NVRAM No file manager telnet port Setup Change Setup Parameters gt File Manager gt Telnet Port Number At boot No file nfs access control default Setup Change Setup Parameters Access Control NFS Section gt NFS Server Access Control Default Immediately file nfs access control list Setup Change Setup Parameters Access Control NFS Section gt NFS Server Access Control List Immediately file service table Setup Change Setup Parameters gt File Service gt File Service Table Immediately No parallel daemons table Setup Change Setup Param
319. or more information about statistics Tip You can also view the read only configuration parameters using the Terminals menu See Chapter 4 for more information Click on the Show Statistics item to display a window of hide boxes each containing detailed statistics The Update button updates the statistics displayed in the window The Cancel button closes the window Each field displayed in this window corresponds to a read only configuration parameter To find an explanation of a statistical menu field and its corresponding parameter name see the NCDware Reference Manual Getting Information About Terminal Operations 8 11 The Console Statistics Menus Table 8 4 describes the type of statistics in each hide box and lists the name of the corresponding parameter group Table 8 4 Show Statistics Window i Parameter x Information Displ Hide Bo Group ormatio splayed Ethernet enet Characteristics and status of the terminal s Ethernet interface Font Usage font Statistics about font usage and the font cache ICMP icmp Statistics about the ICMP protocol IP ip Statistics about the IP protocol Loadable Modules modules Information about the X server modules currently loaded by the terminal NCDnet ncdnet Statistics about terminal communications using NCDnet DECnet NCDnet Name ncdnet Statistics about the NCDnet DECnet name service Service
320. ork If you changed the font path in the pref font path parameter Setup Change User Preferences gt Current Font Path but fonts are still not available the terminal may be having a problem loading files See Terminal Can t Find Other Files on page 18 11 Troubleshooting 18 19 Font and Font Server Problems Using xset to Change the Font Path You can change the current font path using xset 1 If xset displays the error message BadValue unable to set font path the font path is wrong or the font directory cannot be accessed by TFTP or NFS Any font directories that you specify using xset must be available through the terminal s file service table file service table parameter Application Launcher Font Problems The resources menuFont and Font cannot be used to specify different fonts for the title and menus provided by ncdlauncher If both are specified the font specified by menuFont is used for both the menus and the title Host Specific Font Problems If clients are running on a Sun Microsystems system the 75 dpi fonts must be first in the font path The symptom of this problem is that fonts don t fit properly in dialog boxes and other areas HP VUE requires HP fonts Use either the HP or NCD font server with HP VUE For clients running on Digital Equipment Corp computers 1 The dw75dpi and dw100dpi font directories supplied by NCD must be in the font path or 1 The directories for Digital Equipment Co
321. ormation 8 12 Invalid arguments detected XRemote error message 18 33 IP address adding to system files 3 3 3 26 automatic allocation with BOOTP 3 8 to 3 9 converting to hexadecimal filename 4 11 defined 3 26 how to determine 8 9 Index 9 Index IP address continued specifying through BOOTP DHCP 3 8 specifying through the Boot Monitor 9 16 translating to hostname name service 3 11 ip equivalent addresses 18 31 ip extended routing diagnostics generating routing messages 8 6 Setup menu field for 8 14 ip initial gateway 1 18 31 ip initial gateway 2 18 31 ip respond to broadcast icmp 18 29 ip routing table 18 29 ip subnet mask 18 31 J Java applets running 14 3 appletviewer 14 3 to 14 5 applications running 14 5 class files 14 2 14 8 components 14 1 current working directory 14 8 directory for Java Files 14 8 environment variables 14 9 file access protocols 14 3 files and directories installed 14 2 files in non standard locations 14 3 fonts 14 9 hotjava properties file 14 4 14 9 java command 14 5 to 14 9 java home property 14 8 java hotjava directory 14 4 locale supported C locale 14 2 NCDCLASSES 14 8 printing 10 13 14 10 setting properties 14 8 startjava command 14 3 time of day for applets B 1 troubleshooting 18 37 user home directory 14 9 Index 10 Java continued user dir property 14 8 user home property 14 9 using ncddm 14 9 javacommand 14 5 java appletviewer command format of appletvie
322. osis and Actions to Take Check the spelling of the X server filename in the manual boot command or the etc bootptab file or If you are using secure TFTP turn the secure option off or move the X server files to the secure directory or If the boot host is running System V UNIX specify an absolute pathname for the X server file Tftp error 2 Access Violation Check the file permissions on the X server file The permissions should be set so that all have read permission or You are using secure TFTP but the X server file you are trying to load is a symbolic link to another file Secure TFTP cannot interpret symbolic links or TFTP is not enabled properly or is not set up properly on the boot host Failed to mount file system The NFS boot failed because the file system containing the X server file is not exported properly or the file system does not exist FTP timeout OF FTP aborted after 10 retries High network traffic or network problem Make sure TFTP is running on the boot host Try booting again Failed lookup of directory directory Or Could not read symlink pathname in directory directory The NFS boot failed because of symbolic links that do not point to an X server file Access denied for file filename in directory directory The NFS boot failed because the UID is set to the wrong value There may also be a problem with the NFS block size The terminal us
323. osts running xdm make sure that XDM access control is in effect You can specify access control for some or all terminals managed by a host by configuring the xdm config file which is located in usr lib X11 xdm The following line turns on user based access control for all terminals connecting to the host DisplayManager authorize true To enable access control generally but disable it for one or more terminals follow the line above with a line specifying each terminal on which user based access control is disabled For example DisplayManager ncdu85_0 authorize false Conversely to disable access control generally but enable it for one or more terminals include a line disabling access control for all terminals DisplayManager authorize false Follow the line above with an enabling line for each terminal that uses access control For example DisplayManager ncdu85_0 authorize true 2 After configuring the xdm config file send xdm a SIGHUP signal to direct xdm to read the file For example kill HUP cat usr 1ib X11 xdm xdm pid 5 8 Login and X Session Management Controlling User and Host Connections to Terminals XDM AUTHORIZATION 1 3 An authorization method that uses an encrypted key If you are using XDM AUTHORIZATION 1 on any terminals create an xdm keys file in the usr lib X11 xdm directory Each line in this file consists of the Ethernet address of a terminal using XDM AUTHO
324. oting Preparations Performed by ncdinstall Booting Preparations Performed by ncdinstall Tip You can also use RARP for address determination or set the addresses in NVRAM manually When you install NCDware on a host computer ncdinstall s actions include the following preparations for booting 1 Examining the host system and setting up X server downloading and file transfer NFS or TFTP Ifyou select TFTP ncdinstall starts TFTP on the host if it is not already running Ifyou select NFS ncdinstall exports the X server directory and directories containing other files needed by the terminal Examining the host system and if necessary installing and starting BOOTP so the terminal can find its IP address and other important network addresses Examining the host and if necessary installing and starting XDM software for login and session management Examining the host and if necessary installing license management software and adding startup commands to host startup files Adding each terminal s Ethernet address IP address hostname subnet mask and gateway to the BOOTP database etc bootptab and the IP address to etc hosts for address discovery and network participation Setting the Token Ring Network Speed HMX Terminals Before booting an HMxX terminal in a Token Ring network you must set the terminal s Token Ring speed to match the speed of the Token Ring network Explora Explora Pro Exp
325. ours minutes and seconds Some messages may have no time stamps because by default the next time stamp is not written until one second has elapsed This time interval is called the time stamp frequency You can change the frequency with the diag timestamp frequency parameter Specify the number of seconds as an integer Changing the Message Buffer Size The default size of the internal buffer used for logging messages is 8 192 bytes If you are not capturing all the messages you need you can change the size of the buffer with the diag buffer size parameter Specify the number of bytes as an integer Enabling Extended Diagnostics Tip NCD recommends enabling extended font diagnostics only if you have a font problem This parameter generates a large number of messages You can generate more detailed messages for the following 1 To generate more detailed messages about the file service set the file extended diagnostics parameter to true 1 To generate more detailed messages about fonts set the pref font extended diagnostics parameter to true 1 To generate extended diagnostic messages for IP routing set the ip extended routing diagnostics parameter to true 8 6 Getting Information About Terminal Operations X Server Messages Displayed in Dialog Boxes 1 To generate extended diagnostic messages for the ICA Client set the ica extended diagnostics parameter to true All of the
326. out this Manual T NCDware Publications Roadmap high level index of major topics in NCD manuals points the reader to the documents or chapters in which major topics are addressed The following manual is available online at www ncd com and is available as a printed book as a special order a NCDware Reference Manual details about many aspects of NCDware and alternatives to some of the procedures in the System Administrator s Guide Also covers topics either not covered or covered in less detail in the System Administrator s Guide The following manuals are included with the Quick Start PC card Installing a PC Card in Your NCD Thin Client Device how to install and use a PC card with your terminal D NCDware User s Guide introductory manual providing information to assist users in becoming productive with their terminals On line man pages for local and host based clients are installed along with NCDware The FLEXIm End User Manual a detailed description of how to use and configure FLEXIm license management software is available on the NCDware CD ROM in HTML format and online from the following URL www globetrotter com For information about NCD s WinCenter software see the manuals accompanying the WinCenter software For information about tuning NCDware for use with WinCenter see Chapter 12 in this Guide Conventions Used in this Manual Conventions Used in this Manual The following typographic
327. ow manager I Executes the script in the xsession file if the user has an individual xsession file LY Sets up the standard environment if the user doesn t have an individual xsession file ncdinstall installs default Xsession files for the OpenWindows environment for Sun hosts the HP VUE environment for HP UX hosts and the local NCD Window Manager environment for all other hosts The ncdinstall program puts sample Xsession files in the directory ust lib X11 xdm You can use a text editor to edit the configuration files to suit your environment Configuring Individual Environments The default Xsession file checks for a xsession file and executes it Consequently you can use a xsession file for users who do not want to use the systemwide environment When the last client in the xsession file finishes executing the script also finishes executing and the user is logged out 5 6 Login and X Session Management Using XDM to Customize the User Environment When creating or editing xsession scripts follow these rules Tip XDM does not execute login cshre or profile files so environment variables and aliases defined in these files must be replicated in xsession files Set the search path to include all the directories and programs the user needs _ Do not set the DISPLAY variable XDM sets it 1 Run clients in the background unless a client must take effect before another client For example run clients
328. ows Access Via XDM and the Login Chooser only 12 2 Accessing Windows NT Servers Overview and Requirements Table 12 1 Comparison of Connection Methods ICA Client vs WinCenter Continued Aitribute ICA Client WinCenter Color depth 16 colors 4 bit 16 colors 4 bit 256 colors 8 bit 256 colors 8 bit High Color 16 bit True Color 24 bit Window size Full screen Full screen 640x480 640x480 800x600 800x600 1024x768 1024x768 1152x900 1152x900 1280x1024 1280x1024 Custom 1600x1200 Custom Terminal floppy drive accessible No Yes from NT Audio No Yes 1 network About the Windows Access Utility Windows Access is an NCDware utility for choosing a Windows NT session and for configuring sessions Both ICA and WinCenter connections can be configured in Windows Access Microsoft Windows applications that are configured on the Windows NT server to be available from the If the user selects a server from the Windows Access chooser the desktop of the selected server appears in a window on the terminal desktop If the user selects a published application the application opens in a window on the terminal You start Windows Access from the Console Utilities Windows Access Accessing Windows NT Servers 12 3 Overview and Requirements About the ICA Client The NCDware ICA Client is a local client program that uses the ICA protocol to display the desktops of multi user Windows NT
329. owser environment entries as shown in the examples For example to specify an alternate location for the browser help files browser environment NCD NCDM Help_Directory home ncd help The following sections describe some useful browser variables Changing the Size of the Image and Document Caches To make the browser work better on terminals that would otherwise have insufficient free memory you can reset the size of the image and document caches 1 The image cache determines how many HTML objects for example GIFs are kept in memory and defaults to 50 objects 1 The document cache determines how many HTTP pages are kept in memory and defaults to 4 pages On terminals that have little memory you can set these variables to 0 by adding the following rows to the browser environment table NCD NCDM Image Cache Size 0 NCD NCDM Doc_Cache_Size OQ Controlling the Display of Animated GIF Files By default the browser allows animated GIF files to take up to three seconds to display If displaying such a file takes more than three seconds a popup message informs the user that the GIF display was stopped You can configure the amount of time the browser takes to display animated GIFs and whether the popup message is displayed For example to reset the display time to 10 seconds NCD NCDM animation_time_limit 10 To prevent the popup message and display the message on the st
330. ox TCP login manager on host not responding There are 1 local and 6 remote applications running Shutdown windows and logout Kill X Clients Dialog Box The Kill X Clients dialog box Figure 8 3 appears when the X server finds that host based clients are already connected to the terminal when the user is trying to log in ll EJ Clients Q Warning 1 new host based client jumi connected Shut it down host may shut i down anyway Aborts the host Aborts the The host based based client login attempt client remains connected to the X Displays the Show Connections server although popup window listing current XDM may shut down X connections the client anyway Figure 8 3 Kill X Clients Dialog Box The Console Statistics Menus The Statistics item in the Console s menu bar displays the Show menu This section describes the items in that menu Displaying General Information Show Version Click on Show Version to display a popup window that contains information about the terminal and the software running on the terminal 8 8 Getting Information About Terminal Operations The Console Statistics Menus Click the ox button to close the window You can cut and paste from Show Version to other windows LJ Click the left mouse button in a row to select the entire row 1 Click the right mouse button on any row to select all of the text in the window Table 8 2 lists the contents of the Show Version window Table 8 2
331. page 14 8 mx maxheap Sets the maximum size of the memory allocation pool the garbage collection heap to maxheap The default is 3 MB of memory maxheap must be greater than 50 KB By default maxheap is measured in bytes You can specify maxheap in either kilobytes or megabytes by appending the letter k for kilobytes or the letter m for megabytes For example mx5m creates a 5 MB heap The heap is created as soon as the JVM starts and does not grow or shrink so you must have at least maxheap bytes of contiguous memory available noasyncgc Turns off asynchronous garbage collection When activated no garbage collection takes place unless it is explicitly called or the program runs out of memory Normally garbage collection runs as an asynchronous thread in parallel with other threads noverify Turns verification off 1 14 6 Configuring and Using Java Using Java Commands Table 14 2 Java Command Options Continued Option Description oss javastacksize These options do not normally need to be changed except to fix Java ss cstacksize or browser crashes by increasing the stack sizes Each Java thread has two stacks one for Java code and one for C code The ss option sets the maximum stack size that can be used by C code ina thread to cstacksize Every thread spawned during the execution of a Java program has cstacksize as its C stack size The default units for cstacksize are
332. parameter To add font servers to the font path follow the instructions for changing the font path in Changing the Font Path Permanently on page 6 5 Instead of a pathname however use the syntax Configuring Font Service 6 11 Using the NCD Font Server Tip Built ins are the fonts that are supplied with your X server in case downloaded fonts are unavailable tep hostname hostname2 hostnamen port where hostname1 port Is the hostname or IP address of the system on which the font server resides hostname2 and subsequent hostnames are hosts that provide redundancy in case hosts listed earlier are unavailable Is the TCP port on which the font server listens for connections For example the following assignment includes the font server on the host fontsys in the font path xserver default font path built ins tcp fontsys 7100 usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf misc usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf 100dpi usr lib X11 fonts pcf dwl100dpi Placing the font server in the font path directly after the built in fonts is the most efficient method of font access unless you are configuring the font path for CDE Adding Font Servers to the Font Path for CDE When setting up the font path to work with CDE and a font server put the font server last in the font path 6 12 Configuring Font Service xserver default font path built ins usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf m
333. parameter is Setup Change Setup Parameters WinCenter gt Use WinCenter Colors If you are using WinCenter see the discussion in Chapter 12 You can also change the color depth to either 16 bit or 24 bit color to prevent colormap flashing See Appendix A Using 16 bit and 24 bit Color for information on how to set or change color depth using NCDware Application Launcher Problems The line continuation character a backslash at the end of the line does not work in launchrce files You can work around this problem by using a single long line The launcher may generate an error message such as the following when it starts Xlib failed to load locale file usr lib X11 nl1s ISO8859 1 Although the error message appears the launcher still works Troubleshooting 18 27 Network Configuration Problems Network Configuration Problems This section addresses problems with the network s configuration Checking Network Statistics For network performance problems check the network statistics in the Console Statistics Show Statistics Lost Carrier Errors If Lost Carrier errors are reported Statistics gt Show Statistics Ethernet check the following 1 Ifthe terminal is using a transceiver Make sure that it is an Ethernet revision 2 or IEEE 802 3 transceiver Make sure that the transceiver cable type matches the transceiver type Check the transceiver tap and make sure the Ethernet is terminated
334. pendix C Updating the Boot Monitor Overview C 1 Updating the Boot Monitor C 2 Bibliography Glossary Index XXV Contents Xxvi 1 About this Manual Intended Audience This chapter provides basic information about this manual and other NCD publications This manual is intended for a system administrator who is responsible for 1 Setting up NCD thin client terminal software 1 Setting up the terminal user s work environment The manual assumes familiarity with the UNIX operating system the X Window System X and local area networks Ethernet or Token Ring If you are not familiar with X NCD recommends the series of books on X published by O Reilly amp Associates Inc The series includes books for users and for system administrators How to Use This Manual This manual contains information about managing NCD terminals using NCDware 5 1 The instructions in this manual assume that you have used the standard installation script ncdinstall for installing NCDware and installing your terminals While the installation program prepares hosts and terminals for basic usage terminals can be customized in many ways This manual guides you through the configuration methods to use and provides information about customizing the software About this Manual 1 1 How to Use This Manual 1 2 About this Manual The following list briefly describes the information in each chapter Ly m m C
335. permission settings 6 3 fonts alias file 6 4 9 13 18 18 to 18 19 fonts dir file 6 5 18 11 formats recognized by NCD terminals 6 2 18 19 HP VUE requirements 18 20 IBM requirements 18 20 Java fonts 14 9 Index 8 fonts continued location problems troubleshooting 18 11 NCD Mosaic Browser fonts 15 18 on PC cards 9 12 outline fonts see font server path adding CDE fonts 6 7 changing 6 6 to 6 8 changing on a remote terminal 6 6 default 6 6 defined 6 1 font server adding 6 11 to 6 12 rescaning 6 5 setting font directory location 4 10 terminal does not recognize 18 19 using xset to change 18 20 reliability improving 3 6 scaled see font server status information 8 12 substituting 6 4 troubleshooting 18 18 to 18 21 see also font server fonts alias file adding font aliases to 6 4 on PC card 9 13 required font not available 18 19 fonts dir file problems locating 18 11 use in adding bitmap fonts 6 3 use in deleting fonts 6 5 fonts scale file 6 13 FTP access to NCD technical archive 18 44 G gateway adding to system files 3 26 defined 3 26 incorrect specification 18 29 18 31 specifying through BOOTP DHCP 3 7 specifying through the Boot Monitor 9 16 Index Gateway not on same subnet Boot Monitor message 18 6 GID group identification 5 12 5 13 global password defined 4 29 how to set 4 21 H HMX terminals setting the Token Ring speed 3 3 HOME environment variable 5 12 Host IP address timeout Boot Moni
336. plemented by numerous separate modules A module may contain a local client extension library or protocol Modules are listed in the modsmodel doc file where model is the model on which the modules run such as modshmx doc for the HMX family of terminals This ASCII file is installed by ncdinstall in the modules directory described in Putting Modules in a Non Standard Location on page 3 15 Modules are described in the NCDware Release Notes About Module Load Policies By default the terminal loads modules when they are needed and unloads them when the user logs out or when the X server needs memory This load policy is called on demand A terminal can also be configured to load modules at boot time At boot loading is useful for clients that take a long time to load such as the local Motif Window Manager 3 14 Preparing Terminals for Booting Optional Preparations Before Booting Tip You can also disable modules so that they cannot be loaded TELAT mogule must pe ieadedat Disabled clients appear in a dithered grayed out font in the boot to be available for use Console menus Changing Module Load Policies To change server module load policy include the modules load policy parameter in a remote configuration file and list each module whose load policy you want to change This parameter is a table with rows that follow the format name policy where name Is the name of the module as listed in the modules
337. plets and the java local client runs full Java applications While applets are embedded in another application such as appletviewer or a Web browser Java applications run as standalone programs You can start appletviewer by using any of the methods described in Chapter 7 by using Start Local Command or Start Java Applet in the Console s Utilities menu or by using an appletviewer command line Configuring and Using Java 14 3 Using Java Commands Tip The startjava command is especially useful in user startup files or for configuring window manager menus The Start Java Applet menu item opens a dialog box in which you can type the URL of the applet you want to start To display the dialog box using a command line use the startjava command rsh terminal startjava where terminal is the hostname or IP address of the terminal on which you want to display the dialog box The appletviewer command s only arguments are one or more URLs for HTML documents that contain Java applets For example rsh ncdu7 appletviewer http java sun com applets DrawTest examplel html All the applets referenced in the document are downloaded and each is displayed in its own window You can configure appletviewer by configuring the command line and by configuring the properties file The command line options and properties file affect different aspects of the appletviewer Configuring the Command Line The java appletviewer comma
338. quirements Each wireless terminal must have a Proxim RangeLAN2 7200 or 7400 wireless LAN adapter installed The LAN adapter is a PC card with an antenna that functions as an Ethernet network interface without a cable You an purchase LAN adapters from Proxim Inc For wireless use the terminal must have Boot Monitor 2 9 or later which includes the wireless commands and other features for wireless use Configuring a Wireless Terminal 13 1 Installing the PC Card There must be at least one Proxim Access Point connected to a conventional Ethernet network Terminals must have IP addresses on the same subnet as the Access Point Therefore each subnet involved in the wireless network must have its own Access Point s NCDware X servers must be installed on an Ethernet network host that is accessible by the wireless terminals Installing the PC Card For instructions on installing the LAN adapter and antenna see your Explora hardware installation document Configuring the Terminal You can use ncdinstall to add terminals and configure them normally as described in the NCDware CD insert and this manual Terminals boot from the network just as they do when connected to the boot host through an Ethernet cable Terminal configuration when necessary consists of using Boot Monitor commands to 1 Change the domain number if the Access Point is not using the default LI Change the roaming configuration 1 Set the security ID i
339. r 11 4 Reassigning Keyboard Functions Using the Keymap Editor Mapping the Keyboard Basic Mode 1 The Help menu offers two kinds of help Show Help Text displays quick reference information for basic or advanced mode Tip Show Help Key is useful for reading longer key actions that do not fit on the keyboard layout Show Help Key displays all the sections in a keycap next to the trash can First click a key then select Show Help Key from the Help menu As long as Show Help Key is enabled the key cap sections are displayed for each key you click Mapping the Keyboard Basic Mode Use the instructions in Table 11 1 to remap the keyboard in basic mode Use the mouse to select and move actions In most cases you use mouse button 1 typically the left button The changes you make to the keymap are in effect only while the emulator window is open Once you close the window and exit from the emulator the emulator reverts to its default keymap See Writing a Keymap to a File and Applying a Keymap on page 11 6 for information on saving a map and manually or automatically applying the map to an emulator window Table 11 1 Functions of Keymap Editor Basic Mode To perform this function Follow these steps Remove an action from a key 2 While holding down the mouse button drag the action to the trash 3 Release the mouse button 1 Click on the action can Move an act
340. r They are normally located and loaded at run time as needed by the application Class files are organized into functional units called packages 14 2 Configuring and Using Java Using Java Commands Protocols for Accessing Java Files You can use either NFS or TFTP to access Java files For best performance you should use NFS if your Java applications need file system operations you must use NFS Caching Java Files for Better Performance You can set the java cache class file parameter to true to specify that the Java classes shipped with NCDware are loaded and cached in terminal memory Files are loaded into memory when the terminal reboots Enabling class file caching improves performance especially if you are using TFTP instead of NFS but increases memory consumption The default setting for this parameter is false Installing Java Files in a Non Standard Directory See Chapter 3 for information on the file service table If you do not install the files in the default directory you must specify the directory name in the java directory remote configuration parameter or in the java command line For information about java command line options see Using the java Command on page 14 5 If you install Java files in a non standard location make sure they are accessible through the terminal s file service table Using Java Commands Using appletviewer The appletviewer local client runs ap
341. r Configuring Time f When Changes Saved in Parameter Setup Menu Field Take Effect NVRAM time offset from gmt Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Immediately No Time gt Offset from GMT time server Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Immediately No Time gt Time Server time server retries Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Immediately No Time Time Server Retries time server timeout Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Immediately No Time gt Time Server Timeout time zone Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Immediately No Time gt Timezone B 3 Setup Menu Equivalents for Configuration Parameters C Updating the Boot Monitor Overview This appendix explains how to update the Boot Monitor on an Explora 400 450 or 700 terminal On Explora 400 450 and 700 series terminals you can download updated Boot Monitor images from files that you obtain from NCD and install on a network host The latest Boot Monitors at the time this manual was written are included on the NCDware 5 1 CD ROM The ncdinstall installation program installs these files in tftpboot prom Included in the prom directory are ASCII files explaining the new Boot Monitor features From time to time newer versions of the Boot Monitor may be available from NCD s FTP server f caution f f Caution l I Do not turn off power to the terminal while the Boot Monitor is being updated If the
342. r XRemote using the XRemote protocol instead of TCP IP use the x option For example to send a file to a PostScript printer connected to the terminal on serial port 1 ncdlp T ps x report The ncdlp command line options described in Table 10 2 specify 1 The physical port to which the printer is connected the default is serial port 1 4 If the printer is on a remote terminal the name of the terminal 1 The printer type the default is PostScript 1 The formatting of the printed output Using Printers with NCD Terminals 10 5 Using the Command Line Printing Utilities The syntax of the ncdlp command is ncdlp T printer_type i indent 1 length w width r o p parallel_portnum n network_port h ncd_name filename s serial_portnum Table 10 2 ncdip Command Line Options x 10 6 Using Printers with NCD Terminals Option Description Default T printer_type The type of printer Permitted values are ps ps PostScript printer If you send ASCII text to a PostScript printer ncdlp converts the data to PostScript format lj HP LaserJet printer dj HP DeskJet printer ascii Simple ASCII printer i indent The number of columns to indent the text from the left 0 margin on the printed page l length The number of lines that fit onto a printed page 64 60 for HP LaserJet and HP DeskJet w width The number of columns that fit onto a printed page
343. r all terminals Tip In specifying fonts in resources on a command line and in font database files you must follow the X Window System convention of using XLFD X Logical Font Description font names 8 Run ncdmkfontdir 1 in the font directory to build or rebuild the fonts dir file For example cd usr lib X11 fonts 100dpi nedmkfontdir 9 If you want to use the new fonts as substitutes for fonts that you do not have add an entry to the fonts alias file as described in Using Alternate Fonts on page 6 4 10 Add new font directories to the terminal font path as described in Changing the Terminal s Font Path on page 6 5 11 If you are adding fonts to an existing directory use Rescan Font Path Utilities Rescan Font Path to direct the terminal to reread the font directory If an application requires a font that is unavailable it might use an alternate default font that does not look right or it might crash refuse to run or run poorly You can use a fonts alias file to instruct the terminal to substitute a different font called an alias for the one the client requested The font alias need only be in any one of the font directories in the terminal s font path and the alias need not be in the same directory as the aliased font The terminal applies the alias to the other directories it accesses To create a fonts alias file and add an entry 1 If no fonts alias file exists cr
344. r are Ly m m m Performing self tests and displaying results on the screen Reading the terminal s NVRAM for configuration information When booting from the network broadcasting the terminal s physical Ethernet address to the network using DHCP BOOTP or RARP A host that has the terminal s Ethernet address in its network database responds with the terminal s IP Internet Protocol address Other information may be supplied in the host response Sending requests for an X server to the host that responded to the Ethernet broadcast to a host specified in the BOOTP DHCP packet or to a host address set in NVRAM sending the same request over the network to other hosts if the first host does not respond Downloading an X server using TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol or NFS Network File System from the first host that answers the terminal s DHCP BOOTP or RARP request The answering host is called the boot host Executing the X server which controls subsequent terminal actions The X server performs the following default actions to complete the booting process Qj 3 2 Preparing Terminals for Booting Loading a remote configuration file from the boot host and reconfiguring itself accordingly reading the font directories and color database on the boot host Displaying an XDM X Display Manager login dialog box Displaying the Console which provides access to NCDware utilities and commands Bo
345. r client server communications In the X Window System a variable used to set a value defining the behavior or appearance of a client An alternative to using command line options for defining client characteristics A file commonly named Xdefaults used to set many resources at once You can use command line options to override resources set through resource files Glossary 13 X Window System xauth 1 Xauthority XDMCP xterm 1 XLFD xmodmap 1 xrdb 1 xset 1 Glossary 14 A network based graphics window system developed at MIT to allow workstation users to use applications running on multiple hosts NCDware is an optimized implementation of X Version 11 Release 5 Also called X X11 or X11R5 A utility used in host access control when access is required by clients running on hosts other than the user s login host A file created by XDM and used in user based access control for storing magic cookies X Display Management Control Protocol The program that provides XDM services on NCD terminals The standard host based terminal emulator client X Logical Font Description The font name that includes complete specification of the characteristics of a font An MIT X distribution utility that displays and alters the X keyboard modifier map and keymap table X Resource Database Utility An MIT X distribution utility used to load resources from resource files An MIT X distribution u
346. ration and user preferences data Setting Passwords Tip If you have already set password s for using the Setup menus these passwords apply to access through TELNET as well This method is useful for quickly configuring a few terminals from a central location and for testing configuration changes before making them permanent You can interactively display or modify a terminal s configuration parameters while the terminal is running by 1 Starting the NCD Terminal Emulator ncdterm and connecting to the terminal s Configuration daemon or Preferences daemon through its TELNET port or 1 Using a host computer s TELNET utility When using this type of interactive configuration you can use all of the commands used in remote configuration files plus some additional commands Using TELNET you can display the read only parameters as well as the read write parameters You must set a read write password for changing configuration through TELNET There is a default read only password public that permits you to look at but not change configuration data The most convenient way to set passwords is through the Console Setup menus You can set a global password that provides read write access to configuration parameters and other data individual read write and read only passwords to all configuration data and separate passwords for the user preferences parameters 4 20 Terminal Configuration Methods Configur
347. rect any errors Repeat Steps 6 7 and 8 for each terminal you want to modify When you ve finished modifying terminals type q to exit from ncdinstall Deleting Terminals from System Files To delete terminal information contained in the etc hosts and etc bootptab system files run ncdinstall on the host on which you installed NCDware Tip You cannot use ncdinstall to delete system file information about terminals that were not added to the network by nedinstall You must modify the files manually Tip You can press Return at most ncdinstall prompts to select the default which appears in brackets following the prompt 3 28 Preparing Terminals for Booting To delete information 1 Log in as root on the host on which you used ncdinstall to install NCDware In the installation directory type nedinstall From the Main Menu select 3 Configure NCD Terminals From the Configure NCD Terminals menu select 2 Delete NCD Terminal To view a list of the terminals that ncdinstall can delete press Return Enter the hostnames of the terminals to be deleted Place spaces between hostnames Verify your input and correct any errors When you ve finished deleting terminals type q to exit from ncdinstall Booting Terminals Booting Terminals By default when a terminal is powered on or rebooted it requests an X server first via TFTP and then via NFS If the terminal has a PC card with an X
348. rements This section gives an overview of Windows NT connection features and methods Choosing a Connection Protocol NCD terminals can connect to Windows NT servers in two ways WinCenter An NCD product that distributes Microsoft Windows applications to NCD terminal desktops while the applications run on multi user Windows NT servers Current versions of WinCenter include Citrix WinFrame I By using the NCD ICA client can connect to Windows NT servers running WinFrame or MetaFrame Citrix WinFrame is a multi user version of Windows NT 3 51 that distributes the Windows desktop and Windows applications to various clients Citrix MetaFrame allows ICA clients to connect to Microsoft Windows NT Server 4 0 Terminal Server Edition 1 By using WinCenter uses the X protocol instead of the ICA protocol and connects to Windows NT servers running WinCenter Table 12 1 summarizes the differences between using the ICA Client and using WinCenter Table 12 1 Comparison of Connection Methods ICA Client vs WinCenter Attribute Terminal memory ICA Client Uses more terminal memory WinCenter Uses less terminal memory and published applications utility s properties dialog box Network traffic Less network traffic More network traffic NT server software required WinCenter WinFrame or WinCenter only MetaFrame Published applications Yes No Browsing for Windows NT servers In the Wind
349. representative or send e mail to info ncd com Sending E Mail or Faxes to Technical Support Using the Web NCD Technical Support uses an automated system for e mail Send e mail to the Internet address support ncd com or send a fax to 503 641 2959 To ensure that your e mail is answered quickly please provide as much as possible of the information listed under Information to Provide on page 18 46 You can also submit a request through NCD Web Services Go to http www ncd com to reach the Service and Support home page Phoning Technical Support From the U S and Canada you can phone 800 800 9599 and ask for Technical Support International customers can call 503 641 2200 Be prepared to provide as much as possible of the information listed under Information to Provide on page 18 46 Troubleshooting 18 45 Contacting Technical Support Information to Provide 18 46 Troubleshooting Regardless of the method you use to report the problem to a ee ee ee C O O NCD you must have the following information ready Your name and title Company or organization Phone number FAX number E mail address Billing address Shipping address For each hardware item Serial number Description of the problem Type of warranty Standard Express Extended Express Exchange Out of Warranty For a software problem Problem type question enhancement bug crash or other Type of
350. rial or parallel port For information about setting up printing services see Chapter 10 Setup Menu Equivalents for Configuration Parameters Table 16 4 lists the remote configuration parameters discussed in this chapter and the corresponding Setup menu field for each This information is provided for system administrators who use Setup menus to configure terminals Table 16 4 Setup Menu Fields for Configuring XRemote When Changes Saved in Parameter Setup Menu Field Take Effect NVRAM serial interfaces table Setup Change Setup Param Mode takes effect Yes eters gt Serial gt Serial Inter at boot all other faces Table fields take effect immediately ppp slip interfaces table Setup Change Setup Param Immediately No eters gt PPP and SLIP gt PPP and SLIP Interfaces Table ppp interfaces table Setup Change Setup Param Immediately No eters gt PPP and SLIP gt PPP Interfaces Table 16 18 Setting Up XRemote 17 Configuring Display PostScript This chapter describes the DPS Display PostScript X server module The following topics are covered in this chapter Tip L Anoverview of DPS Procedures in this chapter provide directions for configuring terminals through Using DPS support files remote configuration files For system administrators who Information the about Adobe fonts for DPS included on the use the Console for terminal NCDware CD ROM configuration
351. ribution in both outline and AFM formats Table 17 1 Adobe Outline Fonts for Display PostScript Font Family Additional Typefaces Helvetica Bold Oblique Helvetica Condensed Bold Oblique Bold Oblique Times Roman Bold Italic Bold Italic Courier Bold Oblique Bold Oblique New Century SchoolBook Bold Italic Bold Italic Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique Demi Oblique Bookman Demi Italic Demi Italic Palatino Bold Italic Bold Italic Zapf Chancery Zapf Dingbats Symbol 17 8 Configuring Display PostScript Adobe Fonts for DPS Table 17 2 lists the fonts included in the distribution in prebuilt bitmap format Table 17 2 Bitmap Fonts for Display PostScript Font Family Additional Typefaces Helvetica Bold Oblique Bold Oblique Times Roman Bold Italic Bold Italic Courier Bold Oblique Bold Oblique New Century SchoolBook Bold Italic Bold Italic Palatino Bold Italic Bold Italic Symbol Table 17 3 lists the default font locations Table 17 3 Default Locations of Adobe Fonts Font Path Type 1 outline fonts ust lib X11 ncd dps fonts pfa AFM font files usr lib X11 ncd dps fonts AFM afm Prebuilt fonts usr lib X11 ncd dps prebuilts bepf Configuring Display PostScript 17 9 Configuring the DPS Resource Path Configuring the DPS Resource Path The dps resource path remote configuration parameter Table 17 4 specifies the l
352. rides the value in xserver default font path parameter for the duration of the X session For example to add the font directory MyAppFonts to the font path pref font path built ins usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf misc usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf 100dpi usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf dwl100dpi usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf MyAppFonts Configuring the Font Path for CDE Bitmap Fonts This section describes how to configure the font path to work with CDE Common Desktop Environment If you are not using a font server configure the font path as shown in the following example for a Solaris system The CDE fonts may be in a different directory on other systems Note that the 75dpi font directory precedes all other font directories If the font path is not set in this manner the text in dtterm does not look right xserver default font path usr lib X11 nced fonts pcf 75dpi usr dat config xfonts C built ins usr lib X11 ned fonts pcf misc usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf 100dpi usr lib X11 ncd fonts Xol ren ee aren eee If the fonts have been compressed with 16 bit compression recompress them in 12 bit compression mode NCD terminals require 12 bit compression If you are using TFTP make sure the fonts are located under the secure directory Configuring Font Service 6 7 Using the NCD Font Server See Putting Fonts on a Non Standard Host on page 6 2 for more information about the
353. rinter and physical port types TCP port number LY TCP or XRemote connection 1 The name of the terminal if the printer is attached to a remote NCD terminal Table 10 3 nedprint Options Option Action Default Value prot protocol The protocol to use which corresponds to the none prot requires a printer type The permitted values are protocol argument pss PostScript printer connected to a serial port none All other printers tcp port_number For terminals connected to the host by Ethernet Serial port 1 87 specifies the TCP port on which the terminal Serial port 2 5962 listens for connections Serial port 3 5963 10 8 Using Printers with NCD Terminals Printing from Local Client Menus Table 10 3 ncdprint Options Continued Option xport com_port Action For terminals connected to the host by XRemote xport requires a specifies the physical port to which the printer is com_port argument attached If you do not specify xport ncdprint assumes a TCP connection The permitted values Default Value are s1 Serial port 1 s2 Serial port 2 with an ESP board only s3 Serial port 3 with an ESP board only p1 Parallel port 1 p2 Parallel port 2 with a PEP board only ncd_name For terminals connected to the host by TCP IP If the connection is specifies the name or IP address of the terminalto XRemote the default which the printer is connected ncd_name is the disp
354. rminal uses the file service table defined in the file service table parameter for all file access Many types of files may be accessed by the terminal for example remote configuration files and files accessed by local clients such as the NCD Mosaic Browser s user preference files For some files such as remote configuration files the X server uses default pathnames called local mount points and the file service table maps these to the actual locations of the files called file server mount points 3 12 Preparing Terminals for Booting Optional Preparations Before Booting By default the terminal uses the boot host as the initial file server for configuration files fonts the color database file and keysym database files The boot host appears automatically in the file service table You can use the file initial server 1 and file initial server 2 parameters to specify up to two additional initial file servers These file servers also appear automatically in the file service table Use the file initial protocol 1 and file initial protocol 2 parameters to specify the protocol to use for each file server the default is tftp If any files required by the terminal are not located on hosts that are in the file service table or files are not in their default locations configure the file service table parameter to add file server hosts or map the default locations to the actual locations Because of the automatic entrie
355. rp s DECwindows fonts must be in the terminal s font path Otherwise you may have trouble with both line drawing characteristics and other special characters Some IBM applications require IBM fonts use the IBM or NCD font server If you are using CDE for login service fonts may be incorrectly spaced To solve this problem run the host s font server Also see Configuring the Font Path for CDE Bitmap Fonts on page 6 7 and Adding Font Servers to the Font Path for CDE on page 6 12 18 20 Troubleshooting Keyboard and Keymap Problems Font Server Problems If the font server won t start it displays an error message Usually the problem is that a font server is already running and using the port you specified You can run the new font server on a different port If the font server has been working but stops the terminal no longer finds fonts you can restart it The terminal continues to try to use the font server even after the font server is no longer responding You can run the font server in debug mode as follows or check X server error messages nedfs debug Keyboard and Keymap Problems For keyboard problems a good first step is to enter the Boot Monitor and make sure the correct keyboard type and language if applicable is saved in the terminal s NVRAM While in the Boot Monitor press the Setup key or equivalent key combination on keyboards without a Setup key Table 18 4 Boot Monitor Ac
356. rs 5 20 Login and X Session Management 6 Configuring Font Service Tip Procedures in this chapter provide directions for configuring terminals through remote configuration files For system administrators who use the Console for terminal configuration information about Setup menu fields is provided at the end of the chapter Using Bitmap Fonts bitmap font A collection of pre rendered characters in a particular style and size Each bitmap font is stored in a separate file fonts dir A required file that lists all of the fonts in the font directory fonts alias An optional file in a font directory that lists substitutes for unavailable fonts This chapter describes the tasks involved in preparing the host and the terminal so applications can access the fonts they need to run properly on an NCD terminal The chapter describes both bitmap fonts and the NCD font server The major topics in this chapter are 1 Using bitmap fonts including font formats font hosts adding and deleting fonts font substitutions aliasing and configuring a terminal s font path 1 Using the NCD font server including configuring and starting the font server adding font servers to the font path and adding outline fonts The NCDware distribution includes a full set of the standard X Window System bitmap fonts plus the outline fonts used by the font server The instructions in this section assume that the defa
357. ry specified in the host s etc inetd conf file I Remove the r or s option and the secure directory name from the etc inetd conf file and restart inetd 1 Use NFS instead of TFTP for the file transfer protocol TFTP Not Enabled TFTP may not be enabled or running Check etc inetd conf If there is a comment character at the beginning of the line enabling tftpd remove the character Restart inetd by finding its process ID and sending a hangup signal For example ps acx grep inetd orps ef grep inetd 17601 I 0 12 inetd kill HUP 17601 Terminal Can t Find Other Files Next test TFTP on the host by using TFTP to contact the boot host For example cd tmp tftp boot host ip address tftp gt get tftpboot Xncdhmx tftp gt get Xncdhmx Incorrect File Permission Check the file permissions on files not found by the terminal All of the files loaded by the terminal must be readable by all Also check the permissions on the directories containing these files If You Are Using NFS for File Transfers A common problem is failing to export the file system where the files needed by the terminal reside Check the host s NFS configuration files Files Not Installed All of the files loaded at boot time are installed by the ncdinstall installation program If you don t use ncdinstall to install your software or terminals contact Technical Support for information about configuring hosts and termin
358. s Using a Local File System 9 23 Using a Local File System on a Diskette Table 9 3 ncdfloppy Commands and Options Continued This command put n m v x local file flop file put n m v x local file flopdir Performs this function Copies local_file from the local UNIX file system to the floppy disk The n option suppresses warning messages about overwriting existing files The m option preserves the original file s modification time The v option displays a message if you must modify the destination filename to fit DOS file naming conventions The x option suppresses filename expansion of wildcard characters pwd Displays the current floppy disk directory rd directory rm directory rmdir directory Deletes one or more empty floppy disk directories ren v file1 file2 rename v file1 file2 Renames a file The v option displays a message if you must modify the new filename to meet DOS requirements The ncdfloppy Command Line Syntax The complete syntax of the ncdfloppy utility is ncdfloppy where h servername p port command h servername Specifies the IP address or hostname of the 9 24 Using a Local File System terminal to which the floppy drive is connected If you don t specify this option the value of the DISPLAY variable is used to determine which terminal to contact Using a Local File System on
359. s Modem Command Displays Result AT amp A3 OK Displays error code indicators HST LAPM MNP SYNC or NONE and data compression type V42BIS or MNP5 AT amp B1 OK Sets the DTE DCE data rate to the DTE setting AT amp H1 OK Sets flow control to hardware only This allows compatibility with non XRemote uses of the modem AT amp MO OK Sets normal asynchronous mode with no error control AT amp NO or ATEN6 OK Sets the baud rate to default normal link operations or 9600 AT amp W OK Saves settings to the modem s NVRAM Setting Up XRemote 16 7 Setting Up the Physical Connection Setting Up the Host Side Modem 1 Assemble the modem following the instructions in the US Robotics modem user s manual and attach it to the host 2 Use the default switch settings on the back of the modem except set DIP switch 5 up off to enable auto answer so that the modem answers on the first ring 3 Type the modem commands listed in Table 16 3 Press Return after each command Table 16 3 US Robotics Modem Configuration Settings Modem i Resul Command Displays esult AT amp B1 OK Fixes DTE DCE data rate at the DTE setting AT amp H1 OK Enables hardware Clear to Send CTS flow control to ensure that the modem works for both XRemote and non XRemote serial operation AT amp W OK Saves these settings to the modem s NVRAM so you don t have to re enter these commands each time
360. s If the host on which PPP is running is the default gateway you specify this in the same table If the terminal is running on a LAN and a default gateway is already specified do not specify a default gateway here The last field in a row controls compression of TCP IP headers For PPP this should be set to true which is the default value For SLIP set the parameter to true or false depending upon your implementation of SLIP Figure 16 3 shows the default ppp slip interfaces table parameter for a terminal with three serial ports a IP address of the Whether TCP IP host running headers are SLIP or PPP compressed Port ppep slip interfaces table number 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 false true 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 false true 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 false true IP address of the Whether the PPP terminal for SLIP or or SLIP host is a PPP connection default gateway Figure 16 3 The ppp slip interfaces table Parameter 16 12 Setting Up XRemote The ppp slip interfaces table parameter is not saved in NVRAM Setting Up the Terminal Specifying PPP Characteristics The ppp interfaces table parameter controls several PPP operating characteristics The default values are acceptable unless the PPP link cannot be successfully established If the PPP link is not successfully established 1 Set passive mode to true if host side PPP expects to initiate the configuration negotiation
361. s running if using PPP SLIP or a LAN connection Command to start PPP or SLIP if your implementation does not start automatically Serial port to use I Setting the search path to include the XRemote binaries directory Preparing a startup file I Specifying the font access method LI Specifying the directory for the XRemote log files optional 16 14 Setting Up XRemote Preparing the User s Environment Setting the User s Search Path Revise the user s PATH environment variable to include the directory in which xinitremote and Xremote reside Usually these binaries are installed in usr bin X11 ncd when you install NCDware Creating the User s Startup Files When it starts XRemote runs any clients listed in an XRemote startup file You can set up startup files to specify the clients to start and to customize the helper About Startup Files XRemote attempts to execute whichever of the following files it finds first OA file referenced by the environment variable XINITRC 1 The xinitremoterc file in the user s home directory 1 The xinitre file in the user s home directory included for compatibility with older versions of XRemote If none of these files exist XRemote starts an xterm terminal emulator window by running the following command xterm geometry 1 1 n login Creating Startup Files Use the following guidelines in creating startup files 1 Use the same syntax you wo
362. s control list for both Figure 5 2 Specifying Hosts Permitted X Server Access Login and X Session Management 5 9 Controlling User and Host Connections to Terminals To make sure that only clients with the authorization key can connect to the X server the access control list must be empty xserver access control list Ifitis acceptable for clients without the authorization key to connect to the X server list the hosts on which the clients reside in the access control list If users must start clients on hosts other than the login host and user home directories are not shared you must take steps to permit these clients to connect to the server See Controlling Access When Clients Are Running on Multiple Hosts Tip The encryption key is displayed in the Change Setup Parameters window as a series of asterisks When viewing configuration data using TELNET the value of the parameter is lt get protected gt if set and nil if not set 3 For terminals using XDM AUTHORIZATION 1 set the encryption key in the Console Setup Change Setup Parameters Access Control gt X Server section XDM Authentication Key It must be the same encryption key that you put in the xdm keys file Changes take effect at the start of the X session and the key is saved in NVRAM Controlling Access When Clients Are Running on Multiple Hosts Xauthority A file created by XDM and
363. s in the table it is best not to directly edit the table Instead add rows to the end of the table as shown in Figure 3 1 To add an entry to the file service table 1 Inthe local mount point field type the default location for example usr local lib X11 ncd configs for remote configuration files 2 Inthe server mount point field type the actual location of the file on the host 3 Enter the name or IP address of the host in the file server field 4 Set the protocol field to NFS or TFTP 5 Leave the remaining fields at their default values unless you have special requirements For information about Preparing Terminals for Booting 3 13 Optional Preparations Before Booting these fields see the Remote Configuration Parameter Quick Reference Local mount point the File server File file service table 1 File server mount point the usr lib X11 ncd configs nil eagle tftp usr local lib X11 nced configs unix 3 30 8192 8192 pathname for the directory or file system containing the files on the file access point used host name access by the X server or IP protocol address file server host j Figure 3 1 The file service table Parameter Changing X Server Module Load Policy Tip The local clients that are not loadable modules are Change Quick Setup Console Lock Screen and Logout They are always available unless you disable them The basic X server is sup
364. s item and allow execution of JavaScript routines set it to enable To prevent execution of JavaScript routines set it to disable Enabling or Disabling Applets The NCD Mosaic Browser automatically runs any Java applets encountered in Web documents The browser java applets parameter controls whether applets are executed when the user loads a Web document In the browser Preference menus Java is enabled The default parameter value is user preference which allows the user to permanently enable or disable this feature by writing to the preference file To prevent the user from permanently changing this preference item and allow applets to be executed set it to enable To prevent execution of applets set it to disable Specifying a Default Home Page There is no default browser home page although the browser displays a file with instructions about how to proceed The default value for browser home page is nil To specify a default home page set the parameter to a URL for example browser home page http www ncd com If you do not specify a URL the user can specify a home page in the browser Preferences menu Specifying Proxy Servers and the Mail Server This section describes the remote configuration parameters for specifying proxy servers and the SMTP mail server These parameters cannot be set from the browser s Preferences menus Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser 15 13
365. s on the card and copy the files from the font directory on the host into the fonts directory on the PC card For example gt mkdir fonts gt cp usr lib X11 ncd fonts tmpdir 10x20 pcf z fonts 10x20 pcf 10 Copy the rgb txt color definition file to the local directory on the PC card For example gt ep usr 1lib X11 ned rgb txt rgb txt 11 Reboot the terminal Preparing the Terminal for Booting This section describes how to set up a terminal to boot froma PC card either a card installed in the terminal or a card on another terminal You need the following information 1 The IP address of the terminal The subnet mask for the terminal if any The broadcast address for the terminal O C O The IP address of the gateway computer for your network if any Booting from a Local PC Card On each terminal that boots from a local PC card you use the Boot Monitor s Setup menus to configure the terminal Using a Local File System 9 13 Configuring a PC Card for Booting Complete the following steps on each terminal Tip 1 You can enter the Boot Monitor after the terminal boots by using the appropriate key combination see Table 3 5 on page 3 30 9 14 Using a Local File System Enter the Boot Monitor To invoke the Boot Monitor while the terminal is booting pressing the Escape key while address requests are being broadcast to the network when the words TFTP loador NFS load appear After you press th
366. s the host can handle For a modem connection set the baud rate as high as the modem to modem baud rate which should be at least 9600 baud To configure the serial port edit the serial interfaces table parameter or add the parameter if it s not already in the remote configuration file Figure 16 2 shows the default serial interfaces table parameter and the fields you may need to change Port serial interfaces table number T 1 terminal terminal 9600 8 1 none none none 2 terminal terminal 9600 8 1 none none none 3 terminal terminal 9600 8 1 none none none we oy ee Baud rate Handshake mode Figure 16 2 The serial interfaces table Parameter Default Settings Configuring PPP and SLIP Characteristics If you are using PPP or SLIP protocol for XRemote you may need to set the following parameters These parameters are not saved in NVRAM so they must be set in a configuration file to become permanent Setting Up XRemote 16 11 Setting Up the Terminal Specifying IP Addresses and the Default Gateway Most implementations of PPP allow address negotiation between the terminal and the host on which PPP is running If your PPP implementation cannot assign the terminal an address enter its address manually in the ppp slip interfaces table parameter This table has a row for each serial port If you are using SLIP you must assign both the host address and the terminal addres
367. sable show however which disables the Show Version Show Memory and Show X Connections items in the Console s Statistics menu You can disable the Show Statistics item by disabling stats The next time you boot the terminal the disabled clients names are grayed out in the Console menu bar or pull down menu In addition to the clients listed in Table 7 1 you can disable the low memory warning by listing the command warning in the exec disabled commands table You can disable the Console so that it neither appears on startup nor is accessible through the Setup key or key combination by including it in the exec disabled commands table Restricting Access to Local Clients from Other Hosts The hostnames or network addresses of hosts with authorized access to local clients You can prevent all users on specified hosts from running local clients on a terminal To restrict access to a terminal s local clients from other network hosts 1 Ina remote configuration file set exec access control enabled to true 2 Define the hosts with authorized access to local clients in the exec access control list parameter Figure 7 1 shows an example exec access control list eagle tcpip eagle ncdnet ncdul0 tcpip falcon ncdnet a The protocol family in use for network communications P Figure 7 1 Specifying Hosts Authorized to Access Local Clients Hosts using both TCP IP an
368. sages 18 32 MetaFrame defined 12 2 Microsoft Windows NT see Windows NT Windows Access modem with XRemote 16 5 to 16 8 modsmodel doc file 3 14 modules see X server modules modules directory location of X server modules 3 16 Setup menu field for 3 32 troubleshooting 18 10 modules load policy browser module names 15 3 load policy changing 3 15 saving memory 18 36 Setup menu field for 3 32 monitor color depth A 2 resolution setting A 2 Motif Window Manager Console command 7 5 customizing root menus 7 11 to 7 12 launcher problems 18 27 slow to start 18 24 starting from xsession 5 7 mount UNIX command use for access to terminal s local file system 9 8 multi homed hosts 18 31 mwm command 7 5 mwm 1 7 12 mwmrc file 7 12 Index 13 Index N name service defined 3 11 IEN 116 3 6 3 11 reliability improving 3 6 status information 8 13 see also DNS Domain Name System named DNS daemon 3 11 NCD Display Manager configuring 5 13 defined 5 12 to 5 13 environment variables obtaining 5 12 log files 5 12 5 13 ncdloguser 5 12 5 13 starting 5 13 use by the NCD Mosaic Browser 15 6 Xstartup and Xreset files 5 13 NCD Mosaic Browser nmosaic global history html 15 5 nmosaic hotlist default html 15 5 nmosaic prefs 15 5 15 16 nmosaic viewers default 15 3 and the NCD Display Manager 15 6 animated GIF display configuring 15 17 applets enabling disabling 15 13 automatic image loading enabling disabling 15 12
369. saved in NVRAM Setting the Number of Retry Attempts The ica retry attempts parameter affects queries to the master browser for login and other services By default the terminal makes one attempt before timing out and you can specify from 1 to 6 attempts This parameter takes effect immediately and is not saved in NVRAM Setting the Timeout The ica wait time parameter affects queries to the master browser for login and other services By default the terminal waits 500 milliseconds before timing out you can specify a wait time of 100 to 5000 milliseconds This parameter takes effect immediately and is not saved in NVRAM Enabling Diagnostic Messages If you are having problems contacting the master browser and want to see more detailed diagnostic messages in the Console you can enable extended messages by setting the ica extended diagnostics parameter to true This parameter takes effect immediately and is not saved in NVRAM Accessing Windows NT Servers 12 23 About the WinCenter Configuration Parameters About the WinCenter Configuration Parameters This section describes NCDware parameters that affect WinCenter s desktop display for both ICA and WinCenter connections These parameters affect 1 The default X colormap helps control colormap flash LY The size of the WinCenter window I The number of colors used by WinCenter 1 Whether audio is enabled The WinCenter parameters take precedence over any similar set
370. se both DNS Domain Name System and IEN 116 name services See Setting Up Domain Name Service for the Terminal on page 3 11 for more information about configuring terminals for name service 3 6 Preparing Terminals for Booting Optional Preparations Before Booting License Service To increase license server reliability specify more than one host as a license server in the unit license agents parameter Place license server binaries and data files on all of the license server hosts For information about license servers see Licensed Features and Types of Licenses on page 3 16 Address Discovery Using DHCP and BOOTP Tip To change the priority of DHCP BOOTP and RARP requests during booting use the Network menu in the Boot Monitor Setup menus See Chapter 18 for information on using Boot Monitor Setup You can use BOOTP DHCP requires Boot Monitor 2 8 or later or RARP to obtain network information for NCD terminals at boot time When you add terminals using ncdinstall the terminals are added to the BOOTP DHCP database the etc bootptab file This section describes the BOOTP DHCP options recognized by NCD terminals For information about using BOOTP to allocate IP addresses dynamically see Dynamic IP Address Allocation using BOOTP on page 3 8 Supported Option Tags NCDware supports the option tags listed in Table 3 1 in the BOOTP DHCP database file Table 3 1 BOOTP DHCP Option Tags
371. sed access to the configuration parameters necessary for booting LI Can be upgraded by downloading a new Boot Monitor image X Servers NCD provides both host resident X servers that are downloaded to the terminal as it boots and local X servers installed on PC cards also called PCMCIA cards in the terminal base PC cards are removable and provide local memory as well as X servers The basic X server is supplemented by a number of separate loadable modules Modules are local clients X extensions or other features T Local clients are application programs that run on the terminal s microprocessor rather than on a host computer Local clients include the ICA Independent Computing Architecture Client the Login Chooser terminal emulators window managers configuration utilities and statistical displays 1 Other loadable features include audio XRemote for using a terminal at a remote site and SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 1 Xextensions include Display PostScript DPS and the X Imaging Extension XIE The following loadable features require the purchase of licenses before they can be used Java the NCD Mosaic Browser OpenGL the CompCore video fast MPEG decoder Starlight Networks StarWorks software support NCDnet the 3270 Terminal Emulator DPS XIE the local Motif Window Manager and XRemote Host Resident Utilities NCD provides host software such as font conversion utilities and a fo
372. ser s Search Path 16 16 Creating the User s Startup Files 16 16 About Startup Files 16 16 Creating Startup Files 16 16 Configuring the Helper 16 17 Accessing Fonts When Using XRemote 16 17 XRemote Log Files 16 18 Providing Print Services 16 19 Setup Menu Equivalents for Configuration Parameters 16 19 xix Contents XX Chapter 17 Configuring Display PostScript DPS Overview 17 1 DPS Requirements 17 2 Using DPS Support Files 17 3 The PostScript Resource File 17 3 Sections in the PostScript Resource File 17 3 Creating or Updating the PostScript Resource File 17 5 The Virtual Memory File 17 7 The Color Rendering File 17 7 The Context Initialization File 17 7 Adobe Fonts for DPS 17 8 Configuring the DPS Resource Path 17 10 Configuring DPS Font Access by X Clients 17 11 Freeing the DPS Cache 17 12 Setup Menu Equivalents for Remote Configuration Parameters 17 13 Chapter 18 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Boot Failures 18 1 Getting the Terminal Booted 18 1 Resetting NVRAM 18 1 Using the Boot Monitor Setup Menus 18 2 Booting Manually 18 4 Loopback Failure When Booting Manually 18 4 Boot Failure Messages 18 6 If the Terminal Boots from the Wrong Host 18 9 If X Server Modules Fail to Load 18 10 NFS or TFTP Problems on the Host 18 10 Terminal Configuration Problems 18 10 Contents Terminal Can t Find Other Files 18 11 Error Messages 18 11 Solving File Transfer Problems 18 11 If the Terminal Loaded a Configuration File
373. ser 10 12 Printing from the NCD Applet Viewer and Other Java Applications 10 12 Printer Selection 10 13 Default Print Queue 10 13 Printing to a File 10 13 Setup Menu Equivalents for Printing Parameters 10 14 Chapter 11 Reassigning Keyboard Functions Using the Keymap Editor About the Keymap Editor 11 1 Starting the Keymap Editor 11 2 Exiting from the Keymap Editor 11 2 Contents Keymap Editor Window and Menus 11 3 Keycap Sections 11 4 Menu Bar Options 11 4 Mapping the Keyboard Basic Mode 11 5 Writing a Keymap to a File and Applying a Keymap 11 6 Displaying the Write Translations Window 11 6 Writing a Keymap to a File 11 7 Applying Keymaps to Windows on the Desktop 11 8 Applying a Keymap to the Original Window 11 8 Applying a Keymap to All Open Windows 11 8 Importing a Keymap from a File or Window 11 8 Mapping the Keyboard Advanced Mode 11 10 Advanced Mode Menus 11 11 Creating Translations 11 11 Chapter 12 Accessing Windows NT Servers Overview and Requirements 12 2 Choosing a Connection Protocol 12 2 About the Windows Access Utility 12 3 About the ICA Client 12 4 Requirements 12 5 Load Balancing 12 5 About Color Depth 12 5 Methods of Configuring Connections 12 6 Configuring Connections in the Windows Access Chooser 12 7 Adding Connections 12 7 Copying Connections 12 9 Editing Connections 12 11 xiii Contents Deleting Connections 12 11 Saving Connections 12 12 Controlling the Windows Access Dialog
374. server font service Display PostScript A software system that displays graphical information on a computer screen using the same imaging model and PostScript language used for printers and typesetters provides device and resolution independence for interactive displays Downloadable character sets See the Digital Equipment VT320 documentation for more information Ethernet Serial PC board An NCD interface board that incorporates one or two serial communication channels an Ethernet interface and a socket for a PC card A popular network protocol IEEE 802 3 and a physical channel for transmitting data over coaxial twisted pair or fiber optic cable The low level address used by the physical Ethernet network Each device on the Ethernet has a unique physical address assigned by IEEE and the device s vendor NCDware X server software that provides access to host files by an NCD terminal Software routines in read only memory Boot Monitor PROMs in NCD terminals A portion of an NCD terminal s memory used for temporary storage of downloaded fonts Host based software that relieves the X server of all tasks related to downloading fonts it also scales outline fonts NCD X server software that provides fonts to clients fonts alias fonts dir fonts scale gateway GIF global password host hostname ICA ICMP TEEE A database in a font directory that lists fonts to substitute for un
375. server the terminal tries to boot first from the card and then tries TFTP and NFS The terminal boots from the first of these sources that provides an X server Booting from a PC Card Rebooting If you install a PC card containing an X server in a terminal that previously booted from the network the terminal first tries to boot from the network To try booting from the PC card first set the boot desired source parameter to local You can also set this parameter in the Boot Monitor Setup menus in the Boot window See Chapter 18 for more information about the Boot Monitor Setup menus To reboot a terminal select Console Reboot Booting Terminals Manually You can boot a terminal manually from the Boot Monitor prompt gt This is useful when no address determination protocol exists on the boot host you want to boot from a host other than the normal boot host or you want to load a different X server from the one normally loaded By default the terminal displays the Boot Monitor prompt if it cannot locate an X server to load You can invoke the Boot Monitor by pressing the Escape key while address requests are being broadcast to the network when the words TFTP load orNFS load appear After you press the Escape key the Boot Monitor prompt appears To access the Boot Monitor after the X server has started use the relevant key combination listed in Table 3 5 Stopping the Preparing Terminals for Booting 3 29 Bootin
376. servers and to transmit application data between servers and NCD terminals As an application runs its user interface display keyboard and mouse data is intercepted and transmitted between the server and the ICA Client program running on the user s terminal ICA Client features include m m m Support for multiple simultaneous ICA sessions limited only by the installed RAM on the terminal Support for published applications Support for Windows NT server browsing The ICA Client queries the network for servers and Presents servers in the Login Chooser Presents a list of servers and published applications in the Windows Access chooser User specified ICA session window size Support for simultaneous WinCenter and ICA sessions Support for international keyboards both default keymap files and custom keymap files see Specifying the Keymap on page 12 20 Configurable number of retries timeout and extended diagnostic messages for queries to the master browser see Configuring NCDware for ICA Master Browser Connectivity on page 12 22 Load balancing requires WinFrame 1 7 or MetaFrame see Load Balancing on page 12 5 12 4 Accessing Windows NT Servers Overview and Requirements Requirements To use the NCDware ICA Client the following requirements must be met on the Windows NT server WinStation A virtual port on the server that has been configured to allow conne
377. side print utility defined 10 4 using 10 7 to 10 9 ncdquery 18 34 ncdrestartwm 7 11 ncdrunterm see Terminal Emulator ncdrunwm configuration file 7 11 defined 5 7 host based client startup from root menu 7 13 local client startup from root menu 7 13 local window manager startup 7 5 7 11 mwm functions supported 7 12 restarting 7 11 root menu custom men us 7 11 default menu customizing 7 14 use in xsession files 5 7 ncdterm see Terminal Emulator Index 15 Index NCDware components of 2 3 to 2 5 version how to find 8 9 ncdwm see NCD Window Manager host based version net domain channel domain number display 13 3 Setup menu field for 13 3 net minimum data buffers 18 35 18 37 net roaming condition roaming condition display 13 4 Setup menu field for 13 4 network buffer status information 8 12 interface status information 8 12 testing 18 4 statistics displaying 8 11 testing operation of 7 6 18 29 troubleshooting 18 28 to 18 31 network computers defined 2 1 to 2 3 New 3270 Console command and options 7 3 defined 7 3 New CTerm Console 7 4 New Dialer Console 16 6 command and option 7 5 defined 7 5 starting XRemote 16 4 New LAT Console 7 4 New Serial Console 7 5 New Telnet Console 7 4 New Terminal Console 7 3 NFS Network File System booting 3 5 file access 3 13 14 3 15 4 to 15 7 mount command use for local file system access 9 8 security enhancements with the NCD Display Manager 5 12 sta
378. sing the NCD Display Manager Tip If you set the xserver retain x settings parameter to true the UID and GID are not reset to nobody when the user logs out This can cause a security problem by granting unauthorized access to a user s home directory On NCD terminals the UID and GID are used to control NFS file access ncddm gets the UID and GID from the entry for the user in the etc passwd file or from NIS and resets both variables to nobody when the user logs out If ncddm cannot obtain these values the values in the terminal s file nfs uid and file nfs gid parameters are used The default for both parameters is 2 which corresponds to nobody the NFS default anonymous user Setting Up the NCD Display Manager To set up the NCD Display Manager follow these steps Tip 1 Make sure that the user s login host is running XDM or some iain HAS the other login service For XDM make sure that XDM files are ncdloguser login x A command to the XDM installed in the normal locations usr lib X11 xdm and Xstartup file and usr bin X11 Cee ee the 2 Create the log directory usr lib X11 xdm ncd For security i reasons the directory should be writable only by root ncdloguser records user information in this directory for each terminal Tip If you are using CDE Common Desktop Environment or VUE ncdlogusercreates files for all Hewlett Packard s desktop environment use the com
379. sk kbd Swiss French swfrx kbd Swiss German swgerman kbd UK uk kbd English UK uk kbd Figure 12 3 The NCDKbd txt File The default keymap file is us kbd which corresponds to the IBM PS 2 N 97 and N 101 keyboards To create other keymap files you can copy or edit one of the existing files or add a keymap file of your choice to the directory The format for keymap files is the same for both ICA and WinCenter To specify a keyboard For the keyboards listed in the NCDKbd txt file specify the keyboard type in the xserver keyboard type parameter This parameter takes effect at boot time and is saved in NVRAM The keyboard and its keymap must be listed in the NCDkbd txt file 1 For keyboards not listed in the NCDkbd txt file use the keymapfile option to the icaclnt or wincen command to specify the keymap file Accessing Windows NT Servers 12 21 Configuring NCDware for ICA Master Browser Connectivity For example icaclnt h verdi keymapfile my kbd If the keymap file is not in the icakbds subdirectory specify the complete pathname to the keymap file Specifying the Keymap for WinCenter Connections For information about specifying the keymap for WinCenter connections see the WinCenter documentation Configuring NCDware for ICA Master Browser Connectivity This section describes NCDware parameters that affect how the ICA Client communicates with the master browser The master browser is a Windows NT sy
380. ss to local clients 7 16 Setup menu field for 7 19 exec access control list access to local clients 7 16 Setup menu field for 7 19 exec command menu default root menu changing 7 14 Setup menu field for 7 19 exec disabled commands local clients disabling 7 15 saving memory 18 36 Setup menu field for 7 19 exec startup commands automatic Windows NT connections 12 17 in default ncd_std file 4 10 Setup menu field for 7 19 starting clients at boot time 7 10 Index 6 exec startup commands continued starting local clients not listed in Console menus 7 9 with login local client 3 6 5 3 to 5 5 with term local client 5 15 exec user access control Setup menu field for 5 18 7 20 user based access control 5 14 7 17 exitOnDisconnect resource 5 16 Extended ICA Diagnostics Setup menus 12 30 External loopback failure Boot Monitor message 18 4 external loopback test defined 18 5 F Failed lookup of directory Boot Monitor message 18 8 Failed to mount boot message 18 6 Failed to mount file system Boot Monitor message 18 8 file service changing default file locations 3 12 to 3 14 defining initial file servers 3 12 error messages 18 11 file service table defined 3 12 problems locating files 18 11 to 18 13 secure TFTP file service requirements 18 12 terminal configuration for host access 3 13 troubleshooting 18 11 to 18 13 File transfer aborted Boot Monitor message 18 6 ee py filesystem floppy file system exporting 9
381. st on which you enter the command The ncdrunterm program bypasses the standard UNIX user authentication procedures of username and password checking and should be used only on systems that do not require those standard security measures To use nedrunterm The nedrunterm utility must be owned by root The super user must use the chown 1 command to set ownership 1 Set permission to set user ID on execution chmod 4555 ncdrunterm To start an ncdrunterm connection type nedrunterm display DISPLAY ncdrunterm also accepts all NCD Terminal Emulator options except for ctype and host See ncdterm 1 man page for more information about options 5 16 Login and X Session Management Configuring Login to Microsoft Windows NT Hosts Configuring Login to Microsoft Windows NT Hosts You can use the NCD login command to set up automatic connections to Windows NT servers The servers must be running Citrix WinFrame or MetaFrame For an automatic connection to a Windows NT server using the NCD ICA Independent Computing Architecture Client place the following command in the terminal s remote configuration file exec startup commands login c ica hostname where hostname is the name or IP address of the Windows NT server For more information about this and other methods of configuring login to Windows NT servers see Chapter 12 Login and X Session Management 5 17 Setup Menu Equivalents for Remo
382. stem that maintains the browse list and is periodically updated by the other browsers All WinFrame 1 7 or MetaFrame servers automatically function as browsers If you want to use a master browser however you must specifically designate and configure it The ICA Client sends queries to the master browser and uses the response to J Populate the Server and Published Application lists in the Window Access properties dialog box LY Add login hosts to the Login Chooser Queries for available login hosts can be disabled see the next section By default the ICA Client sends queries to find hosts to list in the Login Chooser but such attempts can be disabled See the next section for more information The ICA Client may be unable to reach the master browser because a master browser is not available or the retry attempts and timeout may not be configured properly Disabling Queries to the Master Browser for Login Hosts By default the ICA Client broadcasts login requests These requests are handled first by the master browser If the master browser does not respond the request is handled by other servers 12 22 Accessing Windows NT Servers Configuring NCDware for ICA Master Browser Connectivity If you set the login ica enabled parameter to false queries to the master browser are disabled If you disable login queries the NCDware Login Chooser should appear sooner This parameter takes effect immediately and is not
383. stics Show Statistics Wireless LAN displays wireless network statistics The corresponding remote configuration parameter is pwireless statistics table Displaying Wireless Information using TELNET You can display wireless information and statistics by establishing a TELNET connection to the terminal s configuration data Displaying Access Point LAN Adapter and Signal Information The pwireless interface table parameter reports the following information 11 Wireless domain Access Point name and IP address Channel and subchannel ROM version of the LAN adapter Country code DOO C O Signal strength The corresponding Statistics menu field is Show Statistics gt Wireless LAN gt Interface Table See Chapter 4 for information on using TELNET to display configuration data Displaying Wireless Network Statistics The pwireless statistics table parameter reports wireless statistics The corresponding Statistics field is Show Statistics Wireless LAN Statistics Table Configuring a Wireless Terminal 13 7 Testing the Wireless System Testing the Wireless System The Boot Monitor ex command tests the wireless connection when you enter 1 to select the Network Controller test This test attaches the wireless adapter card to the access point and wraps 100 small packets 84 bytes and 100 large packets 1484 bytes with the Access Point Results are displayed after the test is complete Configuring the Access Point
384. sts B 1 time zone setting B 2 timeouts configuring B 1 time offset from gmt Setup menu field for 14 11 B 3 time zone specifying B 2 time server current time B 1 Setup menu field for 14 11 B 3 time server retries number of attempts to get current time B 1 Setup menu field for 14 11 B 3 time server timeout Setup menu field for 14 12 B 3 time to wait for response B 1 time zone Setup menu field for 14 12 B 3 time zone specifying B 2 TMPDIR variable 16 17 tn3270 see 3270 terminal emulator Token Ring address how to determine current 8 9 how to determine default 8 9 setting TRP speed on HMX terminals 3 3 status information 8 13 touch screen software support for 7 8 touchscreen local client 7 8 troubleshooting 18 1 to 18 43 Index 22 U UDP User Datagram Protocol status information 8 13 UID user identification 5 12 5 13 un command Boot Monitor 18 43 unit license agents adding license servers 3 7 Setup menu field for 3 33 unit license key node licenses 3 17 Setup menu field for 3 33 up command Boot Monitor 18 42 18 43 uploading X server image 18 42 Use WinCenter Colors Setup menus 12 30 USER environment variable 5 12 user home directory returned by the NCD Display Manager 5 12 user preferences establishing a non standard environment 5 6 setting in a ncdprefs file 4 12 setting in a xsession file 5 6 setting in remote configuration file 4 8 username accessing Windows NT files 12 28 returned by
385. system launchre Ore Dole A systemwide mwm file usr lib X11 system mwmrc Sample systemwide menu configuration files system launchre and system mwmirc are available from the NCD FTP site Edit them to suit your environment or use them as guidelines for the syntax to use in launcher configuration files for individual users The syntax used for defining root menus in a launcher configuration file is label function where label Is the item label that appears in the root menu function Is the f function or command executed when the user selects the item Place an exclamation mark before functions that are composed of commands such as a remote shell command When the function is an mwm f function name such as f menu or f title the exclamation mark is unnecessary Tip The mwm functions supported by ncdrunwm are f kill f lower Including unsupported functions in a f maximize f minimize f move f normalize f resize f exec launcher configuration file results in a warning message that the launcher is f menu f nop f quit_mwm f restart f separator and f title ignoring unknown keyword function 7 12 Starting and Configuring Local Clients Starting Local Clients Adding Local Clients to a Root Menu Tip Do not use remote shell commands to start window managers Use the host based nedrunwm application launcher instead Tip You can also use remote shell commands in st
386. t contains information such as currency conversions for a specific geographic area Java Files and Directories ncdinstall installs the files listed in Table 14 1 Files are installed by default in the java directory which is located in the tftpboot ncd Xncd 5 1 xxx directory If you are using secure TFTP the location is secure_dir tftpboot ncd Xncd 5 1 xxx where secure_dir is the secure directory Table 14 1 Java Directories and Files Directory or File Description classes zip A compressed file containing the base class files These are class files that provide access to resources such as the network the windowing system and the host file system This file must be accessible through NFS A zip file is an archive much like a tar file A zip file contains other files which may be individually extracted classes A directory containing the same files as those in the classes zip file If Java cannot access the classes zip file using NFS it uses TFTP to access files in this directory lib appletviewer properties A file containing data and messages used by appletviewer This file is not editable hotjava properties A configuration file to be placed in a user s home directory for configuring appletviewer 1 Classes are the fundamental units of a Java application they contain executable code and data Classes can be stored in files or archives on a local system or on a network serve
387. t deal of network traffic Running the following tests may help you track down a faulty connection Can the Host Connect to the Terminal Use the ping 1 utility from a host to find out whether the host can connect to the terminal If you want the terminal to respond to ping s requests set the ip respond to broadcast icmp parameter to true Setup gt Change Setup Parameters IP gt Respond to Broadcast ICMP A single directed ping request is sufficient to determine the status of the terminal Can the Terminal Connect to the Host Use the Test Network utility to find out if the terminal can contact a host 1 Display the Test Network dialog box Utilities gt Test Network 2 Inthe Host field enter the hostname IP address or DECnet address of the host whose connection you want to test A hostname ending in double colons is a DECnet name Troubleshooting 18 29 Network Configuration Problems 3 Configure the following Ifyou specified a DECnet host specify the number of test packets you want to send over the network in the Packets field By default NCDware sends only one test packet By default the test utility times out if it doesn t receive an answer from the host within 20 seconds To specify a different timeout period enter the time in seconds in the Time field By default the test utility sends a packet of 56 bytes To send a larger packet specify the number of bytes
388. t mount command when you mount a PC card file system On AIX hosts use o soft timeo 30 retrans 10 and wsize 2048 NFS Mount of a Local File System On Solaris 2 3 or 2 4 or HP UX hosts use o soft retrans 10 and wsize 2048 On SunOS hosts use o soft and retrans 10 By default all hosts can access the local file system and all hosts have read write access You can specify both the hosts that have access and the default access permission To change the default policy for all access to the local file system via NFS use the file nfs access control default parameter The default setting is read write and the other choices are read only and no access To specify the hosts that can access the local file system and specify the access policy for each host use the file nfs access control list policy This parameter is set automatically by ncdinstall to the following file nfs access control list local 0 0 0 0 Read Only xfloppy 0 0 0 0 Read Write Using a Local File System 9 9 Configuring a PC Card for Booting Configuring a PC Card for Booting This section describes how to prepare a PC card for booting terminals and how to configure the terminal for PC card booting Quick Start cards purchased from NCD already have the files required for booting installed on them For more information about these cards see Using a PC Card in Your NCD Thin Client Device Prepar
389. tatistics and status about XRemote Displaying a Remote Terminal s Statistics To view another terminal s statistics 1 Select connect to New Unit from the File menu in the Show Statistics menu See Chapter 4 for information about 2 In the dialog box type the other terminal s hostname or Setting passwords IP address and one of the following passwords Configuration daemon read write password no default password Configuration daemon read only password You can use the default password which is public Global password no default password The remote terminal s Statistics menus appear Getting Information About Terminal Operations 8 13 Setup Menu Equivalents for Message Logging Parameters Setup Menu Equivalents for Message Logging Parameters Table 8 5 lists the remote configuration parameters used in this chapter and the corresponding fields in the Setup menus This information is provided for system administrators who use the Console for terminal configuration Table 8 5 Setup Menu Fields for Configuring the Message Facility When Changes Savedin Parameter Setup Menu Field Take Effect NVRAM diag buffer size Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters gt Diagnostics gt Buffer Size diag log file Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters Diagnostics gt Log File diag timestamp frequency Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters Diagnostics gt Timestamp
390. te Configuration Parameters Setup Menu Equivalents for Remote Configuration Parameters Table 5 1 lists the remote configuration parameters discussed in this chapter and a description of the corresponding Setup menu field for each This information is provided for system administrators who configure terminals through the Console and for configuring parameters such as passwords and encryption keys that should only be set in the Console Table 5 1 Setup Menu Fields for Configuring Login Parameter Name Console Setup Menu Field When Changes Take Effect Savedin NVRAM exec startup commands Setup Change Setup Parameters Commands and Startup Startup Commands Immediately No exec user access control Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Access Control gt Enable Execution User Access Control Immediately login default hosts Setup Change Setup Parameters Login gt Default Hosts Immediately No login ncddm enabled Setup Change Setup Parameters Login gt NCDDM section NCD Display Manager Enabled Immediately login ncddm tcp port Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Login NCDDM section NCD Display Manager TCP Port Number Immediately login restrict host choices Setup Change Setup Parameters Login gt Restrict Host Choices Immediately 5 18 Login and X Session Management Setup Menu Equivalents for Remote Configurat
391. tents of the user s configuration file and applies settings in the file to the terminal s configuration User s File The user s configuration file is initially empty Users who have access to the Setup menus in the Console can save terminal configuration information in their stp files To save current changes into the stp file 1 From the File menu of a Setup menu Change Quick Setup Change Setup Parameters or Change User Preferences select Save to File 2 The name of the stp file is displayed in the dialog box Click on OK 3 Changes are saved to the stp file You can delete the stp files if you don t permit users to configure their own terminals The Generic Remote Configuration File The ncd_std generic file contains parameters used by all terminals on the network The terminal does not directly load the generic file if there is a terminal specific file The terminal specific file reads the generic file Figure 4 2 shows an example of the file created by ncdinstall 4 8 Terminal Configuration Methods Configuring Terminals Using Remote Configuration Files ncd_std standard terminal configuration file tcpip name server protocol both tcpip dns default domain ncd com tcpip name servers 139 40 202 19 exec startup commands login 139 40 202 19 xserver default font path built ins usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf misc usr lib X
392. terminal remotely make sure your terminal and the remote terminal are running the same version of NCDware Otherwise configuration changes may result in errors You must set a configuration password as described in Setting Passwords on page 4 20 for information on setting passwords before you can display or change another terminal s setup values using the Setup menus To use the Setup menus to configure another terminal on the network 1 Select connect to New Unit from File menu of the Change Setup Parameters Change Quick Setup or Change User Preferences window 2 In the dialog box displayed Type the terminal s name or IP address in the Unit field Type the relevant password in the Password field 3 The Setup menu for the other terminal is displayed and you can use it as if you were configuring your own terminal The title of the Setup menu window identifies the remote terminal you re connected to 4 Follow the procedures described in Changing Parameters in Setup Menus on page 4 16 to configure the terminal 5 To disconnect from the remote terminal click on Cancel at the bottom of the window or select Close from the File menu Terminal Configuration Methods 4 19 Configuring Terminals Using TELNET Configuring Terminals Using TELNET Configuration daemon and Preferences daemon Daemons that run in the terminal and provide network and local access to a terminal s configu
393. that Display PostScript needs for operation The DPS extension uses two types of virtual memory 1 Shared VM holds system fonts and other resources shared by all contexts 1 Private VM holds fonts specific to each context The Color Rendering File The color rendering file CIE dict19c dat contains a PostScript rendering dictionary that allows the DPS extension to provide device independent color This file is loaded for each DPS context The information in the file allows all requests for color to be honored The output generated by DPS depends on the output device Onmonochrome monitors the output consists of dithered halftone patterns of black and white pixels 1 On grayscale monitors the output consists of halftone patterns using gray levels 1 Oncolor monitors the output consists of the requested color or a dithered pattern of RGB pixels that approximates the color The Context Initialization File The context initialization file InitProc dat executes arbitrary PostScript code when a context is created You can use the file to set various user parameters or to initialize local virtual memory Configuring Display PostScript 17 7 Adobe Fonts for DPS Adobe Fonts for DPS NCDware includes the following fonts for use with the DPS extension I Adobe outline fonts 1 Font metrics in AFM Adobe Font Metric format LY Adobe fonts in hand tuned bitmap format Table 17 1 lists the fonts included in the dist
394. the document from the network before displaying it in the document window The browser can temporarily store documents for faster retrieval the next time they are requested If you request a document you have seen before during the current session the browser checks to see if it is in the cache and loads it from there instead of retrieving it from the remote site You can increase or decrease the amount of terminal memory reserved for cached files by specifying the size in KB in the browser cache size parameter The default is 0 KB and the range is 0 to 100000 Although a large cache improves browser performance and reduces network traffic it may restrict the amount of memory available for other applications The cache size can be viewed but not set in the browser s Edit Preferences menus Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser 15 11 Setting Browser Variables and Controlling Preferences Specifying Maximum TCP IP Connections Permitting the browser to open multiple TCP IP connections can improve browser performance For example with multiple connections images can be loaded simultaneously instead of one at a time To set the maximum number of current TCP IP connections use the browser max connections parameter The default is 5 simultaneous connections and the permitted range is 1 to 32 The user can reset the maximum TCP IP connections from the browser for the duration of the browser session however this preference is
395. the login host 5 3 to 5 4 Login Chooser access from the Console 7 3 command and options 7 3 defined 5 2 no host listed 18 14 reappearing 18 16 specifying hosts listed 5 4 to 5 5 Windows NT connections 5 5 login failures troubleshooting 18 15 logout action configuring 8 7 specifying login hosts through BOOTP DHCP 3 8 starting 18 14 troubleshooting 18 14 to 18 18 with UNIX System V shadow password file 18 15 Xaccess file 5 2 XDM AUTHORIZATION 1 5 9 5 10 xdm config file 5 2 5 8 xdm keys file 5 9 Xreset file 5 2 Xresources file 5 2 Xsession file 5 6 to 5 7 Xstartup file 5 2 see also NCD Display Manager xdm config file 5 2 5 8 XDMCP X Display Management Control Protocol 5 1 xdm errors 18 16 xdm keys file 5 9 5 10 xev 1 18 24 xfloppy pathname 9 2 xinitre file 16 15 xinitremote 1 16 1 18 33 xinitremoterc file 16 15 18 33 XKeysymDB file keysym database problems locating 18 11 XLFD X Logical Font Description use in resource specification 6 4 xlsfonts 1 18 19 xmodmap 1 18 23 xrdb 1 execution from Xsession 5 6 including in startup file 18 17 XRemote data compression mode 18 36 Dialer printing 16 18 setting up the modem 16 7 starting a connection 16 6 starting connection 16 4 error message logging 18 32 features 16 1 to 16 4 font access methods 16 17 garbled characters 18 33 hardware requirements cabling 16 6 LAN usage 16 5 modem 16 5 16 6 to 16 8 serial port usage 16 5 helper program customizing
396. the same as the terminal specific file plus the suffix stp for example C0289604 stp 1 The generic file ncd_std created only once not created if it already exists This file is for storing configuration data common to a group of terminals All configuration files are placed by ncdinstall in the default configuration file directory usr lib X11 ncd configs on the boot host On hosts using secure TFTP configuration files are normally in tftpboot usr lib X11 ncd configs If the file access method is TFTP the configuration files must be world writable and world readable If you do not use ncdinstall to add terminals or you prefer to create your own configuration files you can start with the example file on the NCDware CD ROM 4 6 Terminal Configuration Methods Configuring Terminals Using Remote Configuration Files Lines preceded by a pound sign are comments The Terminal Specific Configuration Files This section describes the two terminal specific files created by ncdinstall for each terminal you add System Administrator s File The terminal specific system administrator s configuration file created by ncdinstall contains the assignments and read commands shown in the example in Figure 4 1 These entries are explained in the text following the figure ncd_std standard terminal configuration file read usr lib X11 ncd configs nced_std modules directory tftpboot modsxpt modules load polic
397. the top Follow the directions in the initial screen to display the Network screen In the Network screen follow the directions at the bottom of the screen to set the parameters listed in Table 18 1 Troubleshooting Boot Failures Table 18 1 Network Menu Parameters Field Setting Get IP Addresses From NVRAM Terminal IP Address Terminal s IP address First Boot Host IP Address Boot host s IP address In addition the following parameters are often set Tip Second Boot Host IP Address The second and third boot hosts are Third Boot Host IP Address for backup in case the terminal cannot Broadcast IP Address boot from the first boot host If the boot host is on a different subnet from the terminal you must set the following Gateway IP Address Subnet Mask 3 Move to the Boot screen and set the parameters listed in Table 18 2 4 Move to the Done menu and reboot the terminal Table 18 2 Boot Menu Parameters Field Setting Boot File The basic X server file for example Xncdhmx TFTP Boot Directory or The directory containing the X servers for example tftpboot NFS Boot Directory Config File The terminal s configuration file if you are using remote configuration files for example nced_std TFTP Order Set the boot method to be tried first to 1 NFS Order LOCAL Order UNIX Config Directory The configuration file directory if you are using remote configuration f
398. these commands to print to a local printer or to another NCD terminal that has a printer attached to it For the local clients that have print commands in their menus NCD Terminal Emulator 3270 terminal emulator NCD Using Printers with NCD Terminals 10 1 Connecting a Printer to a Terminal Mosaic Browser and Applet Viewer you can add local or remote printers to client print dialogs Connecting a Printer to a Terminal Connecting a local printer consists of attaching the printer to a port In addition you may need to configure the serial port and the serial or parallel daemon Printer Cabling See your printer manual and terminal You can connect a printer to an NCD terminal s serial or hardware booklet to determine which parallel port interface to use I Serial port connection Use a null modem cable DTE to DTE Parallel port connection Use a cable equipped with a DB 25 connector on one end and a Centronics parallel interface on the other Configuring Terminal Ports and Daemons This section describes how to configure a serial port for a local printer Information is included about the parameters used to configure the serial and parallel daemons although these parameters seldom need to be changed Configuring the Serial Port and Serial Daemon The serial interfaces table configures the serial port To configure a serial port for printing 1 Enable the serial port To enable a termina
399. tics Buffer Size XRemote Data Compression Mode By default XRemote uses data compression mode LZW 12 Although compression mode LZW 14 results in better performance it also uses more memory Disabling Local Clients By default all of the local clients are available for use and are loaded into terminal memory at the user s request If some clients are not necessary at your site you can disable them and prevent their use by listing them in the exec disabled commands table Setup Change Setup Parameters Commands and Startup Disabled Commands See Chapter 7 for information about Another way to disable local clients is to prevent selected disabling local clients modules from loading by specifying them as unloadable in the modules load policy table Setup Change Setup Parameters Loadable Modules Load Policy Tip Whichever method you use the disabled or non loadable If you disable the Setup menu clients clients are grayed out in the Console menus to indicate that they cannot be used to configure a remote terminal they are not usable ARC Cache Size Change the maximum size of the ARC cache to 0 xserver arc cache max 0 Backing Store Disable backing store pref xserver backing store disabled 18 36 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Display PostScript Adding Memory If you find you must add memory check the hardware documents shipped with your terminal to find out how much
400. tility that sets a variety of display and keyboard user preferences including changing and displaying the font path Numerics 16 bit color A 1 24 bit color A 1 3179G terminal emulator command and options 7 4 defined 7 4 3270 terminal emulator command and options 7 3 defined 7 3 Keymap Editor 11 1 to 11 12 3287 print emulator 7 9 A access control local clients disabling 7 15 host based 7 16 remote shell rsh remsh command 7 17 user based 5 12 5 13 7 17 Local File Manager 9 4 9 7 local file system 9 9 SNMP 4 21 terminal configuration data 4 28 to 4 29 X server 5 9 XDM 5 8 to 5 11 5 12 Access denied for file Monitor message 18 8 Access Points wireless configuring 13 8 address Ethernet see Ethernet address IP see IP address physical see Ethernet address Token Ring see Token Ring address Boot Index address discovery 3 7 to 3 10 AnswerBook on Solaris 18 38 applets see Java NCD Mosaic Browser appletviewer local client 14 3 application launcher errors 18 27 Asking for host login host not responding appears X server message 18 15 Audio Enabled Setup menus 12 30 autoConnect resource ncdterm 5 16 autoReconnect resource ncdterm 5 16 backing store messages about 18 34 bitmap fonts see fonts bitmap bl command Boot Monitor 3 30 bn command Boot Monitor 3 30 boot host backup boot hosts 3 5 how to determine 8 10 Boot Monitor accessing 18 21 actions at boot time 3 2 bl comman
401. ting existing connections Use the Windows Access properties dialog box instead Controlling the Windows Access Dialog Box The local client command name of the Windows Access utility is icaui You can use this command as described in the discussion of local clients in Chapter 7 The icaui command has no arguments For more information see the icaui 1 man page Automatically Displaying Windows Access To automatically display the Windows Access chooser when the user logs out or restarts the terminal add the icaui command to the exec startup commands parameter in the terminal s remote configuration file If you want the Windows Access chooser to appear automatically and do not want the user to log on to the 12 12 Accessing Windows NT Servers Other Methods of Starting Windows NT Connections terminal make sure there is no login command in exec startup commands Preventing Modifications to Windows Access If you do not want users to modify existing connection properties create new connections or delete connections you can disable the ica enable chooser editing parameter by adding the following line to the terminal s remote configuration file ica enable chooser editing false The default for this parameter is true which allows users to make changes in the Windows Access dialog box This parameter cannot be set in the Console s Setup menus Other Methods of Starting Windows NT Connections The previous sect
402. tings in the WinCenter administration tools on Windows NT servers The WinCenter parameters are overridden by similar settings in the Windows Access utility and in icaclnt and wincen command lines These parameters take effect the next time the user logs in and they are not saved in NVRAM Specifying Colormap Usage This section describes how to specify colormap usage to dampen or reduce colormap flashing The X colormap defines the colors available for all clients As clients start cells in the colormap are allocated When all of the available cells in the colormap are used up no new colors can be allocated As a result some applications may be displayed in unexpected colors In this manual colormap flashing refers to the colors in an application s windows changing and occurs when the user switches to a Microsoft Windows application from a non Windows application Colormap flashing is caused by one application s colormap taking priority over another s You can control colormap flashing by stipulating that certain types of programs use the Windows standard colors and selecting the setting that results in the least amount of colormap flashing with the programs you use Be aware however that some applications may fail if only the Windows standard colors are available In addition reducing the number of colors in the WinCenter window 12 24 Accessing Windows NT Servers About the WinCenter Configuration Parameters to 16
403. tion and the terminal attempts to communicate using the new domain number To display the domain number gt wd Valid Wireless Network Domain is 0 15 Default Domain is 0 Current Domain is 0 In the Console you can display the domain number in Change Setup Parameters Network Interfaces Domain Channel To display the current domain number using TELNET view the net domain channel parameter Changing the Roaming Configuration The term roaming describes a network in which terminals are moved from the range of one Access Point to the range of another A terminal can roam if there is more than one access point with the same domain and same security ID in the wireless network The value of the roaming parameter determines how quickly the terminal switches from one Access Point to another Configuring a Wireless Terminal 13 3 Configuring the Terminal To change the roaming setting use the wr command for example gt wr 1 Setting Roam Configuration to 1 After you press Return the terminal s NVRAM is updated with the new information The values for this command are 1 Ois slow Use this setting if coverage is sparse that is there are only a few Access Points in the area LJ 1is normal and is the default Use this setting if the area is not overcrowded with Access Points LI 2is fast Use this setting if there are many Access Points in the area To display the current roaming setting type gt wr Vali
404. tion describes the following optional Local File Manager tasks 1 Specifying a password 1 Setting up host based access control 1 Specifying the TCP and TELNET ports No password is required for the Local File Manager on the local terminal If you are using host based TELNET to run the Local File Manager or accessing a remote terminal from the local terminal you must define a password for the Local File Manager You specify a password through the Console Setup gt Change Setup Parameters Access Control File Manager section Password This password takes up space in the area of NVRAM reserved for passwords and certain other strings The password takes effect immediately after you click Apply Instead of setting a separate password for accessing the Local File Manager you can use the global password Setting Up Access Control for the Local File Manager You can control which network hosts have permission to access a terminal s local file file system To set up an access control list for the Local File Manager 1 List the hosts permitted access in the file manager access control list table Each entry in this table consists of a hostname or network address followed by the type of network connection tcpip or ncdnet 2 Set the file manager access control enabled parameter to true Using a Local File System 9 7 NFS Mount of a Local File System Specifying the Ports for Local File Manager Access
405. tion information for the Proxim Access Point To display current values type the following command f usr sbin snmpinfo m dump v h name o proxim defs where name is the host name of the Access Point The other version of the command allows you to change the values in the Proxim Access Point although some values do not change until the unit is rebooted To change values in the Access Point f usr sbin snmpinfo m set v c private h name o proxim defs variable instance value where name Is the host name or IP address of the Proxim access point variable instance Is the name of the SNMP variable you are changing value Is the value of the variable as defined in the Proxim documentation For more information on snmpinfo refer to the man pages for snmpinfo and mosy on your UNIX system Finding the SNMP Variables For descriptions and syntax of all of the SNMP variables for configuring a Proxim Access Point see the MIB file 13 10 Configuring a Wireless Terminal 14 Configuring and Using Java Tip Procedures in this chapter provide directions for configuring terminals through remote configuration files For system administrators who use the Console for terminal configuration information about Setup menu fields is provided at the end of the chapter This chapter describes NCD s implementation of the Java Virtual Machine JVM version 1 1 4 The JVM is a network programming environment for creating an
406. tion specifies a password required for connecting to a remote terminal using the h option See the ncdstats 1 man page Statistics Show Wireless show wireless Displays information about the wireless Access Point Explora Explora Pro and Explora 400 450 only No Console item touchscreen Enables software support for a touch screen monitor Do not use the pref xserver current pointing device parameter with touchscreen because touchscreen automatically puts the terminal in mouse and extension device mode See the User s Guide and the touchscreen 1 man page No Console item java Starts standalone Java applications See the java 1 man page No Console item startjava Displays the Applet Viewer dialog box No Console item ncdclock Displays the local time in analog analog analog or digital digital form The help option digital lists all options See the ncdclock 1 man help page No Console item video The MPEG1 video decoder driver Displays a video without the Video Player graphical user interface See the User s Guide or the video 1 man page 7 8 Starting and Configuring Local Clients Summary of Local Clients Table 7 1 Local Client Menu Choices Commands and Functions Continued Console Name amp Location No Console item Command and Options ncd3287 Function Starts the NCD 3287 print emulator a local client for printing from
407. tocol Before using SNMP to configure an Access Point you must install and set up the Proxim MIB This involves reading the MIB II file proxim mib from the Proxim DOS diskette labelled Configuration Tool and making the MIB accessible to SNMP commands on a UNIX host Installing the MIB To install and set up the MIB on an AIX host place the Proxim diskette labelled Configuration Tool into the diskette drive of the AIX host Type the following command dosread a proxim mib proxim mib This loads the MIB II file that contains configuration variables for the Proxim Access Point The MIB file for your Access Point may have a different name and the command to use on your UNIX host may be different Making the MIB Accessible To make the MIB accessible to SNMP commands on the UNIX host run the mosy command usr sbin mosy o proxim defs usr samples snmpd smi my usr samples snmpd mibII my proxim mib Tip This command creates a file called proxim defs in the format For AIX versions from 3 2 up to 4 0 required by the snmpinfo command for displaying and the smi my and mibll my files are in usr Ipp snmpd changing variables Configuring a Wireless Terminal 13 9 Configuring the Access Point Displaying and Changing Variables The snmpinfo command allows you to display or change Proxim variables There are two basic versions of the command One version of the command displays the current configura
408. tor message 18 6 host software NCDware 2 4 hostname terminal adding to system files 3 26 specifying through BOOTP DHCP 3 7 hosts testing connection to 18 29 hotjava properties file 14 4 ICA Browser Wait Timeout Setup menus 12 30 ICA Client automatic connections 12 17 client name 12 15 color depth 12 14 configuration parameters 12 22 connections adding to root menu 12 18 in Login Chooser 12 19 remote shell command 12 18 Start Local Command 12 18 using Windows Access 12 7 to 12 13 diagnostic messages 12 23 disabling queries 12 23 initial program 12 16 keyboards supported 12 20 keymaps and keyboards 12 16 master browser 12 22 published applications 12 9 ICA Client continued retry attempts 12 23 video cache 12 10 12 14 wait time 12 23 window size 12 15 see also Windows Access ica chooser entries parameter 12 12 icaclnt command defined 12 13 options 12 14 ica enable chooser editing parameter 12 13 12 30 ica extended diagnostics parameter 8 14 12 23 12 30 icakbds directory 12 20 ica retry attempts parameter 12 23 12 30 icaui command 12 12 ica wait time parameter 12 23 12 30 ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol status information 8 12 IEN 116 3 6 3 11 ifconfig 8 18 31 ImageTool on Solaris 18 39 Incorrect object file Boot Monitor message 18 7 Incorrect product file Boot Monitor message 18 7 info command Local File Manager 9 6 installing NCDware see ncdinstall Internet Protocol status inf
409. trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Windows and Microsoft are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Other trademarks and service marks are the trademarks and service marks of their respective companies All terms mentioned in this book that are known to be trademarks or service marks have been appropriately capitalized NCD cannot attest to the accuracy of this information Use of a term in this book should not be regarded as affecting the validity of any trademark or service mark Revisions Revision history of this document Part No Revision Date Description 9300672 Rev A November 1998 Revised for NCDware 5 1 9300569 Rev B October 1997 Revised for NCDware 5 0 9300461 Rev A August 1996 Revised for NCDware 4 1 9300353 Rev A July 1995 NCDware 4 0 first release of this guide Contents Chapter 1 About this Manual Intended Audience 1 1 How to Use This Manual 1 1 About NCD Manuals 1 3 Conventions Used in this Manual 1 5 Comments on the Manual 1 6 Chapter 2 Introduction to Thin Client Devices and NCDware NCD Terminals and the Network Environment 2 1 The X Window System 2 2 NCDware Software 2 3 Boot Monitor 2 3 X Servers 2 4 Host Resident Utilities 2 4 Chapter 3 Preparing Terminals for Booting Terminal Boot Actions 3 2 Booting Preparations Performed by ncdinstall 3 3 Setting the Token Ring Network Speed HMxX Terminals 3 3 Contents Optional Preparations Before Booting 3 5 Improv
410. tup Menu Field take Effect NVRAM browser http proxy Setup Change Setup When the No overrides Parameters Browser gt browser starts Network Proxy Settings section HTTP Proxy Overrides browser java applets Setup Change Setup When the No Parameters Browser User browser starts Preference Overrides section Java applets browser jscript active Setup Change Setup When the No Parameters Browser User browser starts Preferences Overrides section Jscript JavaScript routines browser max Setup Change Setup When the No connections Parameters gt Browser General browser starts section Maximum TCP IP connections browser module Setup Change Setup When the No Parameters Browser gt browser starts General section Browser Module browser smtp email Setup Change Setup When the No server Parameters Browser gt browser starts Network Proxy Settings section SMTP Email Server browser socks host Setup Change Setup When the No Parameters Browser gt browser starts Network Proxy Settings section SOCKS Host browser socks host port Setup Change Setup When the No Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser 15 21 Setup Menu Equivalents for Browser Configuration Parameters Table 15 3 Setup Menu Fields for Browser Parameters Continued When Changes Saved in Parameter Name Setup Menu Field take Effect NVRAM file service table Setup Change Setup Immediately No Parameters gt File Service gt F
411. tus information 8 12 troubleshooting 18 13 Index 16 NFS continued UID and GID controlling file access 5 13 returned by NCD Display Manager 5 12 nmosaic see NCD Mosaic Browser No response from terminal parallel protocol may not be enabled X server message 9 22 No such XDMCP host X server message 18 15 node licenses 3 17 3 26 node name DECnet how to find 8 10 Number of Colors Setup menus 12 30 nv command Boot Monitor 9 14 NVRAM non volatile RAM defined 3 2 limited space 4 21 4 29 password storage 4 21 4 29 resetting 18 1 to 18 2 saving parameter settings in 4 17 NVRAM checksum error Boot Monitor message 18 6 O Object file larger than available memory Boot Monitor message 18 7 P PageView on Solaris 18 40 Parallel daemon status information 8 12 parallel port cable for printer connection 10 2 configuring for printing 10 3 parallel daemons table corresponding Setup menu field 9 28 setup for floppy drive 9 21 setup for printer 10 3 Setup menu field for 10 14 Index passwords access to configuration data 4 21 4 22 4 29 appearance when set 4 25 global 4 21 4 29 Local File Manager 9 4 9 7 SNMP 4 21 PC cards access via NFS mount 9 8 booting manually from 18 4 booting other terminals from 9 17 to 9 20 configuration file loading from 4 6 9 11 files required for booting 9 10 font file loading from 9 12 terminal configuration for PC booting 9 13 to 9 17 XRemote use with 16 2
412. udes changes made in the Setup menus Insert the PC card in the terminal and boot the terminal Make sure that the X server has access to the files you want to copy to the PC card through the file service table parameter Start the Local File Manager as described in Starting the Local File Manager on page 9 3 If the PC card has not been formatted use the format command to format the card Formatting takes about two minutes per megabyte v4 Ahhh 44 Ss f OLLLLLL Formatting the card destroys any data on the card 8 y y Use the copy command to place an X server file on the PC card If you are copying a compressed server recommended for 4 MB PC cards be sure to include the bl extension when naming the file on the PC card For example gt copy tftpboot Xncd 5 1 xxx Xncdhmx bl Xncdhmx bl Using a Local File System 9 11 Configuring a PC Card for Booting 7 Create a directory named modsmodel where model specifies the terminal model such as hmx or xp on the PC card and copy each desired X server module into it For example on an HMX terminal gt mkdir modshmx gt copy tftpboot Xnced 5 1 xxx modshmx setup hmx modshmx setup hmx 8 Copy the configuration files into local on the PC card for example gt cp usr 1lib X11 nced ned_std necd_std gt cp usr 1lib X11 ncd ncd_std stp ncd_std stp 9 You can place fonts needed by the terminal on the PC card Depending on the capacity of the card and the nu
413. ued launcher problems 18 27 local version command 7 5 configuring root menu 7 11 restarting 7 11 starting from xsession 5 7 slow startup 18 24 supported functions 7 12 ncd_std generic configuration file as created by ncdinstall 4 8 to 4 10 use on a PC card 9 11 see also remote configuration files ncd3287 local client 7 9 ncdclock local client 7 8 ncdconsole 1 7 2 ncddm see NCD Display Manager ncdfloppy efined 9 21 see also floppy drive ncdinstall installation program actions of 3 3 adding terminals to the network 3 7 boot preparations 3 3 browser installation 15 4 15 10 15 18 changes made to etc bootptab 3 25 changes made to etc hosts 3 25 changes to XDM files for the NCD Display Manager 5 13 configuration files created by 4 6 defined 3 1 font installation 6 1 for terminal network configuration 3 25 to 3 28 Java files installed 14 2 Java browser fonts installed 15 18 license daemon starting 3 22 license file installation 3 20 license management binaries installing 3 19 list of commands 3 25 ncdinstall continued modifying data in system files 3 27 to 3 28 name service parameters set 4 10 starting the NCD Display Manager 5 13 NCDkbd txt file 12 20 ncdlicense 1 3 18 3 22 ncdloadprefs 4 13 ncdlogin 1 7 3 ncdlogout 1 7 3 ncdloguser 1 5 12 ncdlp hostside print utility defined 10 4 using 10 5 to 10 7 ncdmkfdir 1 17 11 ncdmkfontdir 6 4 9 13 NCDnet see DECnet ncdpref 1 7 7 ncdprint host
414. ueue data stream request a printer is name type banner page located print lpr servers ncedu0l ncd com parallel 1 ascii Local ascii to parallel 1 false ncduOl ncd com serial 1 ascii Local ascii to serial 1 false 138 44 169 33 engrl postscript Engineering PostScript printer true pubs_nt pubsl nt postscript Techpubs PostScript Printer false a Figure 10 4 Example Local Client Print Table 24 When you add rows to the print table use the special syntax for adding rows to tables that have automatic entries For example print lpr servers 1 pubs_nt pubs1 nt postscript Pubs Printer false If a print queue is to be used for printing from Java applications such as the Applet Viewer or for printing from the NCD Mosaic Browser the data stream type must be PostScript d If the printer is on a Windows NT system set the data stream field to nt postscript 1 If the printer is on a UNIX system set the data stream field to postscript For remote printers on NCD terminals use the following syntax for the queue name rmt port_number The queue name for a printer on serial port 1 is rmt 87 For printers on serial ports 2 and 3 the queue names are rmt 5962 and rmt 5963 respectively Using Printers with NCD Terminals 10 11 Printing from Local Client Menus Printing from Terminal Emulator Windows This section explains the Terminal Emulator print commands and
415. uld use to start clients from the UNIX shell Runall but the last client in the background except for commands that must run in the order in which they are listed such as xrdb 1 1 Run the last client in the foreground When this client exits or is terminated by the user the XRemote session ends 1 Ifthe user normally logs in on a terminal that runs XDM you can make the XRemote environment identical to the local environment by copying the user s xsession file as Setting Up XRemote 16 15 Accessing Fonts When Using XRemote the startup file for XRemote or by setting the XINITRC variable to point to the xsession file Anexample startup file follows This file uses the ncdrestartwm command to start the local NCD Window Manager ncdwm Tip Load client resources A local window manager usually xrdb load S HOME Xres performs better than a host based Start the local window manager window manager for XRemote ncdrestartwm xsetroot solid gray amp xclock g 50x50 0 0 bw 0 amp xterm g 80x24 0 0 amp xterm g 80x24 0 0 Configuring the Helper See the Xremote 1 man page for the You can use a xservremote file in the user s home directory to available options start a customized Xremote helper In the file include an Xremote command line followed by the options you want to use Accessing Fonts When Using XRemote In any XRemote mode the terminal can access fonts using the followi
416. ult font access protocol TFTP is enabled on the host and that the fonts included in the NCDware distribution are installed in the default directory usr lib X11 ncd fonts These actions are performed during installation by ncdinstall Terminals also contain built in fonts to use in X server downloading and when downloaded fonts are unavailable Fonts are organized into font directories containing font files definitions of fonts and the fonts dir and fonts alias font management files Fonts and management files are in subdirectories of the directory usr lib X11 ncd fonts Configuring Font Service 6 1 Using Bitmap Fonts Bitmap Font Formats font server Host based software that relieves the X server of all tasks related to downloading fonts it also scales outline fonts The NCD font server is described in Using the NCD Font Server on page 6 8 By default an NCD terminal searches for fonts on the boot host If you have specified other initial file servers the terminal searches for fonts on them as well The terminal s font path specifies the directories in which it should search for fonts Without a font server NCD terminals can read the following compressed 12 bit compression and uncompressed font formats 1 PCF Portable Compiled Font 1 NCD s SNF Server Normal Font L DWE DECwindows Format Putting Fonts on a Non Standard Host Tip The file initial server 1 and file initial serv
417. update process is interrupted before the new Boot Monitor is written to PROM the Boot Monitor will not have the settings necessary to operate the terminal In that case you would have to return the base to the factory for rework For this reason NCD recommends that you promptly reboot terminals as soon as you have configured them for Boot Monitor update and that you not configure terminals for Boot Monitor update when power outages are likely to occur Updating the Boot Monitor Updating the Boot Monitor To update a terminal s Boot Monitor C 2 1 In the terminal s remote configuration file set the boot prom update file parameter to the absolute pathname of the Boot Monitor update file Reboot the terminal The terminal downloads and verifies the entire update file Ifthe update file is a newer version than the current Boot Monitor installed in the terminal the Boot Monitor in the terminal is updated Ifthe terminal s current Boot Monitor is at the same version or a later version than the downloaded file no action is taken A Boot Monitor update takes about 15 seconds Bibliography The following books describing the X Window System are available at computer book stores I OSF Motif User s Guide Release 1 2 Open Software Foundation Prentice Hall I X A Guide for Users Jerry D Smith PTR Prentice Hall I X Window System User s Guide Uday Pabrai and Hemant Shah Artech House Volu
418. upload If the crash is reproducible but you can t diagnose the reason To transfer information from the NCD for the crash you can upload information about the crash and ee prea pa send the resulting file to Technical Support Uploading saves the state of the terminal at the time of the crash and must be done before rebooting the terminal You can FTP the file to NCD or copy the uploaded information to a tape and send it to NCD for analysis Contact NCD Technical Support for information about how to send the file You can use either TFTP or NFS for X server image uploading Uploading Files Using TFTP Tip The host must be providing TFTP services If the terminal is Some versions of the Boot Monitordo booting or loading files via TFTP it is safe to assume that it can not support upload using TFTP and the file naming syntax described here up load via TFTP as well particularly the dump suffix If the To upload using TFTP procedure fails to work contact NCD Technical Support for help 1 Prepare a file on the host for uploading the X server image The file must be empty must be writable by others and must have the suffix dump appended to its name touch tftpboot file dump chmod 666 tftpboot file dump 2 Use the Boot Monitor up command to upload the X server image Make sure you provide a full pathname for the file and resolve links to the file locally to the Boot Monitor When specifying the file in t
419. ure the font directory is a subdirectory of the TFTP home directory Tip The font filename extension indicates its format for example snf for SNF formatted fonts pef for PCF formatted fonts and dwf for DWF formatted fonts You can add bitmap fonts by including them in the font directory and entering the font name in fonts dir To add bitmap fonts 1 Ifyou don t already have a font directory for the fonts you re adding use mkdir 1 to create one 2 Make sure that the font directory is on either the boot host or an initial file server If it is not map the new directory s as shown in Putting Fonts on a Non Standard Host on page 6 2 3 Use chmod 1 to make the font directories world executable and world readable and the font files world readable 4 Make sure the font files are in formats that the terminal can read NCD SNF PCF or DWF 5 If fonts are in BDF Bitmap Distribution Format convert them to PCF using ncdbdftopef 1 For example nedbdftopcf myfont bdf o myfont pcf 6 Copy or move the font files into the font directory To compress fonts to save disk space run compress 1 in 12 bit mode on the new font files Use 12 bit compression For example compress b 12 myfont pcf Configuring Font Service 6 3 Using Bitmap Fonts Using Alternate Fonts Tip If your site has many terminals you should maintain a fonts alias file in a font directory accessed by many o
420. urn on extended font diagnostic messages as well 3 Configure diagnostic message logging 4 Reboot the terminal Troubleshooting 18 11 Terminal Can t Find Other Files If the Terminal Loaded a Configuration File See Chapter 3 for more information about the file service table If the terminal loaded a remote configuration file but cannot load other files the configuration file may contain incorrect settings Check the file service table parameter Setup gt Change Setup Parameters gt File Service File Service Table NCD recommends that you return this parameter to its default setting If You Are Using TFTP for File Transfers 18 12 Troubleshooting This section provides solutions for TFTP file transfer problems Secure TFTP Problems A common problem is trying to load files from a host that is using secure TFTP If the host is using secure TFTP all files loaded using TFTP must reside in or beneath the secure directory You can find out if secure TFTP is in use by checking the line in the host s etc inetd conf file that starts the tftpd daemon If secure TFTP is in use the tftpd command is usually followed by the r or s option Some implementations of TFTP set the secure directory without the r or s switch Other implementations use the etc passwd file to set secure TFTP There are three ways to solve this problem Putall of the files that must be loaded using TFTP into the secure directo
421. use B zier curves Allows users to import and display encapsulated postScript EPS files in applications that support this format Automatically adjusts output to the current screen resolution so that an application looks the same on any screen Allows easy porting of application programs to other DPS environments NCDware includes the following components for DPS J DPS X server modules For information on managing X server modules see Chapter 3 DPS support files For information on support files see Using DPS Support Files on page 17 3 Adobe font files For information on DPS fonts see Configuring DPS Font Access by X Clients on page 17 11 The requirements for using DPS on an NCD terminal follow m Using DPS requires a valid license for each terminal If you do not have DPS licenses contact NCD Sales Support If you have licenses and need to configure license services see Chapter 3 After adding a license for a terminal reboot the terminal so that the X server can read the PostScript resource file Additional terminal memory may be required For information on the amount of terminal memory required to use DPS see the NCDware Release Notes 17 2 Configuring Display PostScript Using DPS Support Files m You must use NFS Network File Service as the file transfer protocol for DPS See Chapter 3 for information about configuring the terminal s file service table Using DPS Support Files
422. used for storing a terminal s X server font and configuration files It can also store Token Ring support Parallel Ethernet PC board An NCD interface board that incorporates parallel communication channel an Ethernet interface and a socket for a PC card Point to Point Protocol An Internet standard for transmitting datagrams over serial links Programmable read only memory A formal description of message formats and the rules computers must follow to exchange those messages A PC card with the server files configuration file font and color definition files already installed Glossary 9 Glossary 10 RARP resolution root window root menu RS 232 C rsh remsh rshd Serial daemon SLIP SNMP startup file Reverse Address Resolution Protocol Used by devices such as NCD terminals to determine their Internet address at startup when they only know their hardware address In monitors expressed as the number of pixels horizontally and lines vertically on screen The window that fills the screen during an X session All windows opened by clients appear on top of the root window Menu displayed by placing the pointer on the root window and clicking a mouse button An accepted industry standard for serial communications connections UNIX utilities for remotely starting programs On NCD terminals used for remotely starting local clients Terminal resident daemon for starting local cl
423. user information 5 13 Setup menu field for 5 18 login ncddm tcp port port for NCD Display Manager 5 13 Setup menu field for 5 18 login restrict host choices restricting login hosts 5 5 Setup menu field for 5 18 login xdm action on disconnect Setup menu field for 8 14 terminal action on logout 8 7 login xdm authentication key 5 19 Index login xdm broadcasts Login Chooser configuration 5 5 login to first host to respond 5 4 Setup menu field for 5 19 login xdm broadcast wait time Setup menu field for 5 19 time to wait for response 5 5 Logout Console defined 7 3 function of 7 3 logout confirmation dialog box 8 7 logout local client 7 3 Logout dialog box 8 7 Low On Memory popup warning messages 18 34 low memory warning defined 18 34 disabling 7 16 M magic cookie defined 5 11 makepsres 1 17 5 man pages online 1 4 master browser ICA 12 22 memory adding SIMMs 18 37 amount available 18 34 Console warning messages 18 35 free determining 8 10 18 34 increasing free memory changes in font cache 18 35 changing data compression mode 18 36 disabling local clients 18 36 discarding X settings 18 35 reducing diagnostic message buffer 18 36 installed determining 8 9 18 34 popup warning messages 18 34 messages Boot Monitor boot failure 18 6 to 18 9 not logged 8 2 X server Console Messages hide box 8 2 dialog boxes 8 7 to 8 8 format 8 4 logging 8 5 to 8 7 types 8 3 viewing via TELNET 8 5 XRemote error mes
424. ust be set to the file Make sure Auto Save File is selected and click on User Changes which is the default Apply By default the changes are saved in the stp file on the To change this parameter use the host or PC card config auto saved info parameter In the configuration file scheme created by ncdinstall the contents of the stp file are read from the hex ip address file when the terminal boots If you don t want users to write changes into configuration files set the config auto save file parameter to false Loading Default Values When you load defaults from the Setup menus parameters are reset according to the values in the remote configuration file loaded at boot time To load a terminal s defaults contents of the remote configuration file 1 Click on Defaults at the bottom of the configuration window or select Restore Defaults from the File menu Change Setup Parameters and Change Quick Setup only Parameter settings in the terminal s remote configuration file are loaded into the terminal The Messages area shows the file s loaded 2 Click on Apply to put the newly loaded parameters into effect To load parameters from a different file select Read from File from the File menu and type the file s pathname in the dialog box 4 18 Terminal Configuration Methods Configuring Terminals Using Setup Menus Configuring a Remote Terminal through Setup Menus Tip When configuring a
425. va and using Java commands Chapter 15 Configuring the NCD Mosaic Browser and using commands for starting the browser Chapter 16 Setting up a terminal for remote use using NCD s XRemote software Chapter 17 Configuring terminals and hosts for applications that use Display PostScript Chapter 18 Handling problems that may occur when using NCDware Appendix A Using 16 and 24 bit color depth Appendix B Configuring terminals to supply date and time information Appendix C Updating the Boot Monitor on Explora 400 450 700 terminals The glossary explains terms used in this manual About NCD Manuals The following manuals are included with the NCDware CD ROM 1 NCDware CD Insert instructions for installing NCDware on UNIX and WinCenter hosts d NCDware Release Notes description of new features in this release known problems and problems that have been fixed d NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems information for system administrators d NCDware User s Guide introductory manual providing information to assist users in becoming productive with their terminals I Remote Configuration Parameter Quick Reference descriptions of remote configuration parameters d Using the 3270 Terminal Emulator how to use and configure NCD s 3270 terminal emulation software About this Manual 1 3 About NCD Manuals To order manuals contact NCD Sales Support at 650 694 0650 1 4 Ab
426. vice This manual is supplied with QuickStart cards Table 16 1 compares the PPP SLIP and XRemote protocols to help you decide which protocol to use for serial XRemote connections Table 16 1 Comparison of Protocols for XRemote Serial Connection PPP Protocol SLIP Protocol XRemote Protocol PPP and SLIP run on UNIX systems only Runs on UNIX systems Packets are autodetected Packets are not autode Packets are autodetected The termi The terminal automati tected The user must nal automatically changes the mode cally changes the mode of select SLIP from the Con of the serial port the serial port sole s Dialer menu Slower performance Faster performance Allows configuration of your terminal using remote con Remote configuration files and TEL figuration files or TELNET NET are not available The configura tion file on the PC card is used Difficult to manage Simpler more easily managed You can run X clients and all available network services You can run X clients applications such as NFS and TFTP Local File Manager commands only You can use the local Setup for managing files on a PC card and a name service menus to make changes to the config uration files on PC cards XRemote on a LAN You may want to use XRemote on an Ethernet or Token Ring LAN to improve performance If the user needs to run clients on a host that is on a different local network and the conn
427. vide the name service protocol By default the boot host is the name server host 1 Each row in the exec startup commands table contains a command for displaying a local client The default command in the file displays a login prompt for the boot host Because there are white spaces in the command line the line must be surrounded by quotes 1 Each row in the xserver default font path table is the pathname of a font directory containing fonts used by clients running on the terminal 1 The additions to the file service table parameter permit users to write their preference files and hot list files from the NCD Mosaic Browser when you are using TFTP for file access 1 The apply command applies all of the preceding parameter settings to the current configuration Example Configuration File from the NCDware Distribution If you don t use ncdinstall to add terminals and want to create your own configuration files you can use the example file hex_ip sample included on the NCDware distribution and installed by ncdinstall in usr lib X11 ncd configs The parameters in the file are the same as those in Setup Change Quick Setup All parameters in the example file are set to their default values 4 10 Terminal Configuration Methods Configuring Terminals Using Remote Configuration Files To use the example file 1 Copy the file to the terminal specific filename which is the terminal s IP address in hexadecimal or to the g
428. wer command 14 4 Setup menu field for 14 11 java cache class file caching class files 14 3 Setup menu field for 14 11 java directory class file directory 14 3 Java home directory 14 8 Setup menu field for 14 11 K Keyboard Type Setup menus 12 31 keyboards Boot Monitor compatibility 18 24 control caps lock keys swapped 18 22 escape key errors 18 23 events displaying 18 24 mapping see Keymap Editor shift key problems with 18 22 troubleshooting 18 21 to 18 24 type attached to terminal how to find 8 9 Windows NT connections 12 20 keycap defined 11 3 keycode defined 11 1 keymap defined 11 1 ICA Client 12 16 12 20 troubleshooting 18 21 to 18 24 WinCenter 12 22 Windows NT connections 12 20 see also Keymap Editor Index Keymap Editor applying keymap to a window 11 8 command 7 4 defined 11 1 to 11 2 file service table entry required 11 7 importing a keymap 11 8 keyboard translations editing 11 10 license requirement 11 1 mapping the keyboard 11 5 to 11 6 11 10 to 11 12 starting 11 2 writing keymap to a file 11 7 keymap_editor see Keymap Editor keysym defined 11 1 Kill X Clients dialog box 8 8 L LAT logging in through 7 4 X server module load policy requirement 3 15 launcher see ncdrunwm launchre file 7 12 license requirements determining features requiring licenses 8 9 features that require licenses 3 16 Java 14 1 Keymap Editor 11 1 NCD Mosaic Browser 15 2 supplying keys through ncdinstall 3 26
429. which you want to connect and the TELNET diagnostics port in the Service field The default port number is 5998 For example ncdul0 5998 Click oK The current messages display in a Terminal Emulator window To see all of the messages use the window scroll bar When you are finished close the TELNET connection and the Terminal Emulator window by selecting Exit from the File menu Logging Messages to a File You can log messages to a file using the NFS protocol 1 Specify the filename in the diag log file parameter There is no default filename or directory so you must specify the complete pathname The log file must be accessible through the file access table described in Chapter 3 Place the file in a directory accessible through the table or create a new entry in the table The file access method in the table entry must be NFS Getting Information About Terminal Operations 8 5 Console Messages Configuring Message Logging You can configure 1 Time stamps attached to the messages LI Size of buffer used for saving messages in the terminal 1 Extended messages for file and font access Configuring Message Time Stamps Messages collected in the buffer and viewed through TELNET have time stamps appended to them Time stamps are not displayed in the Console message area Time stamps indicate when the message was issued relative to the last reboot of the terminal Time stamps follow the format d hh mmiss days h
430. ws NT Servers Setup Menu Equivalents for Remote Configuration Parameters can specify a password in the file smb default password parameter Note however that the password is not encrypted this may present a security risk in your environment These parameters take effect immediately are not saved in NVRAM and cannot be set in the Setup menus Even if a username and password are set in the remote configuration file the user may have to enter a username and password under the following circumstances 1 The shared directory is in an NT domain for which the specified username is not valid 1 The attempt to access the shared directory fails for some other reason for example a special password is required to access the directory Setup Menu Equivalents for Remote Configuration Parameters Table 12 7 lists the remote configuration parameters discussed in this chapter and the corresponding Setup menu field for each This information is provided for system administrators who configure terminals through the Setup menus Table 12 7 Setup Menu Fields for Configuring Windows NT Connections Parameter Setup Menu Field When Changes Savedin Take Effect NVRAM config auto save file Change Setup Parameters gt Immediately No Configuration Configuration Daemon Service section gt Auto Save File config auto save file ename Change Setup Parameters gt Immediately No Configuration Configuration Daemon Service sect
431. y fil nable nfs server tru file enable floppy filesystem t file nfs access control list local 0 0 0 0 Read Only xfloppy 0 0 0 0 Read Write unit license key 1234567890123456 login ncddm enabled tru 01020309 stp auto save file which is under user control read usr lib X11 ncd configs 01020309 stp Figure 4 1 Terminal Specific Remote Configuration File The commands and assignments in the terminal specific file are 1 The first read statement reads the contents of the generic file and adds the assignments in the generic file to the terminal s configuration data 1 The three parameters in the file group are not always present in the file Their purpose is to export the local file system on the terminal s PC card or floppy diskette They are placed in the file if you chose to export the file system while adding the terminal For more information about these parameters see Chapter 9 Terminal Configuration Methods 4 7 Configuring Terminals Using Remote Configuration Files 1 The unit license key parameter is not always present in the file It is placed in the file if the terminal is licensed for optional features and you enter one or more license keys while adding the terminal m The login ncddm enabled parameter facilitates use of Java and the NCD Mosaic Browser For more information about ncddm see Chapter 5 and Chapter 15 1 The second read statement reads the con
432. y simultaneously Windows 95 compatible Press the Pause key Console Messages See the NCDware Reference Manual The Console s Messages hide box displays messages logged for explanations of all of the X server by the X server and its modules such as the messages issued sua Ae by the Configuration daemon which maintains terminal configuration data Messages generated by the Boot Monitor are not logged Messages generated by applications such as XDM may be logged in files maintained by the applications Click to NCO User Services Console display Eemia Logn Terminale Wiedrsiigr Litia Setup Sintietie X server Messages messages Figure 8 1 Console Message Hide Box 8 2 Getting Information About Terminal Operations Console Messages See Using the 3270 Terminal Emulator for messages generated by the 3270 emulator See Enabling Extended Diagnostics on page 8 6 for information about displaying more messages Many of the messages displayed in the Console are issued by the terminal as it boots These messages show how the terminal reads its configuration file keymap file color definition file and fonts Other messages in the Console reflect ongoing operations such as starting clients and loading fonts as clients request them Most messages are informational reporting successful actions If the terminal is not operating as you would expect however messages in the Co
433. y wincenter colors 12 25 xserver font cache max size 18 35 xserver font path alias table 6 5 xserver initial x resources not used with XDM 5 15 resources for local clients 7 17 Setup menu field for 7 20 xserver keyboard type parameter 12 21 12 31 xserver retain font path 6 14 xserver retain x settings memory problems caused by 18 35 Xservers file 18 18 xservremote file 16 16 xsession file defined 5 2 guidelines for use 5 6 starting local clients 7 13 troubleshooting 18 16 xrdb in 18 17 Xsession file defined 5 2 purpose 5 6 sample files 5 6 starting local clients 7 13 troubleshooting 18 16 xrdb in 18 17 Index xset 1 18 20 Xstartup file 5 13 xterm 1 7 13 Index 27 Index Index 28
434. you use XRemote Setting Up a Direct Host Connection 16 8 Setting Up XRemote XRemote can be used to connect an NCD terminal directly to a local host over a serial cable Use a null modem cable or straight through serial cable with a null modem adapter Refer to the pinout diagrams in your terminal installation booklet NCD terminals are configured as DTE Data Terminal Equipment devices To set up a direct serial connection 1 Connect one end of the cable to a serial port on the terminal 2 Connect the other end of the cable to your local host or terminal switch box 3 Use the documentation for your host or terminal switch box to configure its serial port for 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity Setting Up the Terminal Setting Up a LAN Connection A terminal on a LAN requires no special setup Just make sure the XRemote host resident programs are installed on the host where the user runs xinitremote Setting Up the Terminal The X Server Resetting NVRAM Tip You can enter the Boot Monitor after the terminal boots by using the appropriate key combination see Table 3 5 on page 3 30 Setting up the terminal may involve the following steps 1 Making sure the terminal is using the correct X server 1 Setting the terminal s NVRAM to its default settings 1 Configuring the serial port and SLIP or PPP interfaces This section explains when you need to configure the terminal and how to do it If
435. ystem destroys all data on the card or disk On a floppy drive the q option formats more quickly but should be used only if the disk has already been completely formatted and you are sure it is in perfect condition containing no bad sectors The 720 option formats a 720K floppy disk Formatting a PC card requires about two minutes per megabyte help Displays a list of Local File Manager commands info or df filesystem Lists the total size in bytes of the local file system and the total number of free bytes available list or Is or dir R directory Displays a list of the files stored in the local file system The R option lists subdirectory content recursively mkdir dir_name Creates a directory in the local file system quit Disconnects from the Local File Manager rename file1 file2 Changes a filename without altering its contents rmdir directory Deletes directories reclaim Reclaims previously used file system space This command may take several minutes so use it after you have finished for PC card use only other operations on the local file system verify Confirms that the local file system structure is valid for PC card use only 9 6 Using a Local File System Configuring the Local File Manager Configuring the Local File Manager Specifying a Password See Chapter 4 for information on the global password This sec

NCDware System Administrator`s Guide for UNIX Systems

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents